JP2021007833A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance game amusement.SOLUTION: A first display performance is a performance which displays an advantageous mode suggestion image suggesting that a mode is advantageous to a playing customer by display means, when a game state is a second game state. A second display performance is a performance which is performed in a case where the variation frequency of a special symbol reaches a second regulated frequency after the first display performance, and which displays the advantageous mode suggestion image, even though the variation frequency of the special symbol reaches the second regulated frequency and the game state is changed to the first game state. A third display performance is a performance which is executed in a case where the variation frequency of the special symbol reaches a first regulated frequency after the second display performance, and which displays the advantageous mode suggestion image.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

JP-A-2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
One of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state relatively advantageous to the player, provided with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects. A gaming machine in which a game is played in a gaming state, and when the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number, the gaming machine is changed to the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the second specified number of times, which is less than the first specified number of times, the gaming state becomes the second specified number of times. The gaming state of the above may be changed to the first gaming state.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an advantageous mode suggestion image suggesting that the display means is a mode advantageous to the player in the second gaming state.
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the second. It is an effect of displaying the advantageous mode suggestion image even though the game state has been changed to the first game state after reaching the specified number of times of 2.
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, and the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed. It is a production,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the second display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Application example 3]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 2
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the third display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Application example 4]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 3
The advantageous mode suggestion image includes a moving image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to the application example 4.
In the first display effect, the remaining number of times indicating the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the display effect of the sub-display screen 64. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed stop symbol residual display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed stop symbol residual display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixed stop symbol residual display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display area change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display area change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display area change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation | variation display area overlap effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation | variation display area overlap effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation | variation display area overlap effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol sudden decision stop effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol sudden decision stop effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol sudden decision stop effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the character thing interlocking production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the character thing interlocking effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the character thing interlocking effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the scroll effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the scroll effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the scroll effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special variation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special variation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special variation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol defect performance A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol defect performance B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative symbol defect performance C. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image continuation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image continuation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating mode suggestion image continuation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the multi-section display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the multi-section display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the multi-section display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display effect A by function. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display effect B by function. It is a figure for demonstrating the timer display effect C by function. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image transition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image transition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image transition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image absorption effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image absorption effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific image absorption effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the character string decomposition effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the character string decomposition effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the character string decomposition effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the jackpot game count display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the double timer display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the double timer display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the double timer display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the final screen display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the final screen display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the final screen display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating promotion hold continuous production A. It is a figure for demonstrating promotion hold continuous production B. It is a figure for demonstrating promotion hold continuous production C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation instruction display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation instruction display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation instruction display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the button special display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the button special display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the button special display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect button valid invalid display effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect button valid invalid display effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the effect button valid invalid display effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation automation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation automation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation automation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the relationship between the 1st movable accessory and the frame movable accessory. It is a figure for demonstrating the double character production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the double character production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the movable member contact effect C.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of the game machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction as seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The game machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, the effect button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the like. It is equipped with a frame movable body 69. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. On the right and left sides of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as a frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can move in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface approaches or moves away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable body 69 is stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60, and moves (advances) so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the handle 60. ), And can stand still at the position where it touches the handle 60. The frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position.

The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during an effect that is executed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right according to the effect and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of the liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a paired position via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to produce light emission during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is a diagonal line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is a diagonal line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , Ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening open It includes a starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has an area and a reserved digested image display area (the reserved display area) on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the change icon 9C, and the change icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". In the left symbol display area, the left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of, for example, a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9". The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a described later and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b are displayed. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first special symbol is reserved. 2 It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front surface) of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a to display the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advance position in front of. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from above to below at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp portion 12 includes an entrance portion through which the game balls flow in and an outlet portion through which the game balls flow out, and the game balls flowing in from the entrance portion flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 may be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 should be in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (winning random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. A process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbols are variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". This is a process of determining whether or not a hit is achieved. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70, for example. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be (second state). In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probability variation operation port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that inhibits or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second large winning opening 35 when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to include the large winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges the game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting port 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the indicators 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operations hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first major winning opening 30 and second major winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LEDs for the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. As for the variation display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is set as the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5). It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (winning random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. As the sensors connected via the relay board 88, the large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the first large winning opening sensor 30a, and the first Two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to the program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. (including production symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, or acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and follows the operation pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. The fluctuation start command, fluctuation stop command, opening command, round designation command, ending command, game state designation command, V passage command, customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure hold storage area 85 includes a first special figure hold storage area 85a in which the first special figure hold is stored and a second special figure hold storage area 85b in which the second special figure hold is stored. In the first special figure hold storage area 85a, a random number value group (hold information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure hold is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the status of the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flag. Further, as the initial state of the counter, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub-ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub RAM 94, except for the evening-over effect counter, the information is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the state of the above command, counters other than the evening effect counter, and pre-judgment information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening-over effect counter is reset by turning the power of the game machine 1 off and on, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used in the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. Ordinary symbol random numbers take values in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is stored. It is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8 (A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8 (B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8 (C) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be judged as "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6-127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach the time of loss than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). It is a table referenced to do. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure 2 The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", "round designation command", and "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state, and the jackpot determination table T1 determines that the jackpot is "big hit", and the jackpot type determination table T5 determines that the jackpot is "16 RV passing jackpot". When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls are won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 shows the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", it is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second major winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. At that time, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..
Open the door.

4. Explanation of jackpot, etc. In game machine 1, there are "big hit" and "loss" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (1st jackpot 30 and 2nd jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) displayed as a stop. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is completed. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V passage scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second big winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The total number of rounds of "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot" is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and can easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short from 14R to 16R, and it is a round in which a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are such that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It has become. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. In addition, after the time-saving game is completed, the game state becomes a low probability low base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the game state in the "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot". However, it looks like a high-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the game state is changed. It is a latent state (latent probability variation state) that the probability is high even though it is a high probability low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent probability variation state. That is, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" big hit Low probability after the game (low accuracy) High base state) and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" jackpot After the game, high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state), and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" time saving end The later low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the time reduction of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" are performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots and 45/128 (about) for V-non-passing jackpots. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Judge the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8 (C)). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. In a situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the game is passed to the V region 39 during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy high-base state are "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", and " 16R (actually 13R) V will pass the jackpot. " For "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot", in the high accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. Ends with. In the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-accuracy high-base state (latent probability change) is the high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability change) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game. It ends when it becomes a state) or when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low probability state), a short time state, and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a low-accuracy high-base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In this jackpot, in the low probability high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. It ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) can be obtained rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / fail determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss predetermination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, the status, the counter, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "1" or "ON" for the ceiling flag, and the initial value of the other flags is "0" or "OFF". The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and the other period (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1 and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening in the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If no game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily transfers the acquired random number value group to a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used to perform the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from random value and fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence / absence pre-determination result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-judgment by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is pre-determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is pre-determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is “0” (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a normal symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). The winning random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if there is a "loss" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not the time is shortened), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random number value group acquired in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (big hit judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot judgment table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates by referring to the table for jackpots scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the fluctuation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to" P21 "to" P23 ") (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P4” to “P6”” in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach by using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (in the special figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to The portion “P14” and the variation pattern “P24” to “P31” in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is “P15” to The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Again, since the variation pattern selected depends on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). ”To“ P46 ”)). From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of winning jackpot together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, "100" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability change state, probability change counter value, time reduction state, time reduction counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of revolutions until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). .. Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" as the specified rotation speed is set in the ceiling counter. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by one (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of revolutions has elapsed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of times of time saving (number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that was temporarily closed after opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the large winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passage jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. In addition, the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to complete this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether it is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that wins the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14B), and the V opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And 1 second after closing is set as the V validity period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period for determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. It should be noted that the reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. In the case of "long opening", the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened when the second ball wins (here, a maximum of 31.5 seconds). ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), the second ball is generally won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when it is determined that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), the present process is terminated as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "100" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and sets the probability change counter to "100". The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "100" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified rotation speed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the big hit game, when the probability change flag is OFF, the b time is shortened (play time) when the probability change flag is turned off 500 times. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, and 12th round. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is being received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is output to the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag) , Ceiling counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, the values of the time saving effect counter, the probability variation effect counter, and the ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated based on the information included in the game state designation command. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time reduction (the number of games) is set in the time reduction effect counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during the probability change is set in the probability variation effect counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling effect counter. As a result, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-pass command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-pass information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and variation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. 39 (A), and the pre-judgment information included in the pre-judgment command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth reserved in FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 Predetermined information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined by, for example, a fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "miss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display and operation of a predetermined character, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. Multiple types of core production patterns are set to produce a loss without reach. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the count effect pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process includes the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of games) at the time of probability change, the number of remaining fluctuations during a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. At the time of probability change, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability change remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability change effect counter. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number based on the value of the time reduction effect counter at the time of time reduction.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects from the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the evening effect counter records the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from the time when the power is turned on by incrementing the effect counter for the evening each time when the variation effect end command is received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 or less, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is larger than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the game machine 1 has taken over the number of games of the previous day and the ram clear has not been performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3 = 50). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may erase the display or chance image representing the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the effect counter is TH4 (for example, TH4 = 100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5 = 200). As described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter based on the value of the evening effect counter, or based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. May be good. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (for example, TH6 = 100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (for example, TH7 = 70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8 = 50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined with reference to the effect control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5016 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variable effect is being produced (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is time to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the advance notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image.

9. Movement of the movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 50, the movement of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable accessory 15) are used. The operation of 69) and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a drive control for operating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. To do. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a moving mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7, and the lower end of which is located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper end and the lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front (front) of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). At the retracted position, only a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored so that the rest can be visually recognized, or the entire first movable accessory 14 may be stored and difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can be stationary at an arbitrary advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed at least in a part thereof, or may have a transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped in front of (front) of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each of them is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The two members are made of flexible members, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach or move away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60 (first aspect). .. As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60, that is, move so as to approach each other, and move to the handle 60, respectively. It can stand still at the touching position (second aspect). The frame movable accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move the two members in a direction away from each other so as to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can each display images independently. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect linked to the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of the effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

Hereinafter, the fixed stop symbol residual display effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. This fixed stop symbol residual display effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the fixed stop symbol residual display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the above and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol residual display effect A. The fixed stop symbol residual display effect is an effect in which when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed while the display of the stopped displayed decorative symbol is maintained. Is. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the hold icon 9A are changed on the display screen 7a. The icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed at "789" after the variable display, indicating the result of the previous special drawing lottery. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

The second region DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first region DA1 and is a different region that does not overlap with the first region DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2 is not displayed overlapping with the stopped display decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be partially overlapped with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R at that time. , May be displayed on the back side.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically side by side on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". The stop-displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r do not overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. The lowermost hold icon 9A among the four hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 51 (C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are newly displayed in the variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8f, the middle decorative symbol 8s, and the right decorative symbol 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are maintained in the stopped display state.

The third region DA3 of the display screen 7a is located below the second region DA2 and is a different region that does not overlap with the second region DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t in the third region DA3 is not displayed overlapping with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t may be partially overlapped with the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r at that time. , May be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51 (D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "567". The stop-displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t do not overlap with the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t. The lowermost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 51 (E), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t are stopped and displayed. The display is maintained in the same state. Here, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is the same as the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t. It has become. These decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

The fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a is located below the third region DA3, and is a different region that does not overlap with the third region DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the fourth region DA4 is not displayed overlapping with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t in the third region DA3. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z may be partially overlapped with the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t, and may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t at that time. , May be displayed on the back side.

As shown in FIG. 51 (F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a while the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a. Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r stopped and displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a. The display of 8f, 8s, 8t disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variablely displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". No decorative symbol is displayed on the first region DA1, the second region DA2, and the third region DA3 of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were stopped and displayed at "735" in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a disappear, and the decorative symbols are displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be in a state where it has not been done. The lowermost hold icon 9A of the two side-by-side hold icons 9A starts moving toward the change icon display area where the change icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure change is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (I), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 51 (J), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were variablely displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a were stopped and displayed at "135", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Disappears. The remaining hold icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol residual display effect B. The fixed stop symbol residual display effect is an effect in which when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed while the display of the stopped displayed decorative symbol is maintained. Is. Compared with the fixed stop symbol residual display effect A, the fixed stop symbol residual display effect B is displayed so that a plurality of decorative symbols overlap each other and a specific image that covers some of the decorative symbols is displayed. Etc. are mainly different. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the hold icon 9A are changed on the display screen 7a. The icon (the pending icon) 9C is displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed at "789" after the variable display, indicating the result of the previous special drawing lottery. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol variation (the variation).

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2 is partially overlapped with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. Here, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r of the second region DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first region DA1. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, or may overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as a whole.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed vertically side by side on the right side of the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". Part of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r overlaps the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the overlapped portion is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. The lowermost hold icon 9A among the four hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 52 (C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t are newly displayed in the variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8f, the middle decorative symbol 8s, and the right decorative symbol 8t displayed in the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are maintained in the stopped display state.

The third area DA3 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the second area DA2. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t in the third region DA3 is partially overlapped with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2. Here, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t of the third region DA3 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r of the second region DA2. The decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, or may overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as a whole. Further, the third region DA3 may partially overlap with the first region DA1, and in this case, the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t may partially overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

As shown in FIG. 52 (D), the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "567". Part of the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t overlaps with the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the overlapped portion is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t. The lowermost hold icon 9A among the three hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 52 (E), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z displayed in the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t are stopped and displayed. The display is maintained in the same state. Here, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is different from the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t. .. In the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t, the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. It is displayed as variable. On the other hand, the variation modes of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

The fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the third area DA3. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the fourth region DA4 is partially overlapped with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t in the third region DA3. Here, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z of the fourth region DA4 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t of the third region DA3. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t, or may overlap with the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t as a whole. Further, the fourth region DA4 may partially overlap with the second region DA2 and the first region DA1, and in this case, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are partially overlapped with the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Or decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may overlap.

As shown in FIGS. 52 (F) and 52 (G), in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a, from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a by the specific image TG, and the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r that are stopped and displayed on the screen and the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t that are stopped and displayed on the third area DA3 of the display screen 7a are covered, and the display disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, since the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z of the fourth region DA4, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (hold icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. The display is maintained even if the entire 7a is covered. That is, the specific image TG is on the back side of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z of the fourth region DA4, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first region DA1 and the decorative symbols 8l of the second region DA2. It is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t of the third area DA3, 8c, 8r.

Here, since the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the look-ahead changed hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, or the specific image TG may appear when the look-ahead changed hold icon 9A appears. Further, the specific image TG may appear when the variation of the special figure 1 is switched to the variation of the special figure 2, or the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z which were variablely displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "678". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed on the first region DA1, the second region DA2, and the third region DA3 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. The lowermost hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side starts moving toward the change icon display area, and the next special figure change is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (I), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are variablely displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a. When the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in FIG. 52 (H) is switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in FIG. 52 (I), the display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z continues. Or, the stop display of the decorative symbol may disappear once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol may be newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52 (J), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were variablely displayed in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "767", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Disappears. The remaining hold icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started.

[Confirmed stop symbol remaining display effect C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the fixed stop symbol residual display effect C. The fixed stop symbol residual display effect is an effect in which when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed after the variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next special symbol variation is displayed while the display of the stopped displayed decorative symbol is maintained. Is. Compared with the fixed stop symbol residual display effect A, the fixed stop symbol residual display effect C is displayed so that a plurality of decorative symbols overlap each other, and a specific image that covers some of the decorative symbols is displayed. Etc. are mainly different. In the fixed stop symbol remaining display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Has been done.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation).

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 53 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Here, an example is shown in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning a prize.

As shown in FIG. 53 (C), when the next special figure variation is started, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variation display mode. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the right decorative symbol 8z displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. When the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are maintained in the stopped display state.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area overlapping with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the second region DA2 is displayed so as to overlap with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. Here, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z of the second region DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first region DA1. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

Here, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is different from the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. On the other hand, the variation modes of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

As shown in FIGS. 53 (D) and 53 (E), in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, from the left side to the right side of the display screen 7a. A specific image TG appears. The specific image TG is an image like a shutter, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a are covered by the specific image TG, and the display is displayed from the display screen 7a. Disappear. On the other hand, since the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z of the second region DA2, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (hold icon) 9C are displayed on the front side of the specific image TG, the specific image TG is displayed on the display screen. The display is maintained even if the entire 7a is covered. That is, the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the second region DA2 and on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1.

Here, since the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number, an effect in which the specific image TG appears is executed. The timing at which the specific image TG appears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may appear when the look-ahead changed hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, or the specific image TG may appear when the look-ahead changed hold icon 9A appears. Further, the specific image TG may appear when the variation of the special figure 1 is switched to the variation of the special figure 2, or the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variablely displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". At this time, the specific image TG is displayed in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative pattern on the back side of the specific image TG is not displayed. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the two side-by-side hold icons 9A starts moving toward the change icon display area, and the next special figure change starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are variablely displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a. When the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in FIG. 53 (F) is switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in FIG. 53 (G), the display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z continues. This may be the case, or the stop display of the decorative symbol may disappear once, and the variable display of the decorative symbol may be newly displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (H), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were variablely displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "678", and the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C. Disappears. The remaining hold icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed, and the next special figure variation is started. When the next special figure change is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the specific image TG disappears, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed in the first area DA1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the second region DA2 is displayed so as to overlap with the stopped displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z correspond to the same special symbol variation.

Here, since the hold icon 9A in the pre-reading changed state becomes the variable icon 9C, the effect that the specific image TG disappears is executed. The timing at which the specific image TG disappears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image TG may disappear when the fluctuation is executed a predetermined number of times after the appearance of the specific image TG, or when the specific image TG appears at the time of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation starts. The specific image TG may disappear. Further, the specific image TG may appear when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached, and the specific image TG may disappear when the special figure 2 fluctuation starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that were variablely displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a and the decorations that were variablely displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a. The symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are all stopped and displayed at "678".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the fixed stop symbol residual display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (C) to 51 (E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are variablely displayed in response to the first special figure variation are stopped and displayed. The first effect to be performed, and after the first effect, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t that are stopped and displayed, the second feature following the first special figure change. It is possible to execute a second effect in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z variation display corresponding to the diagram variation is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (E) and 51 (F), after the second effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x, which are variablely displayed in response to the second special figure variation, While maintaining the display of 8y and 8z, execute the third effect in which the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s and 8t that are stopped and displayed after the fluctuation is displayed in response to the fluctuation of the first special figure disappears. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51 (G) to 51 (I), after the third effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x that are variablely displayed in response to the second special figure variation. , 8y, 8z are stopped and displayed, and the set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z that are stopped and displayed are not displayed, and corresponds to the third special figure variation following the second special figure variation. A fourth effect in which a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z variable display is displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved by the unprecedented novel effect of switching from the effect in which the previous stop pattern remains to the effect in which it does not remain. .. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 (F) and 52 (G), in the third effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y that are variablely displayed in response to the variation of the second special figure. , 8z, and the specific image TG is displayed on the front side of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t which are stopped and displayed after the fluctuation is displayed in response to the first special figure fluctuation. By being covered with the specific image TG, the display of the set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed after being changed and displayed in response to the first special figure change disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 (D) and 52 (E), in the second production, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z variation display corresponding to the second special figure variation is displayed. Is displayed overlapping with a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, and 8t that are stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (E), a set of decorative symbols 8f, 8s, 8t corresponding to the first special figure variation is displayed, and the second special figure variation is displayed. The variation mode is different from the variation display of the corresponding set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the fixed stop symbol residual display effect.
[Modification 1]
In FIG. 51 (I) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are newly displayed in the variable display mode in the fourth region DA4 of the display screen 7a. However, the decorative symbol may be newly displayed in a variable display mode in an area other than the fourth area DA4 of the display screen 7a.
Further, in FIGS. 52 (H) and 52 (I) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, the next special figure change is supported. It was assumed that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z was started. However, the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.
Further, in FIGS. 53 (F) and 53 (G) of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect C, after the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are stopped and displayed in the second region DA2 of the display screen 7a, the next special figure change is supported. It was assumed that the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z was started. However, the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next variation of the special symbol may be displayed in an area other than the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
The first effect in which the set of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in response to the fluctuation of the first special figure is stopped and displayed, and
After the first effect, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed, the set of the set corresponding to the second special figure variation following the first special figure variation. The second effect, in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed, can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
After the second effect, while maintaining the display of the set of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in response to the second special figure variation, the variable display is made in response to the first special figure variation. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the display of the set of decorative symbols that has been stopped and displayed disappears after being displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-2.
After the third effect, the set of decorative symbols varied and displayed in response to the second special symbol variation is stopped and displayed, and the stopped and displayed set of decorative symbols is not displayed. In the state, it is possible to execute the fourth effect in which the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the third special figure variation following the second special figure variation is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
A game machine according to the aspect A1-2 or the aspect A1-3.
In the third effect, the back side of the set of decorative symbols that are variablely displayed in response to the second special figure variation, and the variable display in response to the first special figure variation. A specific image is displayed on the front side of the set of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed after being displayed, and by being covered with the specific image, a stop display is displayed after the variation is displayed in response to the first special figure variation. The display of the above-mentioned set of decorative patterns disappears,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-4.
In the second effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation is displayed so as to overlap the stop-displayed set of decorative symbols.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-5.
The variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol variation and the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol variation are different from each other. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

The variable display area change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. This variation display area change effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variable display area change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Variable display area change effect A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the variation display area change effect A. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. In the variable display area change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variation display of the special symbol represents the variation display (special symbol variation) of the special symbol, and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 54 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Here, an example is shown in which one hold icon 9A is added by winning a prize. Further, here, by the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the gaming state is in the time saving state (normal). It shall switch to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, and the high base state).

When the gaming state is switched to the time saving state and the next variation of Special Figure 1 is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (C). The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the upper decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the lower decorative symbol 8z displayed in the vertically long area TA of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is varied and displayed so that the upper, middle, and lower symbols move from the left side to the right side, respectively. The area TA of the display screen 7a is a vertically long area that partially overlaps with the area YA, and the area area is about the same. A character image in "longitudinal mode" is displayed according to the variable display of the decorative patterns 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, it notifies the state in which the decorative symbols are arranged vertically. When switching from FIG. 54 (B) to FIG. 54 (C), that is, when switching from the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed side by side to the effect of displaying them in the vertical direction, the background image is also switched. You may.

As shown in FIG. 54 (D), in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the area TA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 54 (D), the same background image as in FIG. 54 (C) is displayed, while the display of the character image in the "vertical mode" disappears.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z which were variablely displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A are left as they are, and the hold icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The movement is started toward, and the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are variablely displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a. Here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. When switching from FIG. 54 (E) to FIG. 54 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image may be switched at the same time.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variablely displayed in the area TA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. In FIG. 54 (G), the same background image as in FIG. 54 (F) is displayed. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A are left as they are, and the hold icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The movement is started toward, and the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 54 (H), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have the same aspects as those in FIG. 54 (A), and include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. .. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. When switching from FIG. 54 (G) to FIG. 54 (H), that is, when switching from the state in which the decorative symbols are displayed vertically side by side to the effect of displaying them side by side in the horizontal direction, the background image is also switched. You may.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the decorative symbol 8x, 8y, 8z of the area TA according to the elapsed time from the next fluctuation (FIG. 54 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). Switch to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the area YA. The timing at which the display mode of the decorative symbol is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-reading changed state may be switched when the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B becomes the change icon 9C, or may be switched when the change is executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Further, it may be switched when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached and returned when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were variablely displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 54 (I), the same background image as in FIG. 54 (H) is displayed. The rightmost hold icon 9A of the two hold icons 9A arranged side by side starts moving toward the change icon display area, and the next special figure change (special figure 1 change) is started. Here, the gaming state remains the time saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

[Variable display area change effect B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the variation display area change effect B. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect B is mainly different from the variable display area change effect A in the change mode of the display area of the decorative symbol. In the variable display area change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, and the third are displayed on the display screen 7a. 1 Background image HK1 is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variation display of the special symbol represents the variation display (special symbol variation) of the special symbol, and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The first background image HK1 is an elliptical image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 55 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Here, by the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the gaming state is in the time saving state (normal probability state). And it shall be switched to the time saving state and the high base state).

When the gaming state is switched to the time saving state and the next variation in Special Figure 1 is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (C). The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the upper decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the lower decorative symbol 8z displayed in the relatively small horizontally long area YB of the display screen 7a. A variable display of a set of symbols indicates a variable display of a special symbol (variation of a special symbol), and a stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of a special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. The area YB of the display screen 7a is a horizontally long area below the area YA and does not overlap with the area YA, and the area area is smaller than the area YA. The first mode image MG1 including the character image of the "small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed relatively small is notified. When switching from FIG. 55 (B) to FIG. 55 (C), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative symbol changes, the background image is switched from the first background image HK1 to the first mode image MG1.

As shown in FIG. 55 (D), in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z continues in the area YB of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. In FIG. 55 (D), the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z which were variablely displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the hold icon 9A is left as it is, and the hold icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains the time saving state, and the display of the first mode image MG1 continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are variablely displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a. Here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a. A second mode image MG2 including a character image of the "continuous small display mode" is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. That is, it is informed that the state in which the decorative symbol is displayed relatively small continues. When switching from FIG. 55 (E) to FIG. 55 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started, the background image is switched from the first mode image MG1 to the second mode image MG2. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that were variablely displayed in the area YB of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. In FIG. 55 (G), the display of the second mode image MG2 continues. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A are left as they are, and the hold icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The movement is started toward, and the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state.

When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have the same aspects as those in FIG. 55 (A), and include the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the horizontally long area YA of the display screen 7a. .. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. Here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21, and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

The second background image HK2 having a gourd-shaped shape is displayed in accordance with the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The second background image HK2 is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C. When switching from FIG. 55 (G) to FIG. 55 (H), that is, when the size of the decorative symbol is switched from a small state to a large state, the background image is also switched from the second mode image MG2 to the second background image HK2. ..

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the decorative symbol 8x, 8y, 8z of the area YB according to the elapsed time from the next fluctuation (FIG. 55 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). Switch to the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the area YA. The timing at which the display mode of the decorative symbol is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-reading changed state may be switched when the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B becomes the change icon 9C, or may be switched when the change is executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Further, it may be switched when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached and returned when the play time ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "735". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 55 (I), the display of the second background image HK2 continues. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the hold icon 9A is left as it is, and the hold icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state. When the next special figure variation is started, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

[Variable display area change effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the variation display area change effect C. The variable display area change effect is an effect in which the display area in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed changes on the display screen 7a when the special figure 1 changes and the special figure 2 changes. The special figure 1 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 41a, and the special figure 2 variation means the variation of the special symbol in the 2 special symbol display 41b. The variable display area change effect C is mainly different from the variable display area change effect A in that the display area of the decorative symbol is changed. In the variable display area change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, and the frame are displayed on the display screen 7a. The image WK is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed inside the frame image WK, and the variable display of the set of symbols. Indicates the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol variation), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the special symbol lottery result. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Two hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The frame image WK is a horizontally long rectangular image, which is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed inside.

As shown in FIG. 56 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Here, by the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the number of fluctuations in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state) reaches 500 times, and the gaming state is in the time saving state (normal probability state). And it shall be switched to the time saving state and the high base state).

When the gaming state is switched to the time saving state and the next variation in Special Figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56C, a shutter that moves from above to below appears inside the frame image WK, and the shutter is released. By closing, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually disappear.

When the shutter is completely closed, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), a variable display of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z is displayed on the shutter. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are a set of symbols including the upper decorative symbol 8x, the middle decorative symbol 8y, and the lower decorative symbol 8z displayed in the relatively small horizontally long region SA of the display screen 7a. A variable display of a set of symbols indicates a variable display of a special symbol (variation of a special symbol), and a stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of a special symbol lottery. The decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the special figure 1 variation (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. The area SA of the display screen 7a is a horizontally long area inside the frame image WK and overlapping the shutter image, and the area area is smaller than the frame image WK. The background image may be switched between FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (D), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative symbol change.

As shown in FIG. 56 (D), in a state where the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z continues in the area SA of the display screen 7a, here, the game ball enters the second starting port 21. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold is newly displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z which were variablely displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "567". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the hold icon 9A is left as it is, and the hold icon 9B starts moving toward the variable icon display area. Then, the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (F), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z are variably displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a. The background image may be switched when switching from FIG. 56 (E) to FIG. 56 (F), that is, when the next special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (G), the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z that have been variablely displayed in the area SA of the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed at "789". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears along with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z. Here, since the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold, the two side-by-side hold icons 9A are left as they are, and the hold icon 9B is displayed in the variable icon display area. The movement is started toward, and the next special figure change (special figure 2 change) is started. The gaming state remains a time-saving state.

When the next special figure change is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the shutter moves upward inside the frame image WK, and the shutter opens, so that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are formed. It will gradually become visible. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the same "789" as the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, and 8z.

When the shutter is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 56 (I), the stop display of "789" of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z disappears, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have the same embodiment as in FIG. 56 (A), and include the left decorative symbol 8L displayed inside the frame image WK, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special figure 2 variation (the variation). The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. The background image may be switched between FIGS. 56 (G) and 56 (I), that is, when the position and size of the display area of the decorative symbol change.

Here, the display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the decorative symbol 8x, 8y, 8z of the region SA according to the elapsed time from the next fluctuation (FIG. 56 (C)) that reaches the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)). Switches from to to the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R inside the frame image WK. The timing at which the display mode of the decorative symbol is switched can be arbitrarily set. For example, the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B in the pre-reading changed state may be switched when the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B becomes the change icon 9C, or may be switched when the change is executed a predetermined number of times after reaching the ceiling. Further, it may be switched (the shutter is released) when the ceiling (b time reduction (play time)) is reached, and returned (the shutter is raised) when the play time is completed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were variablely displayed inside the frame image WK are stopped and displayed at "735". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. In FIG. 56 (J), the same background image as in FIG. 56 (I) is displayed. The hold icon 9A starts moving toward the change icon display area, and the next special figure change (special figure 1 change) is started. Here, the gaming state remains the time saving state. When the next special symbol variation is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display area change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) to 54 (G), in the region TA of the display screen 7a, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z variation corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. In the first effect in which the display is displayed and in the next special figure variation of the special figure variation executed in the first effect, a set of decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation is displayed. Can be executed with the second effect displayed in the area TA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (B), the special figure 1 change corresponds to the special figure 1 change before the special figure 1 change executed in the first effect. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the variable display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed in the area YA of the display screen 7a different from the area TA. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (C) to 54 (H), the special figure 2 variation after the special figure 2 variation executed in the second effect corresponds to the special figure 2 variation. A fourth effect in which a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R variable display is displayed in the area YA can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the gaming state is different between the first effect (time saving state) and the third effect (normal state), and the first effect (time saving state). ) And the second effect (time saving state) are the same in the gaming state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 to 56, the background image is different between the first effect and the third effect, and the first effect and the second effect are different. , The background image is different. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the region YA and the region TA partially overlap each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 56.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in the second modification, in the first effect and the second effect, a set of decorations is provided in the first area and the third area of the display screen 7a different from the second area. The variable display of the symbol is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable display area change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area change effect A, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R1 in the region YA and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the region TA may be executed in one variation. That is, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R1 in the region YA may be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z in the region TA during one fluctuation, or the decoration in the region TA may be switched during one fluctuation. The variable display of the symbols 8x, 8y, 8z may be switched to the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R1 in the area YA. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display area change effect A, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the area YA, and when the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z are displayed in the area TA, what are the areas YA and the area TA? Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and decorative symbols different from the decorative symbols 8x, 8y, 8z may be displayed in the area of the different display screen 7a. The same applies to the variable display area change effects B and C.

[Modification 3]
In the variation display area change effects A to C, the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2 may be reversed. That is, in the variation display area change effects A to C, the portion described as the special figure 1 variation may be executed as the special figure 2 variation, and the portion described as the special figure 2 variation may be executed as the special figure 1 variation. ..

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
In the first region of the display means, the first effect of displaying the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the variation of one of the variation of the special figure 1 and the variation of the special figure 2
In the next special figure variation of the special figure variation executed in the first effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special figure variation of the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation is displayed. The second effect displayed in the first area can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-1.
In the special figure change before the special figure change executed in the first effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure change of one of the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change. Is capable of executing a third effect displayed in the second area of the display means different from the first area.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-2.
In the special figure change after the special figure change executed in the second effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the other special figure change of the special figure 1 change and the special figure 2 change. Can execute the fourth effect displayed in the second area,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
A game machine according to the aspect A2-2 or the aspect A2-3.
The game state is different between the first effect and the third effect, and the game state is the same between the first effect and the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-4.
The background image is different between the first effect and the third effect, and the background image is different between the first effect and the second effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-2 to A2-5.
The first region and the second region partially overlap.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-6.
In the first effect and the second effect, the variation display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed in the first area and the third area of the display means different from the second area.
A game machine characterized by that.

The variable display area overlapping effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This variable display area overlapping effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variable display area duplication effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Variable display area duplication effect A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect A. In the variable display area duplication effect, a decorative symbol in the same state as the decorative symbol in the first area is newly added to the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative symbol is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the effect that is displayed. In the variable display area overlapping effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at "234". In accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the mode of being stopped and displayed at "234". The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a state of being synchronized with each other. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same symbol switching mode (variable mode) at the time of variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r varies so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively, as in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed so that each of the left, middle, and right symbols rotates horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

When the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the mode of stop display, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained in the stopped display state. Here, it is assumed that the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the form of the stop display at almost the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. After a while (for example, after 1 to 3 seconds) after the display, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be newly displayed in the stopped display mode. Further, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are still variablely displayed before the stop, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the variable display state are newly displayed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It may be stopped at the same time as the stop.

The second region DA2 of the display screen 7a is located below the first region DA1 and is a different region that does not overlap with the first region DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2 is not displayed overlapping with the stopped display decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be displayed with at least a part overlapping with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and at that time, they may be displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. However, it may be displayed on the back side.

The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 57 (C), when the next special symbol variation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed at "567". The fluctuation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 57 (E), when the next special figure change is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the stop display is displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been used are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (F), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are stopped and displayed at "789". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 57 (G), when the next special figure change is started, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are changed and displayed. During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, as shown in FIG. 57 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are newly displayed in the variable display in the first region DA1. That is, here, the effect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and are newly displayed is executed. The timing at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear is a predetermined time after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r is displayed. The timing at which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear may be the same as when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 57 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed at "735". The stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Then, the hold icon 9A starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57 (J), when the next special figure change is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r that had been stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 disappears, and the stop display is displayed in the first area DA1. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been used are displayed in a variable manner. The state of FIG. 57 (J) is the same as that of FIG. 57 (A), and then the state of FIG. 57 (B).

[Variable display area duplication effect B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect B. In the variable display area duplication effect, a decorative symbol in the same state as the decorative symbol in the first area is newly added to the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative symbol is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the effect that is displayed. The variable display area overlapping effect B is mainly different from the variable display area overlapping effect A in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other. In the variable display area overlapping effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. ing. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the variable display state. That is, the effect that the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and are newly displayed is executed. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a state of being synchronized with each other. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same symbol switching mode (variable mode) at the time of variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r varies so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively, as in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed so that each of the left, middle, and right symbols rotates horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

The timing at which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r appear is after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. The timing at which the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r appear may be the same as when the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area that partially overlaps with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2 is partially overlapped with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. Here, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r of the second region DA2 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first region DA1. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, or may overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as a whole.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed. It is stopped and displayed at "234". The stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 58 (D), when the next special figure change is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r that had been stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 disappears, and the stop display is displayed in the first area DA1. The displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the variable display state. That is, as in FIG. 58 (B), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the effect of being newly displayed is executed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed. 789 ”is displayed as a stop. As in FIG. 58C, the variation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 58 (G), when the next special figure change is started, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, which have been stopped and displayed in the second region DA2, are displayed as in FIG. 58 (D). The display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which disappeared and was stopped and displayed in the first area DA1, is changed and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 58 (H), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the variable display state. That is, similarly to FIGS. 58 (B) and 58 (E), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and a newly displayed effect is executed.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 58 (I), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed. It is stopped and displayed at "735". Similar to FIGS. 58 (C) and 58 (F), the fluctuation start timing and stop display timing of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are produced so that the front side and the back side are switched after the stop display. Here, after the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed on the front side of the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect is switched to the back side of the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Is done. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner by switching the front side and the back side. This alternating effect of the front side and the back side is continued over a plurality of fluctuations. The timing at which this replacement effect is started can be arbitrarily set. For example, it may be executed at the time of the change corresponding to the change icon 9C in the look-ahead changed state, or may be executed when the ceiling is reached.

[Variable display area duplication effect C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the variable display area overlapping effect C. In the variable display area duplication effect, a decorative symbol in the same state as the decorative symbol in the first area is newly added to the second area of the display screen 7a while the display of the decorative symbol is maintained in the first area of the display screen 7a. This is the effect that is displayed. The variable display area overlapping effect C is mainly different from the variable display area overlapping effect A in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are displayed so as to overlap each other. In the variable display area overlapping effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are specified on the display screen 7a. Image IMG and is displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the first area DA1 of the display screen 7a, and are a set of symbols. The variable display of the special symbol represents the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and correspond to the current special symbol fluctuation (the fluctuation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). The specific image IMG is an elliptical image, and is displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C.

As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the display of the specific image IMG disappears during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. The specific image IMG may disappear as the size decreases, may be framed out by moving, or may fade out. In addition, it may be divided into a plurality of fragments and disappear. The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears can be set arbitrarily. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear randomly for each fluctuation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of fluctuations becomes predetermined.

When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r covered with the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and the effect made visible by disappearing the specific image IMG is executed.

The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in a variable display state. That is, the effect that the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and are newly displayed is executed. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r displayed in the second area DA2 of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8L, It is in the same state as 8C and 8R. The same state here means that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate when fluctuating, stop when stopped, and correspond to the same special symbol fluctuation. That is, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in a state of being synchronized with each other. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same symbol switching mode (variable mode) at the time of variable display, or may be different from each other. Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r varies so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively, as in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Is displayed. The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r may be varied and displayed so that each of the left, middle, and right symbols rotates horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

The timing at which the specific image IMG disappears and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r appear is after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. There is.

The second area DA2 of the display screen 7a is an area overlapping with the first area DA1. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r in the second region DA2 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the first region DA1. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R of the first region DA1 are displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r of the second region DA2. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be displayed on the back side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are simultaneously displayed. It is stopped and displayed at "234". The stop display timings of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may be different from each other. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 59 (D), when the next special figure change is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the stop display is displayed in the second area DA2. The decorative patterns 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been used are displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed at "567". The variable icon (holding icon) 9C disappears in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts.

As shown in FIG. 59 (F), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is newly displayed. The timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is newly displayed is even after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) after the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r start to fluctuate. Alternatively, at the same time as the variation of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r starts, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be newly displayed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (G), the specific image IMG is newly displayed while the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are both variable and displayed. The timing at which the specific image IMG appears can be arbitrarily set. For example, the specific image IMG may appear or disappear randomly for each fluctuation pattern, or the specific image IMG may appear or disappear when the number of fluctuations becomes predetermined.

The specific image IMG is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r and on the back side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Therefore, when the specific image IMG is displayed, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are covered with the specific image IMG and the display disappears, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in front of the specific image IMG. The specific image IMG may appear by frame-in or by fade-in. It may also appear enlarged.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "735". With the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed, the display of the specific image IMG disappears again as shown in FIG. 59 (I). The method of extinguishing the specific image IMG may be the same as in FIG. 59 (B) or may be different. When the display of the specific image IMG disappears, the decorative patterns 8l, 8c, 8r covered with the specific image IMG are displayed. That is, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are displayed on the back side of the specific image IMG, and the effect made visible by disappearing the specific image IMG is executed. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are newly displayed in the stopped display state. That is, the effect that the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are in the same state as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and are newly displayed is executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59 (J), when the next special figure change is started, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that had been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears, and the display in the second area DA2 disappears. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r that have been stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. The state of FIG. 59 (J) is the same as that of FIG. 59 (D), and then the state of FIG. 59 (E).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display area overlapping effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (A), (B), (G), and (H), a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in the first region DA1 of the display screen 7a. A display different from that of the first area DA1 in a state where the display of a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is maintained in the first area DA1 after the first effect in which the display is displayed and the first effect. In the second area DA2 of the screen 7a, the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c in the same fluctuation or stop state as the change or stop state of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1. , 8r is newly displayed, and the second effect can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (A), (B), (G) to (I), in the second effect, a set of decorative symbols 8L displayed in the first area DA1. , 8C, 8R are variablely displayed, in the second region DA2, another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the variable display state, and after the second effect, the second A third set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are both stopped and displayed. You can perform the production. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (D), (E), (G) to (J), another set that is stopped and displayed in the second area DA2 after the third effect. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r of No. 1 are displayed in a variable manner again, while the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed in the first area DA1, are displayed in a variable manner and disappear. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 59.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (A) to 57 (C), in the second effect, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 is stopped. When displayed, the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are newly displayed in the stopped display state in the second area DA2, and are displayed in the first area DA1 after the second effect. Performing the fifth effect in which the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r displayed in the second area DA2 all start the variable display. Can be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 53.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 57 (C) and 57 (D), after the fifth effect, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 After the sixth effect in which the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r displayed in the second area DA2 are all stopped and displayed, and the sixth effect, they are stopped and displayed in the second area DA2. While the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are displayed in a variable manner again, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been stopped and displayed in the first area DA1 disappears without being displayed in a variable manner. 7 effects can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 59.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and a variation display in the second area DA2 are displayed. The variation display of a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r differs from each other in the mode of variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 58 and 59.
[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R displayed in the first area DA1 and a variable display in the second area DA2 are displayed. The variable display of the other set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r is partially overlapped. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, in the first effect, the specific image IMG is displayed in the second region DA2, and in the second effect, the specific image IMG disappears and the specific image Another set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r is displayed in the area where the IMG disappears. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable display area overlapping effect.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display area overlapping effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may have the same symbol switching mode (variable mode) at the time of variable display, or may be different from each other. You may be. Further, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r may overlap.

[Modification 2]
The effects of the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be combined as appropriate, or a part of them may be deleted. Further, the variable display area overlapping effects A to C may be continuously executed, or each effect may be repeatedly executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
In the first area of the display means, the first effect in which the variable display of the set of decorative symbols is displayed, and
After the first effect, in a state where the display of the set of decorative symbols is maintained in the first area, the display is displayed in the first area in the second area of the display means different from the first area. It is possible to perform a second effect in which another set of decorative symbols having the same variation or stop state as the variation or stop state of the set of decorative symbols is newly displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1.
In the second effect, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is variablely displayed, the other set of decorative symbols is variablely displayed in the second area. Is newly displayed with
After the second effect, both the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are stopped and displayed. Can perform the production of
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-2.
After the third effect, the other set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second area is changed and displayed again, while the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the first area is displayed. It is possible to execute the fourth effect that the display disappears without fluctuating display,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3.
In the second effect, when the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area is stopped and displayed, the other set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the second area. Is newly displayed with
After the second effect, the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area both start variable display. 5 productions can be performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-4.
After the fifth effect, the sixth set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are both stopped and displayed. Directing and
After the sixth effect, the other set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the second area is changed and displayed again, while the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the first area is displayed. The 7th effect that the display disappears without variable display can be executed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5.
The variation display of the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the variation display of the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area differ from each other in the mode of variation. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-6.
The variable display of the set of decorative symbols displayed in the first area and the variable display of the other set of decorative symbols displayed in the second area are partially overlapped and displayed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A3-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-7.
In the first effect, a specific image is displayed in the second area.
In the second effect, the specific image disappears, and the other set of decorative symbols is displayed in the area where the specific image disappears.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. In FIGS. 60 to 62, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.

This decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect can be executed when the mode is shifted to the special game mode. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed as an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Here, first, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A will be described, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C will be described in order.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production A]
The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A. The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is performed when the mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case where the mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular region as a variable display region of three decorative symbols (also referred to as a “variable region of the decorative symbol”). Three (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided. The left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed by rotating the reel from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the medium variation display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, The lateral distance dimension of the medium variation display area 8Cr and the lateral distance dimension of the right variation display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have a bright red color and are even. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). The size of the numbers "1" to "9" is about one-third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). It has dimensions, and the lateral distance dimension is a normal size having a distance dimension of about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area 8Lr (medium variation display area 8Cr, right variation display area 8Rr). .. The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right variation display area 8Rr which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. By doing so, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is displayed. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is more visible by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol is arranged. The variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the second. 4 Hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the second reserved display is displayed. Since the positions 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is composed of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as the first special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, there are four stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four hold icons (that is, the number of holds 3 or It is assumed that the number of holdings is 4), but the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21. Further, as the number of holds increases, the time (variation time) from the start to the end of the fluctuation effect (variation display) becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is 3 or the number of holdings is 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are. , Have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is in the foreground. By arranging so as to be on the side, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the hold number display area HS, the hold number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then the left variation display area 8Lr is variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that the decorative symbol 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R that fluctuates and displays the right fluctuating display area 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates and displays the medium variation display area 8Cr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that the medium variation display area 8Cr moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for normal games are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the center of each variable display area, so that the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9A placed on the first hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, The middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, which will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) by a medium-sized decorative icon is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A mode dedicated background image, and is large in the center of the display screen 7a. The message image MSG "Entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, which is a display mode different from the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in the game mode in the normal game state of FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B) described above, is started. ..

The background image dedicated to the A mode is a background image different from the background image for the normal game used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image dedicated to A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, as a condition for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A to occur, for example, the number of times the variation effect (variation display) is performed without hitting is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). It occurs when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times the normal state). Further, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding medium-sized left decorative symbol and medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, respectively. A second sub-variable region CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative symbol is varied (variably displayed) is provided. The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ has a vertical distance dimension that is about 5 times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ, and the lateral distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ is sub-variable. The lateral distance dimension is about 5 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol that are variable-effect (variable display) in the second sub-variable region CSZ are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable region KSZ. Although it is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative design, small medium decoration design, and small right decoration design, it is compared with the size of the left decoration design 8L, middle decoration design 8C, and right decoration design 8R. Is small. Further, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small medium-sized decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern, and are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the medium-sized right decorative pattern 8C. , The right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape and has a similar shape, and has the same color. That is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the left decorative symbol 8L and has the same color as the left decorative symbol 8L, and the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The medium-sized right decorative symbol has the same color as the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the right decorative symbol 8R and has the same color as the right decorative symbol 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable region CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable region CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, but in the present embodiment, the second sub-variable region CSZ is the second. During the period when the sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The variable region KSZ is not blocked. Further, by arranging the second sub-variable region CSZ so as to be on the foremost side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variable region CSZ and other effects are displayed. The second sub-variable region CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. That is, the content displayed in the second sub-variable region CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative symbol 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative symbol From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable effect (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative symbol, that is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. To.

In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in which the variation effect (variation display) is performed up to 115 times is started, the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol starts in the second sub-variation area CSZ. It is performed only a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed during the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable region CSZ. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ and the second variation effect (variation display) is performed, the "A mode entry" having a gold color (gold color) is performed. Message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" is displayed on the telop TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 60 (D)). Along the upper side of the display screen 7a, the telop is displayed repeatedly from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is being performed.

The telop TP1 which is the message image of "A mode" has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG of "entering A mode". The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, which is about four times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS). It has a size. Although the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are arranged so as to be on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left variation display which is a variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Right that overlaps with the upper region in the region 8Lr, overlaps with the upper region in the medium variation display region 8Cr, which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, and is the fluctuation region of the right decorative symbol 8R. It overlaps with the upper region in the variable display region 8Rr. In the present embodiment, the region in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is arranged behind the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display region 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. That is, the visibility of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle, or is made into particles and does not gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is performed and the predetermined number (10th) variation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, Immediately before the end of this variation effect (variation display), as shown in FIG. 60 (D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the background image for the counter image having the semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape is The horizontal distance dimension of the background image for the counter image, which has about three times the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and has this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, is sub. It has a size about 6 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the variable region KSZ (or the reserved number display region HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, the background image for the counter image is on the front side. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image, and other Even if the effect image appears, the counter image CNT arranged behind the background image for the counter image and placed in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the other effect image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is half. Through the transparent background image for the counter image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and other effect images (background image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) can be visually recognized.

Further, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right are accompanied by this (a little later than the start of displaying the counter image CNT). The decorative pattern 8R reappears and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that reappeared are the sizes before disappearing, that is, the left decorative symbols in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B). Although the size is the same as that of 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R, the positions where the left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that reappeared are temporarily stopped and stopped are displayed. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B) are different from the positions where the temporary stop display and the stop display are displayed.

Specifically, the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed in the game mode of FIG. 60B is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60 (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the left decorative symbol 8L is at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. It is on the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "1" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1".

The position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed in the game mode of FIG. 60B is the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R, whereas FIG. 60 In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the right decorative symbol 8R is not the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the right variable display. It is on the upper left side of the area 8Rr. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

The temporary stop display and stop display position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in the game mode of FIG. 60 (B) is the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, which is the variation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, whereas FIG. 60 In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, which is the variation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, but the medium variation display. It is on the lower right side of the region 8Cr. At this time, when the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is formed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In the present embodiment, the variation effect (variation display) of a predetermined number of times (10th time) is performed as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation region CSZ, and this variation effect (variation display) is performed. ) Is displayed, the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear and stop display. However, when the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the counter image CNT is displayed, and further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may reappear just before the time when the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear, the second sub-variable region CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative symbol, When the variation effect (variation display) is started so that the coin rotates at the same timing for the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol and the medium-sized right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), the second sub-variable region CSZ Disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light to correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr and the medium variable display area, respectively. In 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr, fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 104" and displayed. That is, in the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing for the medium left decorative symbol, the medium medium decorative symbol, and the medium right decorative symbol. .. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the left in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B). The display mode is different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the variation effect (variation display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B), as described above, the number “1” → the number “2” → the number “3” → The reel rotates in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ... In contrast to the variable effect (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, when the variable effect (variable display) of each stop-displayed decorative symbol is started, each decorative symbol is displayed. After emitting light, it fluctuates toward the lower side of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, or while each decorative symbol emits light, it fluctuates downward of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, and then is stopped and displayed. The number following one of each decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as the number following one of each decorative symbol and is stopped and displayed. This occurs when the second sub-variable region CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, so that a random number is one subsequent number of each decorative symbol. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears and is stopped while remaining opaque.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 60 (D). ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "4" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is not the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is not the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr but the center right side of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D). The number "4" following the number "3" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (D) is on the lower right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is not the lower right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but the center left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, the 11th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "it still continues ... The telop TP2, which is a message image of ".", Is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a (here, three telop TP2). .. The telop TP2 is white, and when it comes to other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow color), the hit expectation is higher than that of white (for example, the hit expectation is the smallest in white). , Blue, red, and rainbow colors in that order). The size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and is the left side which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so as to be on the foremost side, the telop TP2 is right-decorated even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The telop TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in front of the symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different in that when it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 described above is repeatedly moved and displayed in that it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telop TP2s may be set to have different moving speeds or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2s appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some fluctuate across the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some fluctuate across the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations). Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may be particleized and gradually disappear. In some cases, the display mode is difficult to read because the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks and the images are not arranged normally but are arranged irregularly and changed to an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a and is displayed, it does not suddenly disappear in the middle and is made into particles. The difference is that it does not disappear gradually and the display mode does not lack image information.

Further, the telop TP2 may be displayed as moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), and may be displayed at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed as moving, or it may be displayed as moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Further, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side, and when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side. The speed may be decelerated, or the speed may be accelerated or decelerated when the display screen 7a is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP2 may suddenly stop in the middle or may decelerate and stop. .. When the telop TP2 is stopped, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (black screen) described later, and then the winning result may be displayed. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters or one of the telop TP2). Change the font of the part characters, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to bold, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to fine print, all of telop TP2 Characters or some characters are changed to italics, the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed greatly, and the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed small. Or, all or some characters of the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). However, when the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and is moved and displayed. In addition, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 may be less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS) and may be moved and displayed. Further, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed when the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than about twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). It may be red or rainbow color. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can operate the effect button 63 to select and set. As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set, and the content of the comment by the selected and set character, or the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A. The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music played in the above, or it may be the content of a comment by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect A. Of course, it is also possible to select and set the display and non-display of the telop TP2. Such selection setting may be performed by the player in the setting mode during the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). ..

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, since the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the variable icon 9C and notify the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variation. , It is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the hold icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player that the mode is "A mode", and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the degree of expectation for the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, whereas it is said to be "A mode". The telop TP1 that does not convey other information to the player in addition to the information is arranged on the rear side of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, a background image dedicated to the A mode is displayed as a background image. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode dedicated background images are prepared, the A-mode dedicated background image corresponding to the expected degree of hit may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has abundant variations in the effect, and it is intended to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A called the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol. It is possible to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 103" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 60 (E). ), The number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "6" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is on the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is not the lower left side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the center of the left variation display area 8Lr.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E). The number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is on the right side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “8” stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is not on the right side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr but on the center slightly upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E). The number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (E) is on the left side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is not the center left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but the center right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the number "8". The intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the right variation display area 8Rr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as the context of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8". It is arranged so that the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" covers a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8".

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 102" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 60 (F). ), The number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (G), it is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L, and the random number "1" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, since the left variation display area 8Lr is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" is It becomes a state covered by the hold number display area HS.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is slightly on the upper left side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) starts. The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is not the center of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. ..

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (F) is on the right side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is not on the right side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the lower right side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C of "7" jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the right variation display area 8Rr. Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" is formed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, the 13th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started, the telop TP2, which is a message image of "from now on ...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4th (that is, 14th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 101" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 60 (G). ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "9" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "9" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (H) is not the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the lower right side of the left variation display area 8Lr.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (H) is not on the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variation display area 8Rr and straddles the medium variation display area 8Cr.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G). The number "8" following the number "7" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (G) is closer to the lower right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) starts. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (H) is not on the lower right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, as the context of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4", the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3". The right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is arranged so as to cover a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3".

The variation effect (variation display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variation effect (variation display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) When the variation effect (variation display) is started, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle. In the fluctuation display area 8Cr and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 50" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and at the 64th time (not shown). The number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (I), it is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L, and a random number "4" appears. It appears opaque and stops. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started and the figure is shown. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in 60 (I) is not the center of the left variation display area 8Lr but the center of the left variation display area 8Lr and slightly lower right.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the left side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is not the center left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right-handed fluctuation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the foremost side, a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" is a sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the upper left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. In FIG. 60 (I), the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the lower left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "5". The intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the left variation display area 8Lr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is changed (variably displayed) the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative symbol 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr). The direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is changed (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction (moving direction) (the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle fluctuation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates downward in the region 8Cr). Here, as the context of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4", the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4". The medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is arranged so as to cover a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4".

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 49" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and FIG. 60 (I) ), The number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 60 (J), it is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L, and the random number "2" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is slightly lower right in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is displayed. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" that was started and stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (J) is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" jumps over the left variation display area 8Lr and straddles the medium variation display area 8Cr.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I). The number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is on the upper right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (J) is not the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I). The number "6" following the number "5" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (I) is closer to the lower left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 60 (J) is not on the lower left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but on the upper left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative symbol 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr). The direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is changed (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction (moving direction) (the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle fluctuation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates downward in the region 8Cr). Here, as the context of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2", the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8". It is arranged so that the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" covers a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8".

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th time (that is, 66th time) of fluctuation production (variation display) is started, this time, a message image of "will it occur soon?" And a message of "Ah, endless ..." The telop TP2, which is an image and a message image of "Ah, still kana", is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Is it coming soon?", Is blue, and the message image "Ah, endless ..." and the message image "Ah, isn't it?" Is white.

After that, the variation effect (variation display) proceeds, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, 115th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, the A mode ends, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A Is also finished, and the game mode is returned to the normal game state again, and as shown in FIGS. 60 (A) and 60 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change the effect (variation display). Will be done.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the effect in the case of "loss without reach" is shown from FIG. 60 (C) to FIG. 60 (J), but in the case of "loss with reach". The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line, and the display screen 7a is blacked out (becomes a black screen) and becomes white toward the center of the display screen 7a without being temporarily stopped. The shining light rays converge and then disappear, which is a display mode as if the CRT of an analog television was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until the time for notifying the winning result (missing) comes. Then, when the time to notify the winning result (missing) is missed, as shown in FIGS. 60 (C) to 60 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. (Variable display), as described above, a random number appears as one subsequent number of each decorative symbol while remaining opaque, and is stopped and displayed at the same timing.

On the other hand, even in the case of hitting, the display screen 7a is first blacked out (becomes a black screen), and the light rays shining white toward the center of the display screen 7a converge and then disappear. The display mode is as if the power of the CRT of an analog TV was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R appear in the center of the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, medium variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr, respectively, and are the same. After tentatively stopping along the horizontal line of, the stop display is displayed, and as a result of winning, a winning confirmation display is displayed, and then the winning game is started. When a hit is notified as a result of winning, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol are displayed. The medium decorative design and the small right decorative design are also stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the same numbers as the left decorative design 8L, the medium decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (number design, here the number "7"). ..

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen becomes black), the higher the expectation for hitting, so that the display screen 7a is displayed. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the expectations of the player and incite it.

In this way, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative symbol and the other decorative symbol among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decoration Of the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 60 (F) are displayed overlapping in the positional relationship between the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, By arranging the intermediate decorative symbol 8C on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative symbol 8R, whereas in FIG. 60 (H) When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged in front of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, so that the right decorative symbol 8R forms a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It is a display mode that covers. Further, for example, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, in the positional relationship between the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. When the 8C is displayed overlapping, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L, so that the intermediate decorative symbol 8C covers a part of the left decorative symbol 8L. On the other hand, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 60 (J) are displayed overlapping, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged in front of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, so that the left decorative symbol 8C is arranged. 8L is a display mode that covers a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Randomly (irregularly), with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship) between the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the positional relationship (front-back relationship) between the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is also changed randomly (irregularly), so it is possible to increase the variation of the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. .. As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A.

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L did not pop out from the upper side, the left side, and the lower side of the display screen 7a from the left variable display area 8Lr that is subjected to the variable effect (variable display), but it does. Such a display mode may be used. In this case, the portion where the left decorative symbol 8L protrudes becomes difficult to see. Further, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not protrude from the upper side and the lower side of the display screen 7a from the medium variation display area 8Cr that is subjected to the variation effect (variation display), but the display mode may be such that it protrudes. In this case, the portion where the intermediate decorative symbol 8C protrudes becomes difficult to see. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R does not pop out from the upper side, the right side, and the lower side of the display screen 7a from the right variable display area 8Rr to be variable-effect (variable display), but the display mode may be such that it pops out. In this case, the portion where the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes becomes difficult to see.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production B]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B. The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is performed when the mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case where the mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular region as a variable display region of three decorative symbols (also referred to as a “variable region of the decorative symbol”). Three (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided. The left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed by rotating the reel from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of (design: number "1" to number "9") is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the medium variation display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, The lateral distance dimension of the medium variation display area 8Cr and the lateral distance dimension of the right variation display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have a bright red color and are even. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). The size of the numbers "1" to "9" is about one-third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr (medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). It has dimensions, and the lateral distance dimension is a normal size having a distance dimension of about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area 8Lr (medium variation display area 8Cr, right variation display area 8Rr). .. The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right variation display area 8Rr which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. By doing so, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is displayed. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is more visible by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol is arranged. The variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the second. 4 Hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the second reserved display is displayed. Since the positions 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is composed of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as the first special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, there are four stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four hold icons (that is, the number of holds 3 or It is assumed that the number of holdings is 4), but the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21. Further, as the number of holds increases, the time (variation time) from the start to the end of the fluctuation effect (variation display) becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is 3 or the number of holdings is 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are. , Have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is in the foreground. By arranging so as to be on the side, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the hold number display area HS, the hold number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then the left variation display area 8Lr is variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that the decorative symbol 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R that fluctuates and displays the right fluctuating display area 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates and displays the medium variation display area 8Cr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that the medium variation display area 8Cr moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for normal games are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the center of each variable display area, so that the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and stopped and displayed (confirmed). Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9A placed on the first hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, The middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, which will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) by a medium-sized decorative icon is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A mode dedicated background image, and is large in the center of the display screen 7a. The message image MSG "Entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, which is a display mode different from the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in the game mode in the normal game state of FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) described above, is started. ..

The background image dedicated to the A mode is a background image different from the background image for the normal game used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image dedicated to A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, as a condition for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B to occur, for example, the number of times the variation effect (variation display) is performed without hitting is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). It occurs when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times the normal state). Further, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding medium-sized left decorative symbol and medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, respectively. A second sub-variable region CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative symbol is varied (variably displayed) is provided. The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ has a vertical distance dimension that is about 5 times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ, and the lateral distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ is sub-variable. The lateral distance dimension is about 5 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol that are variable-effect (variable display) in the second sub-variable region CSZ are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable region KSZ. Although it is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative design, small medium decoration design, and small right decoration design, it is compared with the size of the left decoration design 8L, middle decoration design 8C, and right decoration design 8R. Is small. Further, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small medium-sized decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern, and are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the medium-sized right decorative pattern 8C. , The right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape and has a similar shape, and has the same color. That is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the left decorative symbol 8L and has the same color as the left decorative symbol 8L, and the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The medium-sized right decorative symbol has the same color as the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the right decorative symbol 8R and has the same color as the right decorative symbol 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable region CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable region CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, but in the present embodiment, the second sub-variable region CSZ is the second. During the period when the sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The variable region KSZ is not blocked. Further, by arranging the second sub-variable region CSZ so as to be on the foremost side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variable region CSZ and other effects are displayed. The second sub-variable region CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. That is, the content displayed in the second sub-variable region CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative symbol 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative symbol From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable effect (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative symbol, that is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. To.

In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in which the variation effect (variation display) is performed up to 115 times is started, the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol starts in the second sub-variation area CSZ. It is performed only a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed during the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable region CSZ. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ and the second variation effect (variation display) is performed, the "A mode entry" having a gold color (gold color) is performed. Message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" is displayed on the telop TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 61 (D)). Along the upper side of the display screen 7a, the telop is displayed repeatedly from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is being performed.

The telop TP1 which is the message image of "A mode" has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG of "entering A mode". The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, which is about four times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS). It has a size. Although the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are arranged so as to be on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left variation display which is a variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Right that overlaps with the upper region in the region 8Lr, overlaps with the upper region in the medium variation display region 8Cr, which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, and is the fluctuation region of the right decorative symbol 8R. It overlaps with the upper region in the variable display region 8Rr. In the present embodiment, the region in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is arranged behind the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display region 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. That is, the visibility of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle, or is made into particles and does not gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is performed and the predetermined number (10th) variation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, Immediately before the end of this variation effect (variation display), as shown in FIG. 61 (D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the background image for the counter image having the semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape is The horizontal distance dimension of the background image for the counter image, which has about three times the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and has this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, is sub. It has a size about 6 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the variable region KSZ (or the reserved number display region HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, the background image for the counter image is on the front side. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image, and other Even if the effect image appears, the counter image CNT arranged behind the background image for the counter image and placed in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the other effect image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is half. Through the transparent background image for the counter image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and other effect images (background image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) can be visually recognized.

Further, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right are accompanied by this (a little later than the start of displaying the counter image CNT). The decorative pattern 8R reappears and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that reappeared are the sizes before disappearing, that is, the left decorative symbols in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B). The sizes of 8L, medium decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R are different from the sizes of the left decorative design 8L, medium decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R that have reappeared, as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B). Some of the directions are different from the directions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown, and the reappearing left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. The positions displayed and stopped are different from the positions where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B) are temporarily stopped and stopped. There is.

Specifically, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), is temporarily stopped and stopped in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B). It is larger than the normal size of the displayed left decorative pattern 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61B, the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the left decorative symbol 8L is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the left. It is on the upper right side of the variable display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative symbol 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variable display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B), the temporary stop display and the left decorative symbol 8L stopped and displayed are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively. The left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), is tilted with respect to the left decorative symbol (the state is parallel to the vertical direction). The vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of 8L are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is slightly tilted to the left. ing. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "1" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1".

The size of the right decorative symbol 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D) is the right decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B). Although it is slightly larger than the normal size of the symbol 8R, it is smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61B, the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed is at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), the temporary stop display and stop display position of the right decorative symbol 8R is not the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the right. It is on the upper left side of the variable display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variable display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right-handed variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the foremost side, a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" is a sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed right decorative symbol 8R are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. The right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), is tilted with respect to the right decorative symbol (which is in a state parallel to the vertical direction). The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is slightly tilted to the right. There is. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

The size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D) is the intermediate decoration that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B). It is considerably larger than the normal size of the symbol 8C, and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B), the position where the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed is at the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, which is the variation region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 (D), the position where the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed is not in the center of the medium variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, but in the middle. It is below the variable display area 8Cr. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 61 (B), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed right decorative symbol 8R are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (It is in a state parallel to the vertical direction), the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 (D) is the right decorative symbol 8R. The vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not tilted. At this time, when the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is formed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In the present embodiment, the variation effect (variation display) of a predetermined number of times (10th time) is performed as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation region CSZ, and this variation effect (variation display) is performed. ) Is displayed, the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear and stop display. However, when the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses, the counter image CNT is displayed, and further, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R may reappear just before the time when the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear, the second sub-variable region CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a.

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative symbol, When the variation effect (variation display) is started so that the coins rotate at the same timing for the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol and the medium-sized right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), the second sub-variable region CSZ Disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light to correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr and the medium variable display area, respectively. In 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr, fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 104" and displayed. That is, in the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing for the medium left decorative symbol, the medium medium decorative symbol, and the medium right decorative symbol. .. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the left in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B). The display mode is different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the variation effect (variation display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), as described above, the number “1” → the number “2” → the number “3” → The reel rotates in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ... In contrast to the variable effect (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, when the variable effect (variable display) of each stop-displayed decorative symbol is started, each decorative symbol is displayed. After emitting light, it fluctuates toward the lower side of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, or while each decorative symbol emits light, it fluctuates downward of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, and then is stopped and displayed. The number following one of each decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as the number following one of each decorative symbol and is stopped and displayed. This occurs when the second sub-variable region CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, so that a random number is one subsequent number of each decorative symbol. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears and is stopped while remaining opaque.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and FIG. 61 (D) ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "4" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D). It has become. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number “4” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is not on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 61 (D), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (E), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the left decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D). It is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is not on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper center side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative symbol A part of the upper side and a part of the right side of the 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61 (E), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is greatly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is on the left. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D). The number "4" following the number "3" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D). It is considerably smaller than the normal size, and it is also considerably smaller than the normal size. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (D) is below the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is not below the medium variation display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61 (D), the temporary stop display and the inclination of the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Whereas the state was parallel, the inclination of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (E) is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, respectively. The line is at an angle slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is slightly tilted to the left.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, the 11th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "it still continues ... The telop TP2, which is a message image of ".", Is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a (here, three telop TP2). .. The telop TP2 is white, and when it comes to other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow color), the hit expectation is higher than that of white (for example, the hit expectation is the smallest in white). , Blue, red, and rainbow colors in that order). The size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and is the left side which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so as to be on the foremost side, the telop TP2 is right-decorated even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The telop TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in front of the symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different in that when it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 described above is repeatedly moved and displayed in that it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telop TP2s may be set to have different moving speeds or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2s appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some fluctuate across the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some fluctuate across the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations). Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may be particleized and gradually disappear. In some cases, the display mode is difficult to read because the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks and the images are not arranged normally but are arranged irregularly and changed to an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a and is displayed, it does not suddenly disappear in the middle and is made into particles. The difference is that it does not disappear gradually and the display mode does not lack image information.

Further, the telop TP2 may be displayed as moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), and may be displayed at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed as moving, or it may be displayed as moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Further, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side, and when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side. The speed may be decelerated, or the speed may be accelerated or decelerated when the display screen 7a is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP2 may suddenly stop in the middle or may decelerate and stop. .. When the telop TP2 is stopped, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (black screen) described later, and then the winning result may be displayed. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters or one of the telop TP2). Change the font of the part characters, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to bold, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to fine print, all of telop TP2 Characters or some characters are changed to italics, the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed greatly, and the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed small. Or, all or some characters of the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). However, when the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and is moved and displayed. In addition, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 may be less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS) and may be moved and displayed. Further, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed when the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than about twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). It may be red or rainbow color. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can operate the effect button 63 to select and set. As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set, and the content of the comment by the selected and set character, or the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music played in, or the content may be a comment by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect B. Of course, it is also possible to select and set the display and non-display of the telop TP2. Such selection setting may be performed by the player in the setting mode during the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). ..

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, since the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the variable icon 9C and notify the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variation. , It is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the hold icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player that the mode is "A mode", and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the degree of expectation for the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, whereas it is said to be "A mode". The telop TP1 that does not convey other information to the player in addition to the information is arranged on the rear side of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In addition, the background image dedicated to the A mode is displayed as the background image in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode dedicated background images are prepared, the A-mode dedicated background image corresponding to the expected degree of hit may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has abundant variations in the effect, and it is intended to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B called the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol. It is possible to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 103" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative symbol. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 61 (E). ), The number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "6" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is slightly larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E). Although it is smaller, it is larger than the normal size. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is below the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number “6” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is not the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the center of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Whereas the state was parallel, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (F) is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively. The line is at an angle that is greatly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is greatly tilted to the left.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E). The number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size. Further, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is closer to the upper center of the right variation display area 8Rr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is not closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was greatly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E). The number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E). It is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (E) is slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is not slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr but to the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. The upper part of the medium-decorative symbol 8C of "8" protrudes from the upper side of the medium-variable display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the medium-decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is the right side of the medium-variable display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the context of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is used. , The medium decorative symbol 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", and the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, in FIG. 61 (E), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decoration symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the middle decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is on the right. It is in a state of being slightly tilted in the direction.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, the reel is rotated downward (variation display), and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 102" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative symbol. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 61 (F). ), The number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "1" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is slightly smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). Although it is smaller, it is larger than the normal size. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and is above the left decorative symbol 8L. A part of the left variation display area 8Lr protrudes from the upper side, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, since the left variation display area 8Lr is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" is It becomes a state covered by the hold number display area HS. Further, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was in a state of being greatly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the left decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is greatly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is on the right. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “8” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). It is a little larger than the normal size. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is slightly on the upper left side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) starts. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is not the center of the right variation display area 8Rr but the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr. , The lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (G) is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. The line is at an angle slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is slightly tilted to the left.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration design 8C in FIG. 61 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). It is a little larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the position of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F) is on the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is not the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but the center right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the number "7". The intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the right variation display area 8Rr. Further, in FIG. 61 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is greatly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right direction. It is in a state of being greatly tilted to.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, the 13th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started, the telop TP2, which is a message image of "from now on ...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4th (that is, 14th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, the reel is rotated downward (variation display), and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 101" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative symbol. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 61 (G). ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "9" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number “9” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is not the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the lower right side of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 61 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted in the vertical direction in which the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively, rotate On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the left decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is further inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, that is, the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted. In FIG. 61 (G), the tilted state is largely tilted to the right.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “2” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G). It is larger and considerably larger than the normal size. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is not on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variation display area 8Rr and straddles the medium variation display area 8Cr. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (G) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted. It is in a state of being greatly tilted to the left.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G). The number "8" following the number "7" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G). Although it is smaller than the normal size, it is larger than the normal size, and it is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (G) is on the right side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number “3” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (H) is not on the right side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the size of the medium decorative symbol 8C, the context of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is used. , The right decorative symbol 8R of the large number "4" is arranged in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is the number "3". It is a display mode that covers a part of the interior decorative pattern 8C. Further, in FIG. 61 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

The variation effect (variation display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variation effect (variation display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) When the variation effect (variation display) is started, as shown in FIG. 61 (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light, respectively, and the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, middle. In the fluctuation display area 8Cr and the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 50" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative symbol. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and at the 64th time (not shown). The number "3" following the number "2" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (I), it is not stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol 8L, and a random number "4" appears. It appears opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is considerably smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). Although it is, it is larger than the normal size. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started and the figure is shown. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in 61 (I) is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but slightly lower right of the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. Further, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped at the 64th time (not shown), is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. The inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, which is temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (I), is a vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively. However, the angle is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is slightly tilted to the left.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and the right decorative symbol 8R stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). The number "4" following the number "3" of the decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (I), and the random number "1" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is considerably smaller than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" stopped and displayed at the 64th stop display (not shown). It is considerably smaller than the normal size. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "3" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the left side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is not the center left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but the upper right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right-handed fluctuation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the foremost side, a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" is a sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. Further, in the 64th time (not shown), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decorative symbol 8R are such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Therefore, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (I) was displayed. The vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted to the left. It is in a state of being greatly tilted to.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). The number "7" following the number "6" of the decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (I), and the random number "5" appears opaque. Stop is displayed. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is the same as the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" temporarily stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown). It is considerably larger than the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "6" which is stopped and displayed at the 64th time (not shown) is on the upper left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. In FIG. 61 (I), the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed is not on the upper left side of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr but on the left side of the center of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the number "5". The intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the left variation display area 8Lr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is changed (variably displayed) the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" (the left decorative symbol 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr). The direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is changed (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is displayed in the direction (moving direction) (the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle fluctuation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates downward in the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the context of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" is used. , The medium decorative symbol 8C of the large number "5" is arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4", and the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" is the number "4". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, in the 64th time (not shown), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Therefore, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which was temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (I), was displayed. The vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is tilted greatly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted to the right. It is in a state of being greatly tilted.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 56th (that is, 66th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light to correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 49" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of each decorative symbol. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light, and FIG. 61 (I) ), The number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 61 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "2" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J). It's getting bigger. Further, the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is slightly lower right in the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is displayed. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" which was started and stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is not the center of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr but the upper right side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" jumps over the left variation display area 8Lr and straddles the medium variation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 61 (I), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was slightly tilted to the left, whereas the left decoration displayed temporarily and stopped in FIG. 61 (J). The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Is slightly tilted to the left.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I). The number "2" following the number "1" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (J), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I). Although it is larger, it is smaller than the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is on the upper right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “7” stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is not the upper right side of the right variable display area 8Rr but the lower center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (I) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was greatly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (J), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted. It is slightly tilted to the left, and compared to the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (I), the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. It has become more.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I). The number "6" following the number "5" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (J), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I). It is considerably smaller than the normal size, and it is also smaller than the normal size. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (I) is closer to the left side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (J) is not on the left side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr but on the upper left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" (the left decorative symbol 8L fluctuates toward the lower side of the left variable display area 8Lr). The direction in which the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is changed (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed in the direction (moving direction) (the middle decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle fluctuation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates downward in the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the left decorative symbol 8L is larger than the size of the medium decorative symbol 8C, the context of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is used. , The left decorative symbol 8L of the large number "2" is arranged in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8", and the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "2" is the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the interior decorative pattern 8C. Further, the inclination of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (I) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 61 (J), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 56th time (that is, 66th time) of fluctuation production (variation display) is started, this time, a message image of "will it occur soon?" And a message of "Ah, endless ..." The telop TP2, which is an image and a message image of "Ah, still kana", is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop TP2, which is the message image "Is it coming soon?", Is blue, and the message image "Ah, endless ..." and the message image "Ah, isn't it?" Is white.

After that, the variation effect (variation display) proceeds, and when the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 105th (that is, 115th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, the A mode ends, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B Is also finished, and the game mode is returned to the normal game state again, and as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), a variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Will be done.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the effect in the case of "loss without reach" is shown from FIG. 61 (C) to FIG. 61 (J), but in the case of "loss with reach". The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line, and the display screen 7a is blacked out (becomes a black screen) and becomes white toward the center of the display screen 7a without being temporarily stopped. The shining light rays converge and then disappear, which is a display mode as if the power of the CRT of an analog television was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until the time for notifying the winning result (missing) comes. Then, when the time to notify the winning result (missing) is missed, as shown in FIGS. 61 (C) to 61 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. (Variable display), as described above, a random number appears as one subsequent number of each decorative symbol while remaining opaque, and is stopped and displayed at the same timing.

On the other hand, even in the case of hitting, the display screen 7a is first blacked out (becomes a black screen), and the light rays shining white toward the center of the display screen 7a converge and then disappear. The display mode is as if the power of the CRT of an analog TV was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R appear in the center of the corresponding left variation display area 8Lr, medium variation display area 8Cr, and right variation display area 8Rr, respectively, and are the same. After tentatively stopping along the horizontal line of, the stop display is displayed, and as a result of winning, a winning confirmation display is displayed, and then the winning game is started. When a hit is notified as a result of winning, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol are displayed. The medium decorative design and the small right decorative design are also stopped and displayed (confirmed) with the same numbers as the left decorative design 8L, the medium decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (number design, here the number "7"). ..

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen becomes black), the higher the expectation for hitting, so that the display screen 7a is displayed. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the expectations of the player and incite it.

In this way, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative symbol and the other decorative symbol among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decoration Of the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (F) are displayed overlapping in the positional relationship between the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, By arranging the large medium decorative symbol 8C on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R, the large medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to cover a part of the right decorative symbol 8R. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 61 (H) are displayed so as to overlap each other, the large right decorative symbol 8R is arranged in front of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, so that the size is large. The right decorative symbol 8R, which has a large size, covers a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Further, for example, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, in the positional relationship between the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8L in FIG. When the 8C is displayed overlapping, the large medium decorative symbol 8C is arranged in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, so that the large medium decorative symbol 8C forms a part of the left decorative symbol 8L. While the display mode is to cover, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 61 (J) are displayed overlapping, the large left decorative symbol 8L is the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. By arranging it on the front side, the large left decorative symbol 8L covers a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Randomly (irregularly), with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship) between the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the positional relationship (front-back relationship) between the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C. However, since the large decorative symbol changes randomly (irregularly) so that it is on the front side, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied (variable). It is possible to increase the variation of display). As a result, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B.

Further, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also random for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is designed to be able to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, there are many variations for the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the game for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B. It can contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is also increased for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It can change randomly (irregularly). For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, there are more variations for the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It can contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

[Decorative pattern stop position indefinite production C]
Next, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is performed when the mode is shifted to the special game mode, and here, the case where the mode is shifted from the game mode in the normal game state to the special game mode in the normal game state will be described below. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular region as a variable display region of three decorative symbols (also referred to as a “variable region of the decorative symbol”). Three (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided. The left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed by rotating the reel from the upper side of each variable display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. The variation effect (variation display) of (composed of the number symbols (numbers "1" to "9") and the symbols of various characters) is started. Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr toward the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the medium variation display area 8Cr toward the lower side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr toward the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, The lateral distance dimension of the medium variation display area 8Cr and the lateral distance dimension of the right variation display area 8Rr are the same lateral distance dimension.

Each decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image is composed of a number symbol (number "1" to number "9") with a character symbol having a plurality of colors (full color), and the character symbol is the main component. Is displayed large as. For this reason, the number symbol is smaller than the size of the character symbol attached to the number symbol. It should be noted that the character symbols attached to the numerical symbols are all different character symbols.

Specifically, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L is configured by attaching the character symbol 8Lb to the symbol 8La of the number "6" having a bright blue color (see FIG. 62 (B)), and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is bright. The symbol 8Ca of the number "3" having a red color is configured by attaching the symbol 8Cb of the character (see FIG. 62 (B)), and the right decorative symbol 8R has the symbol 8Ra of the number "4" having a bright blue color of the character. It is configured with a symbol 8Rb (see FIG. 62 (B)).

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

A number pattern (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as a number "X". In addition, X indicates a number) is colored. Specifically, among the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", are bright red. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). .. The size of the decorative symbol composed of the number symbol and the character symbol is about 3 of the vertical distance dimension of the left variation display area 8Lr (medium variation display area 8Cr, right variation display area 8Rr). A normal distance dimension having a half distance dimension and a lateral distance dimension having about half the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area 8Lr (medium variation display area 8Cr, right variation display area 8Rr). It is the size. At this time, the size of the number symbols constituting the decorative symbol having the normal size is the normal size of the number symbols. The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

In the game mode in the normal game state, when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed. The display mode fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right variation display area 8Rr which is the variation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub variation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. By doing so, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is displayed. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is more visible by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be hindered.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area 8Cr, which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol is arranged. The variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked by 8C. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the second. 4 Hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, the first reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the second reserved display is displayed. Since the positions 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlap with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is composed of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as the first special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, there are four stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and there are three or four hold icons (that is, the number of holds 3 or It is assumed that the number of holdings is 4), but the game ball does not enter the second starting port 21. Further, as the number of holds increases, the time (variation time) from the start to the end of the fluctuation effect (variation display) becomes shorter. For example, in the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is 3 or the number of holdings is 4, the fluctuation time is 5000 milliseconds (0.5 seconds) in the loss without reach.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same vertical distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are. , Have the same lateral distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is in the foreground. By arranging so as to be on the side, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the hold number display area HS, the hold number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

In the game mode in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then the left variation display area 8Lr is variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, and the display mode is such that the decorative symbol 8L moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R that fluctuates and displays the right fluctuating display area 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the right fluctuating display area 8Rr, and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates and displays the medium variation display area 8Cr from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the display mode is such that the medium variation display area 8Cr moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the game mode in the normal game state, a plurality of types of background images for normal games are prepared as background images, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the center of each variable display area, so that the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line and stopped and displayed (confirmed display). Along with this, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9A placed on the first hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, The middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9ad, the variable icon 9C, and all the hold icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, which will be described later. In the second sub-variable area CSZ, a variable effect (variable display) by a medium-sized decorative icon is started, and then the background image is switched from the normal game background image to the A mode dedicated background image, and is large in the center of the display screen 7a. The message image MSG "Entering A mode", which will be described later, is displayed. This A mode is a special game mode. In the A mode, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, which is a display mode different from the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in the game mode in the normal game state of FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B) described above, is started. ..

The background image dedicated to the A mode is a background image different from the background image for the normal game used as the background image in the game mode in the normal game state, and is a background image used exclusively in the A mode. Only one background image dedicated to A mode may be prepared, or a plurality of types may be prepared.

In the present embodiment, as a condition for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C to occur, for example, the number of times the variation effect (variation display) is performed without hitting is a normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state). It occurs when it reaches 2.5 to 3 times the normal state). Further, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, a predetermined number of variable effects (variable display) are performed. This "predetermined number of times" is, for example, up to 3.8 times the normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state), and is 115 times here.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is started, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the corresponding medium-sized left decorative symbol and medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol are displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, respectively. A second sub-variable region CSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which a medium-sized right decorative symbol is varied (variably displayed) is provided. The vertical distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ has a vertical distance dimension that is about 5 times larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ, and the lateral distance dimension of the second sub-variable region CSZ is sub-variable. The lateral distance dimension is about 5 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the region KSZ, and the shape is similar.

The sizes of the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol that are variable-effect (variable display) in the second sub-variable region CSZ are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable region KSZ. Although it is larger (about 5 times larger) than the size of the small left decorative design, small medium decoration design, and small right decoration design, it is compared with the size of the left decoration design 8L, middle decoration design 8C, and right decoration design 8R. Is small. Further, the medium-sized left decorative pattern, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative pattern, and the medium-sized right decorative pattern are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small medium-sized decorative pattern, and the small right decorative pattern, and are different from the small left decorative pattern, the small right decorative pattern, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the medium-sized right decorative pattern 8C. , The right decorative pattern 8R has a smaller shape and has a similar shape, and has the same color. That is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the left decorative symbol 8L and has the same color as the left decorative symbol 8L, and the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The medium-sized right decorative symbol has the same color as the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol has a smaller outer shape of the right decorative symbol 8R and has the same color as the right decorative symbol 8R.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ, the background image of the second sub-variable region CSZ is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the second sub-variable region CSZ is arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area 8Lr which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, but in the present embodiment, the second sub-variable region CSZ is the second. During the period when the sub-variable area CSZ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The variable region KSZ is not blocked. Further, by arranging the second sub-variable region CSZ so as to be on the foremost side, even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the second sub-variable region CSZ and other effects are displayed. The second sub-variable region CSZ is not obstructed by the effect image. That is, the content displayed in the second sub-variable region CSZ is not hindered by the left decorative symbol 8L or other effect images.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the medium-sized decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and at the same display position, for example, the medium-sized decorative symbol From the left end of the decorative pattern to the right end of the medium-sized decorative pattern, a variable effect (variable display) is performed as if a coin were rotating. Then, the medium-sized decorative symbol, that is, the medium-sized left decorative symbol, the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol, and the medium-sized right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing. To.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in which the variation effect (variation display) is performed up to 115 times in the present embodiment is started, the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol starts in the second sub-variation area CSZ. It is performed only a predetermined number of times (10 times in this embodiment). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed during the period in which the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (10 times) in the second sub-variable region CSZ. It has disappeared from the screen 7a. When the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol is started in the second sub-variation area CSZ and the second variation effect (variation display) is performed, the "A mode entry" having a gold color (gold color) is performed. Message image MSG is displayed. This message image MSG is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this embodiment), then disappears from the display screen 7a, and then the message image "A mode" is displayed on the telop TP1 (see, for example, FIG. 61 (D)). ) Is displayed as a telop from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a while the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is being repeatedly moved and displayed.

The telop TP1 which is the message image of "A mode" has the same color (gold color) as the message image MSG of "entering A mode". The area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, which is about four times as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS). It has a size. Although the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed overlaps with the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are arranged so as to be on the front side as described above. Therefore, the telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the sub-variable area KSZ and the hold number display area HS are not blocked by the telop TP1. That is, the visibility of the contents displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ and the reserved number display area HS is not hindered by the telop TP1.

As described above, the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is a band-shaped area having a predetermined distance dimension from the upper side of the display screen 7a, and this area is a left variation display which is a variation area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Right that overlaps with the upper region in the region 8Lr, overlaps with the upper region in the medium variation display region 8Cr, which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, and is the fluctuation region of the right decorative symbol 8R. It overlaps with the upper region in the variable display region 8Rr. In the present embodiment, the region in which the telop TP1 is moved and displayed is arranged behind the left fluctuation display region 8Lr, the middle fluctuation display region 8Cr, and the right fluctuation display region 8Rr. Therefore, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not obstructed by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed. That is, the visibility of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is not hindered by the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed.

When the telop TP1 is moved and displayed along the upper side of the display screen 7a from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 does not suddenly disappear in the middle, or is made into particles and does not gradually disappear. The telop TP1 is moved and displayed at a constant speed for the telop TP1.

When the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is performed and the predetermined number (10th) variation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, Immediately before the end of this variation effect (variation display), as shown in FIG. 62 (D), a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. The counter image CNT is arranged in front of the background image for the counter image having a semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, and the vertical distance dimension of the background image for the counter image having the semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape is The horizontal distance dimension of the background image for the counter image, which has about three times the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and has this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape, is sub. It has a size about 6 times larger than the lateral distance dimension of the variable region KSZ (or the reserved number display region HS).

Although the background image for the counter image having this semi-transparent horizontally long rectangular shape overlaps with the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr which is the fluctuation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C, the background image for the counter image is on the front side. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the background image for the counter image, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C does not block the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image, and other Even if the effect image appears, the counter image CNT arranged behind the background image for the counter image and placed in front of the background image for the counter image is not blocked by the other effect image. That is, the visibility of the counter image CNT arranged in front of the background image for the counter image is not hindered by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C or other effect images. Since the background image for the counter image is semi-transparent, the area of the background image for the counter image where the counter image CNT is not arranged (that is, the area of the background image for the counter image that does not correspond to the counter image CNT) is half. Through the transparent background image for the counter image, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and other effect images (background image of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) can be visually recognized.

Further, when the counter image CNT "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right are accompanied by this (a little later than the start of displaying the counter image CNT). The decorative pattern 8R reappears and is stopped and displayed. At this time, the character symbol 8Lb constituting the left decorative symbol 8L, the character symbol 8Cb constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the character symbol 8Rb constituting the right decorative symbol 8R are not displayed again, and the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed. Only the number symbols 8La constituting the right decorative symbol 8La, the number symbols 8Ca constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the number symbols 8Ca constituting the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again. Furthermore, the sizes of the number symbols 8La that make up the left decorative symbol 8L, the number symbols 8Ca that make up the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the number symbols 8Ra that make up the right decorative symbol 8R that reappeared are the sizes before they disappear. That is, the numbers are different from the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), and the numbers constituting the left decorative symbol 8L that reappeared. The orientations of the number symbols 8Ca constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C, the number symbols 8Ca constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the number symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R are the left decorative symbols 8L in the game modes shown in FIGS. , The direction of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is different from the orientation of the left decorative symbol 8L that reappeared. The positions where the numerical symbols 8Ra constituting the symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B). It is different from the position where the temporary stop display and the stop display are displayed.

Specifically, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the size of the numerical symbol 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and stopped is the game of FIG. 62 (B). In the mode, the temporary stop display and the stop display of the number symbols 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L are larger than the normal size of the number symbols. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the position where the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and stopped is displayed at the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the temporary stop display and stop display positions of the numerical symbols 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L are the left variable display area which is the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L. It is not in the center of 8Lr, but on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, and a part of the upper side of the left decorative symbol 8L protrudes from the upper side of the left variation display area 8Lr, making it difficult to see. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the temporary stop display and the left decorative symbol 8L stopped and displayed are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively. (It is in a state parallel to the vertical direction), whereas in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the numerical symbols 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped are displayed. The inclination of is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the numerical symbol 8La is slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, forming the left decorative symbol 8L. The number symbol 8La is slightly tilted to the left. At this time, when the medium-sized left decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "1" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1".

The size of the numerical symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R, which is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), is the temporary stop display in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B). And the number symbol 8Ra of the number symbol 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R that is stopped and displayed is slightly larger than the normal size, but smaller than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the position where the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed is at the center of the right variable display area 8Rr, which is the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the positions where the number symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and stopped are the right variable display areas which are the variable regions of the right decorative symbol 8R. It is not in the center of 8Rr, but on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, and a part of the upper side of the right decorative symbol 8R protrudes from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Although the sub-variable area KSZ is provided above the right-handed variation display area 8Rr, since the sub-variable area KSZ is located on the foremost side, a part of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" is a sub-variable area. It will be covered by KSZ. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed right decorative symbol 8R are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (It is in a state parallel to the vertical direction), whereas in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the numerical symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped are displayed. The inclination of is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are slightly tilted clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the numbers constituting the right decorative symbol 8R. The symbol 8Ra of is slightly tilted to the right. At this time, when the medium-sized right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "2" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2".

The size of the numerical symbols 8Ca constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D) is the temporary stop display in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B). And, the number symbol 8Ca of the number symbol 8C constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C that is stopped and displayed is considerably larger than the normal size, and is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the temporary stop display and the stop display position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, which is the variation region of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62 (D), the temporary stop display and stop display positions of the numerical symbols 8La constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are the medium variable display areas which are the variable regions of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. It is not in the center of 8Cr, but below the medium fluctuation display region 8Cr. Further, in the game mode of FIG. 62 (B), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed right decorative symbol 8R are not tilted (the reel rotates along the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (It is in a state parallel to the vertical direction), the number symbols 8Ca constituting the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 61 (D). The inclination is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the numerical symbols 8La constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are inclined. It is in a state where it is not. At this time, when the medium-sized intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the number "3" in the second sub-variable region CSZ, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3". Although the counter image CNT is provided below the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, since the counter image CNT is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is formed by the counter image CNT. It will be covered.

In the present embodiment, in the second sub-variable region CSZ, a predetermined number (10th) variation effect (variation display) is performed as a variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol, and this variation effect (variation display) is performed. ) Is displayed, a counter image CNT of "remaining 105" is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a, and the numbers 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L and the numbers constituting the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed. Only the numerical symbols 8Ra that make up the symbol 8Ca and the right decorative symbol 8R reappear and are displayed as a stop, but the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is started and a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed. Then, the counter image CNT is displayed, and further, the number symbols 8La and the intermediate decorative symbols constituting the left decorative symbol 8L are displayed immediately before the time when the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed is reached. Only the number symbols 8Ca constituting the 8C and the number symbols 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R may reappear. When the number symbol 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L, the number symbol 8Ca constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the number symbol 8Ra constituting the right decorative symbol 8R reappear, the second sub-variable region CSZ is displayed on the display screen. It disappears from 7a, and the medium-sized decorative pattern also disappears from the display screen 7a.

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, "the number symbol 8La constituting the left decorative symbol 8L" is simply described as "left decorative symbol 8L", and "the number symbol 8Ca constituting the middle decorative symbol 8C" is simply referred to as "middle". It may be described as "decorative symbol 8C", and "the number symbol 8Ca constituting the right decorative symbol 8R" may be simply described as "right decorative symbol 8R".

A predetermined number of times (10 times) of variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then a predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is started, and a medium-sized left decorative symbol, When the variation effect (variation display) is started so that the coins rotate at the same timing for the medium-sized medium-sized decorative symbol and the medium-sized right decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), the second sub-variable region CSZ Disappears from the display screen 7a, and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light to correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr and the medium variable display area, respectively. In 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr, fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 104" and displayed. That is, in the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started at the same timing for the medium left decorative symbol, the medium medium decorative symbol, and the medium right decorative symbol. .. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is the left in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B). The display mode is different from the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the variation effect (variation display) of each decorative symbol in the game mode shown in FIGS. 62 (A) and 62 (B), as described above, the number “1” → the number “2” → the number “3” → The reel rotates in the order of number "4" → number "5" → number "6" → number "7" → number "8" → number "9" → number "1" → number "2" → ... In contrast to the variable effect (variable display) in the display mode, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, when the variable effect (variable display) of each stop-displayed decorative symbol is started, each decorative symbol is displayed. After emitting light, it fluctuates toward the lower side of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, or while each decorative symbol emits light, it fluctuates downward of the variable display area of each decorative symbol, and then is stopped and displayed. The number following one of each decorative symbol does not appear, and a random number appears opaque as the number following one of each decorative symbol and is stopped and displayed. This occurs when the second sub-variable region CSZ disappears from the display screen 7a and the medium-sized decorative symbol also disappears from the display screen 7a, so that a random number is one subsequent number of each decorative symbol. It is possible to realize a display mode in which the image suddenly appears and is stopped while remaining opaque.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 62 (D). ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 62 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "4" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D). It has become. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number “4” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is not on the upper right side of the left variation display area 8Lr but on the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 62 (D), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 62 (E), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the left decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (E), and the random number "5" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D). It is larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is on the upper left side of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is not on the upper left side of the right variable display area 8Rr but on the upper center side of the right variable display area 8Rr, and the right decorative symbol A part of the upper side and a part of the right side of the 8R protrude from the upper side and the right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, respectively, making it difficult to see. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (D) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 62 (E), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8R is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R is greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is on the left. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D). The number "4" following the number "3" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 62 (E), and the random number "1" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D). It is considerably smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (D) is below the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is not below the medium variation display area 8Cr but slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Further, in FIG. 62 (D), the temporary stop display and the inclination of the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. While the state was parallel, the inclination of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (E) is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, respectively. The line is at an angle slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is slightly tilted to the left.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st time (that is, the 11th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started as the variation effect (variation display) by the medium-sized decorative symbol in the second sub-variation area CSZ, "it still continues ... The telop TP2, which is a message image of ".", Is moved and displayed in a telop display mode from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a so as to be parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a (here, three telop TP2). .. The telop TP2 is white, and when it comes to other colors (for example, blue, red, rainbow color), the hit expectation is higher than that of white (for example, the hit expectation is the smallest in white). , Blue, red, and rainbow colors in that order). The size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). The area where the telop TP2 is moved and displayed is between the lower side of the area where the telop TP1 is moved and displayed and the upper side of the background image for the counter image, and is the left side which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. It straddles the variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right variable display area 8Rr which is the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R. By arranging the telop TP2 so as to be on the foremost side, the telop TP2 is right-decorated even when the telop TP2 straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr, the middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, and the left fluctuation display area 8Lr. The telop TP2 is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L arranged in front of the symbol 8R, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. In this respect, the above-mentioned telop TP1 is arranged behind the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS, and the telop TP1 is blocked by the sub-variable region KSZ and the hold number display area HS.

The telop TP2 is different in that when it reaches the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP1 described above is repeatedly moved and displayed in that it does not reappear from the right side of the display screen 7a. The plurality of telop TP2s may be set to have different moving speeds or may be set to the same speed, and the timing at which the plurality of telops TP2s appear from the right side of the display screen 7a is different. Some fluctuations reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, some fluctuate across the next fluctuation and reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear, and some fluctuate across the next fluctuation (multiple fluctuations). Some of them reach the left side of the display screen 7a and disappear.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, it may suddenly disappear in the middle, or it may be particleized and gradually disappear. In some cases, the display mode is difficult to read because the image information is missing (for example, the image is divided into small blocks and the images are not arranged normally but are arranged irregularly and changed to an unclear image). When the above-mentioned telop TP1 is moved from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a along the upper side of the display screen 7a and is displayed, it does not suddenly disappear in the middle and is made into particles. The difference is that it does not disappear gradually and the display mode does not lack image information.

Further, the telop TP2 may be displayed as moving at the same constant speed as the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1), and may be displayed at a constant speed faster than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). It may be displayed as moving, or it may be displayed as moving at a constant speed slower than the constant speed of the telop TP1 (speed for telop TP1). Further, the speed of the telop TP2 may be accelerated when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side, and when the display screen 7a is moved and displayed from the right side to the left side. The speed may be decelerated, or the speed may be accelerated or decelerated when the display screen 7a is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the telop TP2 may suddenly stop in the middle or may decelerate and stop. .. When the telop TP2 is stopped, it may explode and simply disappear from the display screen 7a, or the display screen 7a may become a blackout (black screen) described later, and then the winning result may be displayed. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and is moved and displayed toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the typeface may change in the middle (for example, all characters or one of the telop TP2). Change the font of the part characters, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to bold, change all or some characters of telop TP2 to fine print, all of telop TP2 Characters or some characters are changed to italics, the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed greatly, and the size of all characters or some characters of telop TP2 is changed small. Or, all or some characters of the telop TP2 may be underlined), or the content may change to other content. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

Further, when the telop TP2 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is about twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). However, when the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is larger than the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ (or the hold number display area HS) and is moved and displayed. In addition, the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 may be less than twice as large as the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS) and may be moved and displayed. Further, when the telop TP2 is moved and displayed when the size of the vertical distance dimension of the telop TP2 is more than about twice the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable region KSZ (or the hold number display region HS). It may be red or rainbow color. This point is also different from the above-mentioned telop TP1.

There are a plurality of contents of the telop TP2, and the player can operate the effect button 63 to select and set. As the content of the telop TP2, for example, one of a plurality of characters representing the world view of the game machine is selected and set, and the content of the comment by the selected and set character, or the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C The content may include a part of the lyrics of the music played in the above, or may be the content of a comment by a plurality of people expressing the world view of the background image of the decorative pattern stop position indefinite effect C. Of course, it is also possible to select and set the display and non-display of the telop TP2. Such selection setting may be performed by the player in the setting mode during the game, or may be performed in the setting mode in the customer waiting state (player waiting state). ..

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, since the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a, it is not possible to change the display mode of the variable icon 9C and notify the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the variation. , It is not possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning by changing the display mode of the hold icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit by variously changing the display mode of the telop TP2. The telop TP1 notifies the player that the mode is "A mode", and does not convey other information to the player. For this reason, the telop TP2, which can suggest the degree of expectation for the player, is placed in front of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, whereas it is said to be "A mode". The telop TP1 that does not convey other information to the player in addition to the information is arranged on the rear side of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, a background image dedicated to the A mode is displayed as a background image. Therefore, when a plurality of types of A-mode dedicated background images are prepared, the A-mode dedicated background image corresponding to the expected degree of hit may be displayed.

In this way, unlike the telop TP1, the telop TP2 has abundant variations in the effect, and it is intended to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C called the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol. It is possible to contribute.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 1st (that is, 11th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, the reel is rotated downward (variation display), and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 103" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 62 (E). ), The number "5" following the number "4" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 62 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "6" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is slightly larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E). Although it is smaller, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is below the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number “6” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is not the lower side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the center of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. Whereas the state was parallel, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, which was temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (F), is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the left decorative symbol 8L, respectively. The line is at an angle that is greatly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is greatly tilted to the left.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E). The number "6" following the number "5" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “5” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E). It is smaller, and it is a little smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, while the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "5" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is closer to the upper center of the right variation display area 8Rr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is not closer to the upper center of the right variable display area 8Rr but slightly to the upper left of the center of the right variable display area 8Rr. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (E) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was greatly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 62 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E). The number "2" following the number "1" of the middle decoration symbol 8C appears as opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration symbol 8C in FIG. 62 (F), and the random number "8" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E). It is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (E) is slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is not slightly to the left of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr but to the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. The upper part of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C of "8" protrudes from the upper side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, making it difficult to see, and the right side of the intermediate decoration symbol 8C of the number "8" is the right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. It jumps over and straddles the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R, the context of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" is used. , The medium decorative symbol 8C of the large number "8" is arranged in front of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8", and the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" is the number "8". It is a display mode that covers a part of the right decorative pattern 8R. Further, in FIG. 62E, the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the middle decoration symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 62 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop display were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are slightly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is on the right. It is in a state of being slightly tilted in the direction.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 2nd (that is, 12th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 102" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 62 (F). ), The number "7" following the number "6" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 62 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "1" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is slightly larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 61 (F). Although it is smaller, the number pattern is larger than the normal size. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "6" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is the center of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is not the center of the left variable display area 8Lr but the upper left side of the left variable display area 8Lr, and is above the left decorative symbol 8L. A part of the left variation display area 8Lr protrudes from the upper side, making it difficult to see. Although the reserved number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, since the left variation display area 8Lr is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" is It becomes a state covered by the hold number display area HS. Further, in FIG. 62 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted counterclockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was in a state of being greatly tilted to the left, whereas the left decoration with the temporary stop display and the stop display in FIG. 62 (G) was displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is greatly inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the left decorative symbol 8L is on the right. It is in a state of being greatly tilted in the direction.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (G), and the random number "2" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “8” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F). It is a little larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is slightly on the upper left side of the center of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) starts. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is not the center of the right variation display area 8Rr but the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr. , The lower part of the right decorative pattern 8R protrudes from the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr, making it difficult to see. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (F) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. In contrast to the parallel state, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 62 (G) is vertical passing through the middle points of the upper and lower sides of the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. The line is at an angle slightly tilted counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is slightly tilted to the left.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F). The number "9" following the number "8" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 62 (G), and the random number "7" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F). It is a little larger than the size of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (F) is on the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is not the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr but the center right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr, and the number "7". The intermediate decorative symbol 8C jumps over the medium variation display area 8Cr and straddles the right variation display area 8Rr. Further, in FIG. 62 (F), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 62 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is tilted greatly clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is in the right direction. It is in a state of being greatly tilted to.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd time (that is, the 13th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started, the telop TP2, which is a message image of "from now on ...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. The telop is displayed by moving from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen. The telop TP2 is white.

The predetermined number of times (10 times) + 3rd (that is, 13th) variation effect (variation display) is completed, and then the predetermined number (10 times) + 4th (that is, 14th) variation effect (variation display) is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R emit light and correspond to the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area, respectively. At 8Rr, a fluctuation effect (variation display) is performed so that the reel rotates downward, and the counter image CNT is updated to "remaining 101" and displayed.

At this time, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, in the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, as described above, a random number follows one of the decorative symbols. It appears as an opaque number and is displayed as a stop. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same timing when the variation effect (variation display) is started at the same timing.

Specifically, when the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is started, the left decorative symbol 8L emits light and FIG. 62 (G). ), The number "2" following the number "1" of the left decorative symbol 8L that was stopped and displayed appears opaque, and in FIG. 62 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed, and the random number "9" Appears as opaque and stops. Further, the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is considerably larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G). It is smaller and smaller than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, while the position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "1" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is on the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. The position of the left decorative symbol 8L of the number "9" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is not the upper left side of the left variation display area 8Lr but the lower right side of the left variation display area 8Lr. Further, in FIG. 62 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed left decorative symbol 8L are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the left decorative symbol 8L was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 62 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the left decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8L is such that the vertical line passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the left decorative symbol 8L is further inclined clockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, that is, the left decorative symbol 8L is tilted. In FIG. 62 (G), the tilted state is largely tilted to the right.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is started, the right decorative symbol 8R emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G). The number "3" following the number "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (H), and the random number "4" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is considerably larger than the size of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number “2” stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G). It is larger, and it is considerably larger than the normal size of the number pattern. Further, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "2" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is on the lower right side of the right variation display area 8Rr, whereas the variation effect (variation display) is started. Therefore, the position of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is not on the lower right side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr but on the upper left side of the right fluctuation display area 8Rr. The right decorative symbol 8R of "4" jumps over the right variation display area 8Rr and straddles the medium variation display area 8Cr. Further, the inclination of the right decorative symbol 8R temporarily stopped and stopped in FIG. 61 (G) is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was slightly tilted counterclockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was slightly tilted to the left, whereas in FIG. 61 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the right decoration were displayed. The inclination of the symbol 8R is such that the vertical lines passing through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the right decorative symbol 8R are greatly inclined counterclockwise with respect to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates, and the right decorative symbol 8R is tilted. It is in a state of being greatly tilted to the left.

When the dynamic effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C emits light and is stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G). The number "8" following the number "7" of the medium decorative symbol 8C appears opaque and is not stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 62 (H), and the random number "3" remains opaque. Appears and stops. Further, the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is the size of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" temporarily stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G). Although it is smaller than the normal size, it is larger than the normal size of the number symbol, and it is larger than the size of the left decorative symbol 8L. Further, while the position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "7" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (G) is on the right side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr, the variation effect (variation display) is started. , The position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" stopped and displayed in FIG. 62 (H) is not on the right side of the center of the medium variation display area 8Cr but on the upper right side of the medium variation display area 8Cr. Therefore, a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" overlap. In other words, the direction in which the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" (the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). The direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is displayed (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" is displayed (variable display) (the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed in the middle variation). It is displayed in the direction (traveling direction) that fluctuates toward the lower side of the region 8Cr). Here, since the size of the right decorative symbol 8R is larger than the size of the medium decorative symbol 8C, the context of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "3" and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is used. , The right decorative symbol 8R of the large number "4" is arranged in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C of the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "4" is the number "3". It is a display mode that covers a part of the interior decorative pattern 8C. Further, in FIG. 62 (G), the temporary stop display and the stop-displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C are tilted so that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are in the vertical direction in which the reel rotates. On the other hand, the angle was greatly tilted clockwise, and the right decorative symbol 8R was in a state of being greatly tilted to the right, whereas in FIG. 62 (H), the temporary stop display and the stop display of the intermediate decorative symbol were displayed. The inclination of 8C is such that the vertical lines passing through the middle points of the upper side and the lower side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are parallel to the vertical direction in which the reel rotates.

When the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th time (that is, the 64th time) of the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started, the telop TP2, which is a message image of "soon ...", is parallel to the upper side of the display screen 7a. A plurality of telops (here, 6 telops TP2) are moved and displayed from the right side to the left side of 7a on the display screen. The telop TP2 has a rainbow color, suggesting that the expectation of hitting is high.

The variation effect (variation display) progresses, the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 54th (that is, 64th) variation effect (variation display) ends, and then the predetermined number of times (10 times) + 55th (that is, 65th) When the variation effect (variation display) is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the display screen 7a is blacked out (becomes a black screen), and the light rays shining white converge toward the center of the display screen 7a. Eventually, the light rays disappear, which is a display mode as if the power of the CRT of the analog TV was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued.

After that, as shown in FIG. 62 (J), in the center of the left variable display area 8Lr, the medium variable display area 8Cr, and the right variable display area 8Rr corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. After appearing as the number "7" and temporarily stopping in line on the same horizontal line, the stop display is displayed, so that the winning result is a definite display, and the winning game is started. When a hit is notified as a result of winning, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and at the same time, in the sub-variable area KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are also stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the number "7", which is the same number (number symbol) as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. To.

After that, when the winning game is completed, the A mode is already forcibly terminated at this point, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C is also terminated, and when returning to the gaming mode in the normal gaming state again, FIG. 62 ( As shown in A) and (B), a variable effect (variable display) is performed by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

In addition, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the effect in the case of "loss without reach" is shown from FIG. 62 (C) to FIG. 62 (H), but in the case of "loss with reach". The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are lined up on the same horizontal line, and the display screen 7a is blacked out (becomes a black screen) without being temporarily stopped, and becomes white toward the center of the display screen 7a. The shining light rays converge and then disappear, which is a display mode as if the power of the CRT of an analog television was turned off. At this time, the contents of the hold number display area HS and the sub-variation area KSZ are maintained in the displayed state. That is, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the variation effect (variation display) by the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol is continued. This state is maintained until the time for notifying the winning result (missing) comes. Then, when the time to notify the winning result (missing) is missed, as shown in FIGS. 62 (C) to 62 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. (Variable display), as described above, a random number appears as one subsequent number of each decorative symbol while remaining opaque, and is stopped and displayed at the same timing.

In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the longer the period during which the display screen 7a is blacked out (the period during which the screen becomes black), the higher the expectation for hitting, so that the display screen 7a is displayed. Although it is a monotonous screen called blackout (black screen), it can raise the expectations of the player and incite it.

In this way, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped at each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The position can be changed randomly (irregularly). At this time, when one decorative symbol and the other decorative symbol among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed overlapping, for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decoration Of the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (F) are displayed overlapping in the positional relationship between the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, By arranging the large medium decorative symbol 8C on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R, the large medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed so as to cover a part of the right decorative symbol 8R. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 62 (H) are displayed overlapping, the large right decorative symbol 8R is arranged in front of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, so that the size is large. The right decorative symbol 8R, which has a large size, covers a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Randomly (irregularly), for example, with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship) between the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the large decorative symbol is randomly (front side). Since it changes irregularly), it is possible to increase the variation of the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. This can contribute to suppressing a decrease in the player's willingness to play with respect to the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C.

Further, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also random for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is designed to be able to change (irregularly). Therefore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, there are abundant variations for the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the game for the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. It can contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

Furthermore, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is also increased for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It can change randomly (irregularly). For this reason, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, there are more variations for the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C It can contribute to further suppressing the decrease in the player's willingness to play.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L, It is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of varying the effect (variable display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple symbols), and the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The first effect (decorative symbol stop) in which the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (each symbol) change randomly (irregularly) each time the final stop of the symbol is confirmed. FIGS. 60 (C) to (J) in the position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 61 (C) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, and FIGS. 62 (C) to (H) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. ) Can be executed. According to this configuration, in the first effect, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Can change randomly (irregularly), which can contribute to eliminating the monotony of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R with respect to the variable effect (variable display). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62 (in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, FIG. )-(J), in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, FIGS. 62 (D) to (H)) are shown for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol). The size of the design also includes an effect that changes randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were confirmed and stopped last time, and the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were confirmed and stopped this time. Since each of Sato and Sato changes randomly (irregularly), the decoration that has been displayed in a large size so far has been displayed by emphasizing and making the decorative design (design) that has been displayed large. From the background of the design (design), it is possible to give the player a feeling that it may be a suggestion for the production that is about to begin, and to contribute to the idea of the law of the production.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62 (in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, FIG. )-(J), in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, FIGS. 62 (D) to (H)) are shown for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol). The tilt of the design also includes an effect that changes irregularly. According to this configuration, the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were confirmed and stopped last time, and the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were confirmed and stopped this time. And, are changed randomly (irregularly), so for example, from the background of the inclination of the left decorative symbol 8L (design), the player feels that it may be a suggestion for the production that will start from now on. It can be given to the player and contribute to the idea of the law of production.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62. In the symbol stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 60 (F), (H) to (J), in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, in FIGS. 61 (F), (H) to (J), the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. Then, in FIGS. 62 (F) and 62 (H)), one symbol is displayed overlapping with the other one when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol) are stopped. Includes. According to this configuration, for example, since the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly displayed so as to overlap each other, the idea of making it easier to visually recognize the conventional fixedly displayed symbol is It does not exist at all, and it can be a definite display of a novel decorative pattern (design) that has never existed, and the fluctuating effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern (design) is repeatedly performed and it is missed as a definite display (as a result of winning). Even if this continues, it can contribute to making it difficult for the player to feel monotonous.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. Fig. 60 (F), (H) to (J) in the symbol stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 61 (F), (H) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C Then, in FIGS. 62 (F) and 62 (H)), one symbol is displayed in the traveling direction of the other one symbol when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol) are stopped. Includes directing. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60 (F), the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 (F), and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62 (F). The intermediate decorative symbol 8C (one symbol) is displayed in the traveling direction of the right decorative symbol 8R (the other one symbol) (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variation display area 8Rr). According to this configuration, it is possible to have a display mode in which a part of one symbol and a part of the other symbol overlap in the vertical direction. Further, it is possible to arrange so that one symbol and the other symbol do not line up on the same horizontal line.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62. In the symbol stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 60 (D), (E), (G), (I), and in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, FIGS. 61 (D), (E), (G), (I). In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C, FIGS. 62 (D), (E), (G)) include an effect in which the display mode of the same symbol changes with each change. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIGS. 60 (D), (E), (G), and (I), the positions of the numbers "1", which are the same symbols, are random (irregular). ) Is the display mode. According to this configuration, even when the variation effect (variation display) is repeatedly performed and the same symbol is frequently fixed and stopped, the position of the same symbol to be fixed and stopped changes randomly (irregularly). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony of the production by the same symbol that is fixedly stopped. Further, for example, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIGS. 61 (D), (E), (G), and (I), and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect in FIGS. 62 (D), (E), (G). In C, the position, size, and inclination of the number "1", which is the same symbol, change randomly (irregularly). According to this configuration, even when the variation effect (variation display) is repeatedly performed and the same symbol is frequently fixed and stopped, the position, size, and inclination of the same symbol to be fixed and stopped are random. Since each of them changes (irregularly), it can contribute to reducing the monotonousness of the production by the same symbol that is fixedly stopped.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, the image display device 7 ( The display means) can display the message image MSG, the telop TP1, and the telop TP2 (multiple types of images) in addition to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plurality of symbols). The first effect (FIGS. 60 (C) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 61 (C) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, and the figure in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C 62 (C) to (H)) are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L when the right decorative symbol 8R is changing and when the confirmation is stopped (when the symbol is changing and when the confirmation is stopped). , The telop TP2 (first image) is moved and displayed in front of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R (design), and behind the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (design). Includes an effect of moving and displaying the telop TP1 (second image). According to this configuration, it is easy for the player to recognize that the telop TP2 (first image) is displayed, and the suggestion by the telop TP2 (first image) can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (decoration) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62. Figures 60 (D) to (J) for the symbol stop position indefinite effect A, FIGS. 61 (D) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B, and FIGS. 62 (D) to (J) in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C. In H)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plurality of symbols) are temporarily stopped at the same timing, and then fixedly stopped. According to this configuration, each time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are changed (variable display), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. Since it is possible to temporarily stop at the same time and then confirm and stop, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are variablely produced (variable display) and confirmed and displayed. Although the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are images, the player can be given a feeling of weight of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped to give the player an impact of "dawn", and the rhythmic left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right It is possible to contribute to the reduction of monotony by being able to repeatedly perform the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. It was performed when the mode was changed to), but even if the special game mode (A mode) is performed when the normal game state is changed to the b time reduction (play time) described above instead of the normal game state. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R Of these, one of the decorative symbols straddles the variable display area corresponding to the other decorative symbol, but the other decorative symbol also straddles the variable display area corresponding to the one decorative symbol. May be good. Specifically, for example, in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60 (F), the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 (F), and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62 (F). The medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" jumps over the right side of the medium variable display area 8Cr and straddles the right variable display area 8Rr. Further, the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" also jumps over the right variable display area 8Rr. You may jump over the left side of the above and straddle the medium fluctuation display area 8Cr. In this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the variation of the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The direction in which the middle decorative symbol 8C of "8" is changed (variably displayed) of the right decorative symbol 8R of the number "8" (the direction in which the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates toward the lower side of the right variable display area 8Rr). (Progress direction)) (The right decorative symbol 8R of "8" is the variable effect (variable display) of the medium decorative symbol 8C of the number "8" (the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is the medium variable display area 8Cr. It is displayed in the direction that fluctuates downward (direction of travel)).

[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, one subsequent number of each decorative symbol that was previously stopped and displayed is shown. Instead, a random number appeared as one subsequent number of each decorative symbol and was stopped and displayed, but because it was random, the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed this time happened to be the decorative symbol that was stopped and displayed last time. The same decorative symbol may be used, or the decorative symbol stopped and displayed this time may happen to be a decorative symbol that follows one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed last time.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, when the special game mode A mode is started, this is triggered. In other words, it was supposed to start suddenly. Therefore, an effect suggesting that the start time of the A mode is approaching may be performed. For example, the remaining number of fluctuation effects (variation display), which is the start time of the A mode, may be displayed as a numerical value in the upper center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, first, when the remaining number of fluctuation effects (variation display), which is the start time of the A mode, reaches 100, a white message image of "100 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. After that, it is hidden, and when the remaining number of fluctuation effects (variation display), which is the start time of A mode, reaches 50, a blue message image of "50 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a. When it is hidden and the remaining number of fluctuation effects (variation display), which is the start time of A mode, reaches 25, a yellow message image of "25 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a and then non-display. When the number of remaining fluctuation effects (variation display), which is the start time of the A mode, reaches 10 times, a red message image of "10 more times" is displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a, and the A mode is displayed. Is counted down for each fluctuation and the red message image is continuously displayed in the upper center of the display screen 7a until is started. Then, after displaying the red message image "0 (zero) remaining" in the upper center of the display screen 7a, "remaining" just before the message image MSG "entering A mode" having yellow (gold color) is displayed. The red message image "0 (zero)" is hidden. Since the color of the message image indicating the number of remaining fluctuation effects (variation display) that is the start time of A mode changes in the order of white → blue → yellow → red as it approaches the start time of A mode. It is possible to fuel the expectation of the player for the A mode.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly), and further, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol The inclination of the stop position of 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R changed randomly (irregularly). However, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8R are set for each fixed stop of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. The size of 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly). In this way, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R with respect to the variation effect (variation display).

[Modification 7]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. The stop positions of the symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R change randomly (irregularly), and further, the sizes of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol The inclination of the stop position of 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R changed randomly (irregularly). However, every time the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are fixedly stopped, the stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8R are stopped. The inclination of 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R may be changed randomly (irregularly). In this way, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R with respect to the variation effect (variation display).

[Modification 8]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, the display mode of the hold icon 9A is changed by the look-ahead effect to expect a big hit. Since it is not possible to suggest the degree, it has become possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a jackpot by changing the display mode of the telop TP2 in various ways. For the hold icon 9A, for example, the smiling sphere icon is set with a high expectation that it will be a big hit in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)). Therefore, the color of the telop TP2 may be set to a high degree of expectation of a big hit in the order of blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (big hit rich)) by the look-ahead effect.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, three decorative symbols are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Three vertically long rectangular regions (that is, an region in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided as regions (variable regions of decorative symbols), and the left decorative symbol 8L is the left variable display region 8Lr. The change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the left fluctuation display area 8Lr, and the middle decoration symbol 8C changes from the upper side to the middle change display area 8Cr. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated toward the lower side of the display area 8Cr, and the right decorative symbol 8R is moved from the upper side of the right variation display area 8Rr to the bottom of the right variation display area 8Rr. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol was started in the display mode in which the reel was rotated toward the side. However, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has three horizontally long rectangular areas (that is, an area obtained by dividing the display screen 7a into three equal lines) as a variable display area (variable area of the decorative symbol) of the three decorative symbols. ) May be provided.

In this case, the left decorative symbol 8L is used as the upper decorative symbol, and the reel is rotated from the right side of the upper variable display area to the left side of the upper variable display area. After temporarily stopping in the center of the display area, the display is stopped, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is changed as the intermediate decorative symbol in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the right side of the medium variation display area to the left side of the medium variation display area. The effect (variable display) is started, and after temporarily stopping in the center of the medium variable display area, the stop is displayed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed as the lower decorative symbol from the right side of the lower variable display area to the left side of the lower variable display area. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the rotated display mode, and after temporarily stopping in the center of the lower variation display area, the stop display is performed. Further, for example, a part of the upper decorative symbol may jump out from the upper variable display area to the medium variable display area and may be stopped and displayed across the upper variable display area and the medium variable display area, and the intermediate decorative symbol may be displayed. May be partially displayed by jumping out from the medium fluctuation display area to the upper fluctuation display area and stopped and displayed across the middle fluctuation display area and the upper fluctuation display area, or the lower fluctuation display from the middle fluctuation display area. There is a case where it jumps out to the area and is stopped and displayed across the middle fluctuation display area and the lower fluctuation display area, and a part of the lower decorative symbol jumps out from the lower fluctuation display area to the middle fluctuation display area and displays the lower fluctuation. It may be stopped and displayed across the area and the medium fluctuation display area. Of course, a part of the upper decorative symbol may protrude from the right side, the upper side, and the left side of the upper variable display area and become difficult to see, and a part of the intermediate decorative symbol may protrude from the right side and the left side of the medium variable display area. The lower decorative pattern may pop out from the right side, the lower side, and the left side of the lower variable display area, making it difficult to see.

[Modification 10]
In the first effect of the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and The stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can be randomly (irregularly) changed each time the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped. At this time, various effect sounds (various sound effects) and effect sounds may suddenly be in a mute state (mute state), and the first effect may proceed across a plurality of fluctuations. By doing this, it is possible to create a sense of discomfort due to the mute state (mute state), and the player himself has the rule that the expectation of hitting is higher by continuing this state for a long time (the longer it is). It is possible to contribute to reducing the monotonousness of the heading, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R with respect to the variation effect (variation display).

[Modification 11]
In the first effect of the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and The stop positions of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R can be randomly (irregularly) changed each time the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped. However, of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, and the remaining one decorative symbol is stopped on the same horizontal line. It may be an effect that is not displayed, or such an effect may be included. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the right decorative symbol 8R is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. When the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the left decorative symbol 8L is not stopped and displayed on the same horizontal line. If two decorative symbols of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed side by side on the same horizontal line, the two decorations are on the same horizontal line. In each variation table area where the symbol is variablely displayed, it may be arranged on the left side, the center, or the right side of each variation display area on the same horizontal line. For example, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed side by side on the upper side of the display screen 7a as the same horizontal line, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged on the upper right side of the left variable display area 8Lr. The stop display is displayed, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged on the upper left side of the medium variation display area 8Cr and is stopped and displayed.

[Modification 12]
In the first effect in the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. 62, each of the fixed stops of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (symbol) In addition, the inclination of each symbol could change irregularly. However, of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, two decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the same inclination, and the remaining one decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the same inclination and a different inclination. It may be an effect to be performed, or such an effect may be included. For example, as an example in which the rotation directions are completely different, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are slightly rotated counterclockwise and tilted at an angle, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are slightly tilted to the left. The right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the right decorative symbol 8R is slightly tilted to the right at an angle that is slightly rotated clockwise and tilted as a different tilt from the same tilt. Further, for example, as an example in which the rotation direction is the same but the inclination is different, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are greatly rotated clockwise to form an inclined angle, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are tilted. Is stopped and displayed with a large tilt to the right, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed with a slight tilt to the right at an angle that is slightly rotated clockwise as a different tilt from this same tilt. It becomes.

[Modification 13]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A of FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. , When a temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while jumping from its own fluctuation display area (left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr) and straddling another fluctuation display area. When it overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (stopped) in another variable display area in the front-rear direction, it changes randomly (irregularly) with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship). However, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the other variable display jumps from its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, medium variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the area, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stop display) straddling the own variation display area and another variation display area is changed to another variation. It may be arranged in front of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (stopped) displayed in the display area. In other words, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, other fluctuations jump over from their own fluctuation display area (left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the display area, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped displayed (stop display) straddling its own variable display area and another variable display area is another. It may be a display mode that covers a part of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped (stopped) displayed in the variable display area.

[Modification 14]
In the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B of FIG. 61 and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C of FIG. 62, the variable display area (left variable display area) of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is used. When a temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while jumping from 8Lr, medium fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr) and straddling another fluctuation display area, a temporary stop display (stop) is displayed in another fluctuation display area. When it overlaps with a part of the decorative symbol to be displayed in the front-rear direction, the larger the size of the decorative symbol is arranged in the front with respect to the positional relationship (front-back relationship). However, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the other variable display jumps from its own variable display area (left variable display area 8Lr, medium variable display area 8Cr, right variable display area 8Rr). When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the area, the size of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stop display) straddling its own variable display area and other variable display areas, etc. The size of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped and displayed) in the variable display area of the above may be compared with the size of the decorative symbol, and the smaller one may be arranged in the front. In other words, among the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, other fluctuations jump over from their own fluctuation display area (left fluctuation display area 8Lr, middle fluctuation display area 8Cr, right fluctuation display area 8Rr). When the temporary stop display (stop display) is performed while straddling the display area, the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stop display) straddling its own variable display area and other variable display areas, and other decorative symbols. When the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed (stopped display) in the variable display area overlaps, the smaller decorative symbol is placed in front of the larger decorative symbol, and the larger the size. It may be a display mode that covers a part of the decorative pattern on the side.

[Modification 15]
The decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect A in FIG. 60, the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect B in FIG. 61, and the decorative symbol stop position indefinite effect C in FIG. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols.
It is possible to execute the first effect in which the stop position of each symbol changes irregularly each time the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A4-1.
The first effect includes an effect in which the size of each symbol changes irregularly each time the symbol is stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A4-1 or the aspect A4-2.
The first effect includes an effect in which the inclination of each symbol changes irregularly each time the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3.
The first effect includes an effect of displaying one symbol overlapping with another symbol when the determination of the symbol is stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4.
The first effect includes an effect of displaying one symbol in the traveling direction of the other symbol when the determination of the symbol is stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5.
The first effect includes an effect in which the display mode of the same symbol changes with each change.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-6.
The display means can display a plurality of types of images in addition to the plurality of symbols.
The first effect includes an effect of moving and displaying the first image in front of the symbol and moving and displaying the second image behind the symbol while the symbol is changing and when the symbol is fixed and stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-7.
In the first effect, the plurality of symbols are temporarily stopped at the same timing and then fixedly stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbols suddenly fixed stop effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. This decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect is executed during a variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol sudden confirmation stop effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the above and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding drive data is read from the ROM 103 to drive the first movable accessory 14.

[Decorative design suddenly stop production A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A. The decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in a hit mode without being displayed in a reach mode. In the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed and stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of symbols. The display indicates the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 hold digestion is started in the normal state of the game (low probability low base state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed from this. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit is selected.

As shown in FIG. 63 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the current variation in the special figure (the variation). Here, the variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is varied and displayed so that the left, middle, and right symbols move from the upper side to the lower side, respectively. Here, since each symbol is moving at high speed, the symbol cannot be visually recognized. The variation mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be any variation mode. For example, the left, middle, and right symbols may be variablely displayed so as to rotate horizontally with the vertical direction as the rotation axis.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (C) and 63 (D), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner. An effect in which a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r different from the symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are framed in is executed. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are symbols having the same shape and size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are decorated from different directions. It moves toward the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are the same symbols, and are "7" here. The symbol shapes and sizes of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r are the same as the symbol shapes and sizes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, but may be different.

The left decorative symbol 8l is framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L that is variablely displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L. The intermediate decorative symbol 8c is framed in upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlaps the variablely displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The right decorative symbol 8r is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63 (E), almost at the same time when the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r stop side by side in a horizontal row, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are displayed. The display disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are in a state of being stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "777", and then the jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, after the special symbol change starts, the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a variable manner, and then the set of decorative symbols 8l is not displayed in the reach mode. , 8c, 8r stop and display in the form of a big hit, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

63 (F) to 63 (J) are other examples of the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A described with reference to FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (E). In FIGS. 63 (F) to 63 (J), the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r, which are different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, are frames while the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. The production to enter is executed.

FIG. 63 (F) is the same state as in FIG. 63 (A). That is, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "234" are displayed.

In FIG. 63 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the current special figure change (the change) even though the special figure change is started by the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. The stop display is maintained without doing so. That is, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed in response to the previous change in the special figure remains maintained during the change.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (H) and 63 (I), when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation), the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. A set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r different from the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is framed in. The decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are symbols having the same shape and size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are decorated from different directions. It moves toward the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. The left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are the same symbols, and are "7" here. The symbol shapes and sizes of the decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r are the same as the symbol shapes and sizes of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C and 8R, but may be different.

The left decorative symbol 8l is framed in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, overlaps the left decorative symbol 8L that is variablely displayed, and is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L. The intermediate decorative symbol 8c is framed in upward from the lower end of the display screen 7a, overlaps the variablely displayed intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and is displayed on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The right decorative symbol 8r is framed in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, overlaps with the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R, and is displayed on the front side of the right decorative symbol 8R.

As shown in FIG. 63 (J), almost at the same time when the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are stopped side by side in a horizontal row, the decorative symbol 8L stopped and displayed at "234", The display of 8C and 8R disappears. As a result, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are in a state of being stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "777", and then the jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, after the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed after the special symbol change starts and after the previous special symbol change is maintained, in the reach mode. Since a set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit without being displayed, the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

[Decorative design suddenly stop production B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B. The decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in a hit mode without being displayed in a reach mode. Compared with the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B is mainly in that a plurality of sets of decorative symbols are not displayed and only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced. different. In the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed and stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of symbols. The display indicates the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 hold digestion is started in the normal state of the game (low probability low base state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed from this. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit is selected.

When the special figure change is started by the digestion of the special figure 1 hold, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed to the current special figure change. The display disappears instead of being displayed in a variable manner in response to (the fluctuation).

As shown in FIG. 64 (C), when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear, and the characters represented as "big hit" are displayed. An image is displayed, and it is suddenly notified that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), the effect of frame-in of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is executed. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move from different directions toward the center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols, and are "7" here.

The left decorative symbol 8L frame-in from the left end of the display screen 7a toward the right, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the substantially center left of the display screen 7a. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C frame-in from the lower end of the display screen 7a upward, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the substantially center of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R frame-in from the right end of the display screen 7a toward the left, moves toward the center of the display screen 7a, and stops near the substantially center right of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 64 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped side by side in a horizontal row. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "777", and then the jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B, after the special symbol variation starts, the variation display and reach mode of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and the stop display is performed in the jackpot mode. , The player's surprise can be struck, and the interest can be improved.

64 (F) to 64 (J) are other examples of the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B described with reference to FIGS. 64 (A) to 64 (E). In FIGS. 64 (F) to 64 (J), after each of the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fades out from the display screen 7a while moving apart, an effect of notifying a jackpot is executed. To.

FIG. 64 (F) is the same state as in FIG. 64 (A). That is, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "234" are displayed.

In FIG. 64 (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R correspond to the current special figure change (the change) even though the special figure change is started by the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. The stop display is maintained without. After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R move in different directions and fade out from the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L is framed out toward the lower left of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C is framed out toward the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is at the lower right of the display screen 7a. Frame out in the direction.

FIG. 64 (H) is the same state as in FIG. 64 (C). That is, a predetermined time has passed since the current special figure fluctuation (the fluctuation) was started, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fade out and disappear, and a character image represented as "big hit" is displayed. It is suddenly notified that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 64 (I), the effect of frame-in of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is executed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R aligned. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols, and are "7" here.

As shown in FIG. 64 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are arranged in a horizontal row and stop near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in a state of being stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "777", and then the jackpot effect is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect B, after the special symbol variation starts, the variation display and reach mode of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and the stop display is performed in the jackpot mode. , The player's surprise can be struck, and the interest can be improved.

[Decorative pattern suddenly confirmed stop production C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C. The decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect is an effect in which a set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed (fixed stop) in a hit mode without being displayed in a reach mode. Compared to the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C does not display a plurality of sets of decorative symbols, and only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are produced. The main difference is that the movement of the movable accessory 14 is included. In the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed and stopped) are displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed. At the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the variation of the set of symbols. The display indicates the variable display of the special symbol (variation of the special symbol), and the stop display of a set of symbols notifies the result of the special symbol lottery. The special symbol here may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "234". Here, it is assumed that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold is started in the normal state of the game (low probability low base state), and the special figure 1 variation is executed from this. Further, here, it is assumed that the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit is selected.

When the special figure change is started by the digestion of the special figure 1 hold, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R do not correspond to the current special figure change (the change). The stop display is maintained. In this state, the first movable accessory 14 moves forward (front) of the display screen 7a to the right from the left end to the right end of the display screen 7a. Along with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the effect of switching the display contents of the display screen 7a is executed. Specifically, the first screen in which the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed is switched to the second screen in which the character image of "big hit" is displayed. Here, the first screen does not move, but the second screen moves to the front of the first screen to cover the first screen, so that the display contents are switched.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the rightmost advance position, it comes to rest at the advance position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the display screen 7a is in a state of only the second screen on which the character image of "big hit" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly notified that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65 (D), the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right end to the left end of the display screen 7a in the front (front) of the display screen 7a to the left. Along with the movement of the first movable accessory 14, the effect of switching the display contents of the display screen 7a is executed. Specifically, the second screen on which the character image of "big hit" is displayed is switched to the first screen in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "777". Here, the second screen does not move, but the first screen moves to the front of the second screen to cover the second screen, so that the display contents are switched.

When the first movable accessory 14 moves to the leftmost retracted position, it comes to rest at the retracted position. At this time, as shown in FIG. 65 (E), the display screen 7a is in a state of only the first screen in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed at "777" are displayed. After that, the jackpot production is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C, after the special symbol variation starts, the variation display and reach mode of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and the stop display is performed in the jackpot mode. , The player's surprise can be struck, and the interest can be improved.

65 (F) to 65 (J) are other examples of the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C described with reference to FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (E). In FIGS. 65 (F) to 65 (J), the mode in which the first screen in which the stopped-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed is switched to the second screen in which the character image of “big hit” is displayed. It is different from FIGS. 65 (A) to 65 (E).

FIG. 65 (F) is the same state as in FIG. 65 (A). That is, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed (fixed stop) at "234" are displayed. Further, the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a.

In FIG. 65 (G), as in FIG. 65 (B), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed from the first screen. The screen switches to the second screen showing the character image of "big hit". Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen to the right, the display content slides and switches.

FIG. 65 (H) is the same state as in FIG. 65 (C). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the rightmost advanced position, it comes to rest at the advanced position. Further, the display screen 7a is in a state of only the second screen on which the character image of "big hit" is displayed. As a result, it is suddenly notified that the special figure lottery result is a big hit.

In FIG. 65 (I), as in FIG. 65 (D), as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the left, the decorative symbols 8L and 8C are displayed from the second screen on which the character image of "big hit" is displayed. , 8R switches to the first screen stopped and displayed at "777". Here, by moving both the first screen and the second screen to the left, the display content slides and switches.

FIG. 65 (J) is in the same state as in FIG. 65 (E). That is, when the first movable accessory 14 moves to the leftmost retracted position, it comes to rest at the retracted position. Further, the display screen 7a is in a state of only the first screen in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed at "777" are displayed. After that, the jackpot production is executed. In this way, in the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect C, after the special symbol variation starts, the variation display and reach mode of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and the stop display is performed in the jackpot mode. , The player's surprise can be struck, and the interest can be improved.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect of suddenly stopping the decoration pattern.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, after the start of the special symbol variation, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed in the reach mode, and the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r are hit. It is possible to execute an effect that is stopped and displayed in the mode of. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (E), in this effect, after the start of the special figure change, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R change display and a set The stop display of the mode of hitting the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, 8r of is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 63 (F) to (J), in this effect, a set of decorative symbols 8L, which are stopped and displayed after the start of the special figure change and after the previous special figure change, After the display of 8C and 8R is maintained, the stop display of the hit mode is displayed without displaying the variation display of the set of decorative symbols 8l, 8c and 8r corresponding to the current special figure variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 65.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8l, 8c, and 8r stopped and displayed in the hit mode are displayed in the frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 64 and 65.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, in this effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed in the reach mode, and the character image of "hit" is displayed. The hit is notified, and after the notification, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the hit mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the modified example of FIG. 63.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, in this effect, after the display of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears, the character image of "hit" is displayed to hit. Is notified, and after the notification, a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a hit manner are displayed in frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to the modified example of FIG. 65.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect of suddenly stopping the decoration pattern.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, after FIG. 63 (B), the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears, and in FIG. 63 (C), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. You may frame in with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R set to "7" while the variable display is not displayed. Then, in FIG. 63 (E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be fixedly stopped at "777" to notify the jackpot.

[Modification 2]
Even if the character image of "big hit" appears and the big hit is notified while the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed in FIG. 63 (B) of the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative symbol suddenly fixed stop effect A, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r are framed in with "7". However, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may be numbers other than "7" or may be images other than the numerical image. Further, the left decorative symbol 8l, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the right decorative symbol 8r may be framed in with different numbers and stopped and displayed with a lost symbol.

[Modification example 4]
In the decorative symbols suddenly fixed stop effects B and C, the hit notification may be an image other than the character image of "big hit". Further, the notification of the jackpot is not limited to the display of an image, and may be the driving of an accessory or the generation of a sound.

[Modification 5]
Even if the first movable accessory 14 moves to the right from the retracted position to the advanced position after the stop symbol of "234" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappears in the decorative symbol suddenly confirmed stop effect C. Good.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
After the start of the special figure change, it is possible to execute the effect that the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the hit mode without being displayed in the reach mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
In the effect, after the start of the special figure change, the change display of the set of decorative symbols and the stop display of the hit mode are displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
In the effect, after the special figure change starts, the display of the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed after the previous special figure change is maintained, and then the change of the set of decorative symbols corresponding to the current special figure change is maintained. The stop display of the winning mode is displayed without displaying the display,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3.
In the effect, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in a hit manner is displayed in a frame-in manner.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-4.
In the effect, the hit is notified without displaying the set of decorative symbols in the reach mode, and after the notification, the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in the hit mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-5.
In the effect, after the display of the set of decorative symbols disappears, the hit is notified, and after the notification, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the hit mode is displayed in a frame-in manner.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The accessory interlocking effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. This accessory interlocking effect is executed during a variable effect of a decorative symbol in a game state of a normal state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a probability variation state (high probability high base state). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the accessory interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Characteristic interlocking production A]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory interlocking effect A. The accessory-linked effect A in FIG. 66 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 66 (A), in the accessory-linked effect A, first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure. Further, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the character development effect is performed. In this accessory deployment effect, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C forms a reach state in which the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Further, on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed in place of the background image HK in the area where the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbol 8L is arranged at the top, the decorative symbol 8C is arranged at the center, and the decorative symbol 8R is arranged at the bottom, and each becomes 7 symbols, forming a jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves in conjunction with the left direction as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the left direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement effect B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retracting direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retracting direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward direction), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the accessory movement effect C is performed. In this character movement effect C, in this character movement effect C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are located substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character. The CRA is located on the left side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the jackpot symbol notification effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped near the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and are notified as the jackpot symbols of the seven symbols. At this time, the ally character CRA has been erased.

In the above-mentioned character movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are interlocked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character 14. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be interlocked (moved) at a speed slower than that of the first movable accessory 14, or may be interlocked (moved) at a speed faster than that of the first movable accessory 14. It may be linked (moved) with.

[Character interlocking production B]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory interlocking effect B. The accessory-linked effect B in FIG. 67 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the accessory-linked effect B, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure. Further, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the character development effect A is performed. In this accessory deployment effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R are stopped and displayed at 6 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C form a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed in place of the background image HK in the area where the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbol 8L is arranged at the top, the decorative symbol 8C is arranged at the center, and the decorative symbol 8R is arranged at the bottom, and each becomes 6 symbols, forming a jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves in conjunction with the left direction as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the left direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), the accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement effect B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retracting direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retracting direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward direction), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the accessory movement effect C is performed. In this character movement effect C, in this character movement effect C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are located substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character. The CRA is located on the left side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. The button image XA1 includes the characters "PUSH" that urges the player to press the effect button 63, and the characters "3 seconds left" that represent the countdown of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), the character development effect B is performed. In this accessory deployment effect B, the first movable accessory 14 again moves from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (toward from the left to the right of the display screen 7a) in front of the display screen 7a. Moving. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area where the first movable accessory 14 has passed, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, changed to 7 symbols instead of 6 symbols, and notified as a jackpot symbol. That is, it is promoted to 7 symbols, which is relatively advantageous for the player, rather than 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have become the promoted 7 symbols, are displayed without being linked with the first movable accessory 14.

In the above-mentioned character movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are interlocked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character 14. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be interlocked (moved) at a speed slower than that of the first movable accessory 14, or may be interlocked (moved) at a speed faster than that of the first movable accessory 14. It may be linked (moved) with.

[Character interlocking production C]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the accessory interlocking effect C. The accessory-linked effect C in FIG. 68 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the accessory-linked effect C, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure. Further, a predetermined background image HK is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the character development effect A is performed. In this accessory deployment effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves in front of the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (from the left to the right of the display screen 7a). In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are moved to the right side of the display screen 7a in conjunction with the movement of the first movable accessory 14 from the retracted position to the deployed position. Further, in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the decorative symbols 8L and the right decorative symbols 8R are stopped and displayed at 6 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C form a reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed. Further, on the display screen 7a, an effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed in place of the background image HK in the area where the first movable accessory 14 has passed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the accessory movement effect A is performed. In this accessory movement effect A, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position (to the left). At this time, decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R appear from the right end of the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the decorative symbol 8L is arranged at the top, the decorative symbol 8C is arranged at the center, and the decorative symbol 8R is arranged at the bottom, and each becomes 6 symbols, forming a jackpot symbol. The ally character CRA also moves in conjunction with the left direction as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the left direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the accessory movement effect B is performed. In this accessory movement effect B, the first movable accessory 14 further moves in the retracting direction (leftward direction). At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left so as to be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA move to the left at the same speed as the first movable accessory 14 moves in the retracting direction (leftward). In this case, as the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position (leftward direction), the display area of the effect image EF becomes smaller and the display area of the background image HK becomes larger.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the accessory movement effect C is performed. In this character movement effect C, in this character movement effect C, the first movable accessory 14 moves to the retracted position, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are located substantially in the center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character. The CRA is located on the left side of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. In this case, the effect image EF disappears and the background image HK is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the jackpot symbol enlargement effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol enlargement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are enlarged. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed so as to protrude from the display screen 7a. Also, the ally character CRA has been erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), a timer button effect is performed. In this timer button effect, a button image XA1 that prompts the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed. The button image XA1 includes the characters "PUSH" that urges the player to press the effect button 63, and the characters "3 seconds left" that represent the countdown of the timer.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the character development effect B is performed. In this accessory deployment effect B, the first movable accessory 14 again moves from the retracted position on the left of the display screen 7a toward the deployment position (toward from the left to the right of the display screen 7a) in front of the display screen 7a. Moving. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the effect image EF (for example, a black effect image) is displayed instead of the background image HK in the area where the first movable accessory 14 has passed, and the button image XA1 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), a jackpot symbol promotion effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol promotion effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a, changed to 7 symbols instead of 6 symbols, and notified as a jackpot symbol. That is, it is promoted to 7 symbols, which is relatively advantageous for the player, rather than 6 symbols. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which have become the promoted 7 symbols, are displayed without being linked with the first movable accessory 14.

In the above-mentioned character movement effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA are interlocked (moved) to the left at the same speed as the first movable character 14. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R or the ally character CRA may be interlocked (moved) at a speed slower than that of the first movable accessory 14, or may be interlocked (moved) at a speed faster than that of the first movable accessory 14. It may be linked (moved) with.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured to appear from the right end of the display screen 7a when interlocking with the first movable accessory 14, but the decoration is not limited to this. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 from the state of being stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a.
In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R interlocking with the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked in a state where the jackpot symbol is formed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be interlocked with the first movable accessory 14 in a state where the lost symbols are formed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, after the variable effects of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved and the first movable combination It is performed in conjunction with the movement of the object 14. According to this configuration, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be emphasized, and the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be played. Can draw attention to people. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved and the first movable accessory 14 is moved, the decorative symbols 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked in the same direction. According to this configuration, the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized, and the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be played. Can be more noticed by the person. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are moved and the first movable accessory 14 is moved, the decorative symbols 8L , 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are interlocked at the same speed. According to this configuration, the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be completely synchronized, and the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be completely synchronized. Can be made more noticeable to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, The first movable accessory 14 moves from the deployed position to the retracted position. According to this configuration, when the first movable accessory 14 moves in the direction of exiting from the display screen 7a, the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are linked. Since it is performed, it is possible to make the player emphasize the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are gradually displayed on the display screen 7a as the first movable accessory 14 moves from the state where they are not displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. The whole is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can be gradually synchronized, and the movements of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the first movable accessory 14 can be synchronized. Can be made more noticeable to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned accessory interlocking effects A to C, as shown in the accessory movement effects A to C, when the movement of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 are performed in conjunction with each other, The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a jackpot symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the notification of the jackpot by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and it is possible to amplify the joy of the jackpot by the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory that can be moved.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of moving a decorative pattern.
The second display effect is an effect of moving the movable accessory.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect. Is done in conjunction with
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
In the combination effect, the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are interlocked in the same direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-2.
In the combination effect, the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other at the same moving speed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-3.
The movable accessory can move from the retracted position to the deployed position.
In the combination effect, when the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other, the movable accessory is developed. Move from position to evacuation position,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
In the combination effect, when the movement of the decorative symbol in the first display effect and the movement of the movable accessory in the second display effect are performed in conjunction with each other, the decorative symbol is the display means. The decorative symbol is gradually displayed on the display means as the movable accessory moves from the state not displayed on the display means, and then the entire decorative symbol is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-5.
The decorative symbol to be moved in the first display effect is a decorative symbol forming a jackpot symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The scroll effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. This scroll effect is executed while the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), such as during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the scroll effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included. Alternatively, the image is displayed on the sub display screen 64.

[Scroll effect A]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the scroll effect A. The scroll effect A in FIG. 69 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the scroll effect A, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at 3 symbols. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the ally character CRA is arranged in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, the stop images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the upper direction to the lower direction. At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between the continuous stop images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, it is indicated by using arrows that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 that are continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 can be seen. In this case, a part of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, it becomes one stop image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 69 (C), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it becomes one complete stop image XB1. That is, one stop image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), the reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the stop image XB1. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, in the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement production, a new ally character CRA is displayed by transforming, spurring a mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop effect suggesting a miss or a big hit is performed.
The image displayed on the display screen 7a by the reach replacement effect is an image different from the stop image XB1.

[Scroll effect B]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the scroll effect B. The scroll effect B in FIG. 70 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the scroll effect B, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at 3 symbols. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the ally character CRA is arranged in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, the stop images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the upper direction to the lower direction (first direction). At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between the continuous stop images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, it is indicated by using arrows that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 that are continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 can be seen. In this case, a part of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, it becomes one stop image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70C, when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it becomes one complete stop image XB1. That is, one stop image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), an upward scrolling effect is performed. In this upper scroll effect, from the state of the lower scroll stop effect, the continuously continuous stop images XB1 are scrolled (moved) from the lower direction to the upper direction (second direction). In the figure, it is indicated by using arrows that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the upward scroll stop effect is performed. In the upper scroll stop effect, in the upper scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 can be seen. .. In this case, a part of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, it becomes one stop image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 70 (F), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it becomes one complete stop image XB1. That is, one stop image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the lower scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upper scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, since the stop position is different depending on the scrolling in different directions, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
Not limited to this, the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the lower scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upper scroll stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the stop image XB1. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, in the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement production, a new ally character CRA is displayed by transforming, spurring a mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop effect suggesting a miss or a big hit is performed.
The image displayed on the display screen 7a by the reach replacement effect is an image different from the stop image XB1.

[Scroll effect C]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the scroll effect C. The scroll effect C in FIG. 71 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the scroll effect C, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), a decorative symbol temporary stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at 5 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at 3 symbols. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at positions corresponding to the vertices of predetermined triangles, respectively. Further, in this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the ally character CRA is arranged in the upper right. In this decorative symbol temporary stop effect, the image including the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA displayed on the display screen 7a is also referred to as a stop image XB1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a downward scroll effect is performed. In this downward scrolling effect, the stop images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction scroll (move) the display screen 7a from the upper direction to the lower direction (first direction). At this time, a boundary portion XB2 is provided between the continuous stop images XB1. This boundary portion XB2 is shown by hatching in the figure. In the figure, it is indicated by using arrows that the boundary portion XB2 is scrolling (moving) downward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the downward scroll stop effect is performed. In this downward scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 that are continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 can be seen. In this case, a part of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, it becomes one stop image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71 (C), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it becomes one complete stop image XB1. That is, one stop image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), an upward scrolling effect is performed. In this upper scroll effect, from the state of the lower scroll stop effect, the continuously continuous stop images XB1 are scrolled (moved) from the lower direction to the upper direction (second direction). In the figure, it is indicated by using arrows that the boundary portion XB2 is also scrolling (moving) upward.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the upward scroll stop effect is performed. In the upper scroll stop effect, in the upper scroll stop effect, two stop images XB1 continuously connected in the vertical direction are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 provided between the two stop images XB1 can be seen. .. In this case, a part of each of the two stop images XB1 is displayed, and when the two are combined, it becomes one stop image XB1. Specifically, in FIG. 71 (F), when the upper stop image XB1 is placed below the lower stop image XB1, it becomes one complete stop image XB1. That is, one stop image XB1 is displayed on the entire display screen 7a.

The stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the lower scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upper scroll stop effect are different. According to this configuration, since the stop position is different depending on the scrolling in different directions, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
Not limited to this, the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the lower scroll stop effect and the stop position of the boundary portion XB2 in the upper scroll stop effect may be the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the boundary portion effect A is performed. In this boundary portion effect A, the boundary portion XB2 expands in the vertical direction, and three characters XB3 appear at the boundary portion XB2. This character XB3 is a character representing a smiling face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), the boundary portion effect B is performed. In this boundary portion effect B, the character XB3 is an effect of jumping out (moving) from the boundary portion XB2. In this case, the character XB3 includes a character that completely protrudes from the boundary portion XB2 and a character that only partially protrudes from the boundary portion XB2. According to this configuration, after a mysterious atmosphere is created by the scroll effect and the scroll stop effect, the player can be surprised by the boundary portion effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (I), the reach replacement effect is performed. In this reach replacement effect, two consecutive stop images XB1 move downward, the boundary portion XB2 moves to the lower end of the display screen 7a and stops, the boundary portion XB2 disappears, and then the decoration in the stop image XB1. The symbols 8L, 8C, 8R disappear, and new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed to form a reach state. At this time, in the new decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the effect symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. In addition, in this reach replacement production, a new ally character CRA is displayed by transforming, spurring a mysterious atmosphere.
After that, all the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped, and a symbol confirmation stop effect suggesting a miss or a big hit is performed.
The image displayed on the display screen 7a by the reach replacement effect is an image different from the stop image XB1.

[Modification example]
A predetermined image (for example, an effect image or a character image) may be displayed at the boundary portion XB2.
In the scroll effects A to C, when the continuous stop images XB1 are scrolled, the second movable accessory 15 may be moved in the scroll direction. That is, the scrolling of the stop image XB1 and the movement of the second movable accessory 15 may be linked.

[Effect example]
In the scroll effects A to C, the stop image XB1 including the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the ally character CRA is displayed in the decorative symbol temporary stop effect, and then a plurality of continuous stop images XB1 are displayed. The screen 7a is scrolled in the first direction (downward), and then, on the display screen 7a, two consecutive stop images XB1 are stopped and displayed so that the boundary portion XB2 of the two stop images XB1 can be seen. According to this configuration, a plurality of continuous stop images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two continuous stop images XB1 are moved to the boundary between the two stop images XB1. Since the XB2 is stopped and displayed so that it can be seen, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere, and for the player, the subsequent development (whether it is scrolled again or a production different from scrolling). (For example, is pseudo-continuous production, look-ahead production, chance-up production) performed?). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects A to C, a plurality of continuous stop images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive stop images XB1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The boundary portion XB2 of the two stop images XB1 is stopped and displayed so as to be visible, and then a plurality of consecutive stopped images XB1 are scrolled in the second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a more mysterious atmosphere, and the player is given a subsequent development (whether it is scrolled again or a production different from scrolling (for example, pseudo-ream). It is possible to pay attention to whether the production, look-ahead production, chance-up production) will be performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects A to C, a plurality of consecutive stop images XB1 are scrolled in the first direction (downward) on the display screen 7a, and then two consecutive stop images XB1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. A stop display is made so that the boundary portion XB2 of the two stop images XB1 can be seen, and then a plurality of consecutive stop images XB1 are scrolled in the second direction (upward) on the display screen 7a, and then the two stops are displayed again. The boundary portion XB2 of the image XB1 is stopped and displayed so that it can be seen. According to this configuration, it is possible to incite a mysterious atmosphere to the player, and the subsequent development (whether it is scrolled again or an effect different from scrolling (for example, pseudo continuous effect, look-ahead effect). , It is possible to pay attention to whether the chance-up production) will be performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the scroll effects B to C, the position of the boundary portion XB2 at the time of the lower scroll stop effect is different from the position of the boundary portion XB2 at the time of the upper scroll stop effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the difference between the down-scrolling effect that scrolls in the first direction and the up-scrolling effect that scrolls in the second direction, and as a result, the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

The scroll effects A to C are performed during the same variation of the special symbol. According to this configuration, since the scroll effects A to C are performed in the same fluctuation of the special symbol, it is possible to provide the player with a mysterious atmosphere in a short period of time, and the subsequent development ( It is possible to pay attention to whether the scroll is scrolled again, or whether an effect different from the scroll (for example, a pseudo continuous effect, a look-ahead effect, a chance-up effect) is performed. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable accessory that can be moved.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the first image.
The second display effect is an effect of scrolling and displaying a plurality of continuous first images in the first direction by the display means.
The third display effect is an effect of stopping and displaying two consecutive first images in the display means so that the boundary between the two continuous first images can be seen.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, after the first display effect is performed, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the combination effect is performed. The third display effect is performed,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of scrolling and displaying the plurality of continuous first images in a second direction opposite to the first direction by the display means.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the third display effect, the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the display means stops and displays so that the boundary between the two consecutive first images can be seen.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, after the fourth display effect, the fifth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
The positions of the boundary portion in the third display effect and the boundary portion in the fifth display effect are different.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
Equipped with a variable display means for variable display of special symbols
The combination effect is performed during the same variation of the special symbol in the variation display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative pattern special variation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. This decorative symbol special variation effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol in the normal state, the time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol special variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern special variation production A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect A. The decorative symbol special variation effect A of FIG. 72 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special variation effect A, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed suggestion display XC1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the effect before the start of the movement of the moving body is performed. In this effect before the start of movement of the moving body, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is erased. At this time, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the moving body movement effect A is performed. In this moving body movement effect A, the moving body XC2 appears from above the display screen 7a. The moving body XC2 is an image imitating the second movable accessory 15, and specifically, is composed of a quadrangular image and a rod-shaped image. In addition, various characters, characters, and the like are displayed in the rectangular portion of the moving body XC2. In this moving body movement effect A, when the moving body XC2 appears from above, the decorative symbol 8L is displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC2. The production symbol 8L has 7 symbols. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the moving body movement effect B is performed. In this moving body movement effect B, the moving body XC2 moves upward. Then, in the moving body movement effect B, the decorative symbol 8C is displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC2. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the moving body movement effect C is performed. In this moving body movement effect C, the moving body XC2 moves downward. Then, in the moving body movement effect C, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC2. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC2, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped to form a lost or jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern special variation production B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect B. The decorative symbol special variation effect B of FIG. 73 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed suggestion display XC1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is erased, and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. At this time, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the moving body movement effect A is performed. In this moving body movement effect A, the moving body XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image imitating the first movable accessory 14, and specifically, is a rod-shaped image. In this moving body movement effect A, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect A, the decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The post-movement region XC6 is a post-movement region of the mobile body XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the moving body movement effect B is performed. In this moving body movement effect B, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect B, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect B, the decorative symbol 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), the moving body movement effect C is performed. In this moving body movement effect C, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect C, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect C, the decorative symbol 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the moving body movement effect D is performed. In this moving body movement effect D, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect D, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect D, the decorative symbol 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the moving body movement effect E is performed. In this moving body movement effect E, the moving body XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect E, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect E, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. To. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the moving body movement effect F is performed. In this moving body movement effect F, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect F, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect F, the decorative symbol 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (I), a decorative pattern enlargement effect is performed. In this decorative symbol enlargement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged while the movement of the moving body XC5 is stopped. At this time, the character XC4 does not expand. The character XC4 may be enlarged. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the moving body XC5 is continuously displayed. Right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (J), a decorative pattern fade-out effect is performed. In this decorative pattern fade-out effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the character XC4 gradually disappear. The icon image XC3 that has not been erased by the moving body XC5 is continuously displayed. Right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped to form a lost or jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern special variation production C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special variation effect C. The decorative symbol special variation effect C of FIG. 74 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 7a. This right-handed suggestion display XC1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), an icon display effect is performed. In this icon display effect, the display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is erased, and a plurality of icon images XC3 are displayed. This icon image XC3 represents a predetermined emblem, and is displayed on the display screen 7a as a whole. At this time, the right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the moving body movement effect A is performed. In this moving body movement effect A, the moving body XC5 appears from the left side of the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction on the display screen 7a. The moving body XC5 is an image imitating the first movable accessory 14, and specifically, is a rod-shaped image. In this moving body movement effect A, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect A, the decorative symbol 8L is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The post-movement region XC6 is a post-movement region of the mobile body XC5 on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the moving body movement effect B is performed. In this moving body movement effect B, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect B, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect B, the decorative symbol 8L is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), the moving body movement effect C is performed. In this moving body movement effect C, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect C, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect C, the decorative symbol 8C is gradually displayed in accordance with the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the moving body movement effect D is performed. In this moving body movement effect D, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect D, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect D, the decorative symbol 8C is completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the moving body movement effect E is performed. In this moving body movement effect E, the moving body XC5 moves further to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect E, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect E, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are gradually displayed according to the movement of the moving body XC5 in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. To. This character XC4 is a character with a smiling face. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), the moving body movement effect F is performed. In this moving body movement effect F, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the right on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect F, when the moving body XC5 passes through the icon image XC3, the icon image XC3 is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. Further, in the moving body movement effect F, the decorative symbol 8C and the character XC4 are completely displayed in the post-movement area XC6 which expands as the moving body XC5 moves from the left direction to the right direction. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the moving body movement effect G is performed. In this moving body movement effect G, the moving body XC5 is inverted and moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect G, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. That is, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the moving body movement effect H is performed. In this moving body movement effect H, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect H, the decorative symbol 8R and the character XC4 are completely erased. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (K), the moving body movement effect I is performed. In this moving body movement effect I, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect I, the decorative symbol 8C is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. That is, the decorative symbol 8C is gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (L), the moving body movement effect J is performed. In this moving body movement effect J, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect J, the decorative symbol 8C is completely erased. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (M), the moving body movement effect K is performed. In this moving body movement effect K, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect K, the decorative symbol 8L is erased from the portion touching the moving body XC5. That is, the decorative symbol 8L is gradually erased as the moving body XC5 moves. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (N), the moving body movement effect L is performed. In this moving body movement effect L, the moving body XC5 is further moved to the left on the display screen 7a. In this moving body movement effect L, the decorative symbol 8L is completely erased. The right-handed suggestion display XC1 is continuously displayed regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5.
After that, regardless of the movement of the moving body XC5, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped to form a lost or jackpot symbol.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol special variation effect C, in the moving body movement effects G to L, the decorative symbol or character is deleted from the portion touching the moving body XC5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbol or character is not limited to this. May be configured to be erased from the portion superimposed on the moving body XC5.
The decorative symbol special variation effect B and the decorative symbol special variation effect C can be executed in different variations, and may be executed, for example, in the same gaming state (time saving state, probability variation state).

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol special variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are gradually displayed as the moving body moves in the moving body movement effect. According to this configuration, the display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be expressed by comparison with the moving body, and the display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R can be made interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effects B to C, in the moving body movement effect, a part of the decorative symbol is displayed in the post-movement area XC6, which is the area after the moving body XC5 has moved, and the moving body XC5 is moved. The display area of the decorative pattern is displayed so as to be gradually increased in the post-movement area XC6 which is enlarged accordingly. According to this configuration, the movement of the moving body XC5 and the appearance of the decorative symbol being displayed are linked, so that the player can be provided with a new decorative symbol variation effect, and the decorative symbol variation effect is mysterious. It can be sublimated into something interesting. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned decorative symbol special variation effects A to C, the decorative design is not displayed before the moving body movement effect in which the decorative design is gradually displayed. According to this configuration, the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect can be sublimated into a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are deleted in the decorative symbol fade-out effect regardless of the movement of the moving object. Will be done. According to this configuration, the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect can be sublimated into a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol special variation effect B, after the moving object movement effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged in the decorative symbol enlargement effect, and gradually become thinner and erased in the decorative symbol fade-out effect. According to this configuration, the display of the decorative pattern in the moving object movement effect can be sublimated into a more mysterious and interesting one. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

The decorative symbol special variation effects A to C are performed when the variation is the same and the high base state (probability variation game state or time reduction state) is relatively advantageous to the player as compared with the low base state (normal state). Is done. Players have higher expectations for jackpots in the high base state than in the low base state. According to this configuration, the moving body movement effect can be made more mysterious and the expectation for the moving body movement effect can be improved by performing the moving body movement effect in a predetermined fluctuation in the high base state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a moving moving body.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a decorative pattern.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and when the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, the combination effect is performed. Along with the movement of the moving body in the first display effect, the decorative symbol is gradually displayed in the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-1.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, a part of the decorative symbol is displayed in the post-movement area, which is the area after the moving body has moved, and the display is enlarged with the movement of the moving body. Display so that the display area of the decorative symbol is gradually increased in the post-movement area.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-2.
In the combination effect, the decorative pattern is not displayed before the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which the decorative pattern is erased.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and in the second display effect, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the post-movement area, the third display effect is performed. In the display effect, the decorative symbol is erased regardless of the movement of the moving body.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-4.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, when the decorative symbol is erased, it is gradually thinned and erased while being enlarged.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-5.
The gaming state of the gaming machine is always one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state that is relatively advantageous to the player. It has become
In the combination effect, the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect have the same variation and are performed during the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The decorative symbol defect effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. This decorative symbol defect effect is executed during a variation effect of the decorative symbol in the normal state, the time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or the probability variation state (high accuracy high base state). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol defect effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Decorative pattern defect production A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol defect effect A. The decorative symbol defect effect A of FIG. 75 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol defect effect A, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed with 4 symbols to form a reach state. Further, in the reach state display effect, the icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the moving body collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the moving body collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In the moving body collision effect B, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect B, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the moving body collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect C, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the moving body collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbols 8C of the four symbols having the plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative symbols 8C representing the five symbols are newly temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state. Is forming. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed at a different position. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the moving body collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the moving body collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect F, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect F, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (I), the moving body collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect G, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (J), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image is displayed. This is a production in which XD1 attacks the ally character CRA.
After that, using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern defect production B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol defect effect B. The decorative symbol defect effect B of FIG. 76 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol defect effect B, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed with 4 symbols to form a reach state. Further, in the reach state display effect, the icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the moving body collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the moving body collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In the moving body collision effect B, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect B, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the moving body collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect C, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the moving body collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbols 8C of the four symbols having the plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative symbols 8C representing the five symbols are newly temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state. Is forming. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed at a different position. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the moving body collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the moving body collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect F, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect F, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (I), the moving body collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect G, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (J), the decorative pattern restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative symbol restoration effect A, the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols) is partially repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the region of the defective portion XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative symbol restoration effect A, the defective portions XD2 in the middle and lower portions of the decorative symbol 8C are repaired to return to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (K), the decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In the decorative symbol restoration effect B, the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the defective portion XD2 disappears. Specifically, in the decorative symbol restoration effect B, the upper portion of the decorative symbol 8C is further restored, and the decorative symbol 8C completely returns to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (L), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image is displayed. This is a production in which XD1 attacks the ally character CRA.
After that, using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed.

[Decorative pattern defect production C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol defect effect C. The decorative symbol defect effect C of FIG. 77 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol defect effect C, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the reach state display effect is performed. In this reach state display effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are temporarily stopped and displayed with 4 symbols to form a reach state. Further, in the reach state display effect, the icon image XD1 is displayed. This icon image XD1 represents a predetermined emblem. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the moving body collision effect A is performed. In this moving object collision effect A, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect A, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the moving body collision effect B is performed. In this moving object collision effect B, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In the moving body collision effect B, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect B, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the moving body collision effect C is performed. In this moving object collision effect C, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect C, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (4 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect C, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the moving body collision effect D is performed. In this moving object collision effect D, the decorative symbols 8C of the four symbols having the plurality of defective portions XD2 (enlarged defective portions XD2) are erased, and the decorative symbols 8C representing the five symbols are newly temporarily stopped and displayed in the reach state. Is forming. Further, the icon image XD1 is displayed at a different position. The icon image XD1 moves in the direction of the arrow in the figure (direction toward the decorative symbol 8C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the moving body collision effect E is performed. In this moving object collision effect E, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol 8C. In this moving object collision effect E, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the moving body collision effect F is performed. In this moving object collision effect F, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the central part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect F, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect F, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (I), the moving body collision effect G is performed. In this moving object collision effect G, the icon image XD1 collides with the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol 8C while the decorative symbol 8C is further enlarged and deformed. In this moving object collision effect G, when the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols), the collision portion in the decorative symbol 8C is further lost, and a new defective portion XD2 is generated. That is, in this moving body collision effect G, the defective portion XD2 expands while the decorative symbol 8C expands and deforms.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (J), a cut-in effect is performed. In this cut-in effect, the decorative symbol 8C having the defective portion XD2 or the cut-in image XD3 is displayed so as to hide the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. This cut-in image XD3 includes an icon image XD1 as a chance-up, the characters "Gekiatsuyo!" As a chance-up, and a ally character CRA as a chance-up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (K), the decorative pattern restoration effect A is performed. In this decorative symbol restoration effect A, the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols) is partially repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the region of the defective portion XD2 is reduced. Specifically, in the decorative symbol restoration effect A, the defective portions XD2 in the middle and lower portions of the decorative symbol 8C are repaired to return to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (L), the decorative pattern restoration effect B is performed. In the decorative symbol restoration effect B, the decorative symbol 8C (5 symbols) is completely repaired by the light emitted from the icon image XD1, and the defective portion XD2 disappears. Specifically, in the decorative symbol restoration effect B, the upper portion of the decorative symbol 8C is further restored, and the decorative symbol 8C completely returns to the state before the collision with the icon image XD1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (M), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, while the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state, and the ally character CRA and the icon image XD1 are displayed, and the icon image is displayed. This is a production in which XD1 attacks the ally character CRA.
After that, using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, a lost symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol defect effects A to C, the icon image XD1 is used as the moving body that collides with the decorative symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any moving object may be used as the moving body. ..
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol defect effects A to C, the moving object collision effect is performed for the decorative symbols in the reach state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving object collision effect is performed for the changing decorative symbols. You may do it. In this case, the decorative symbol during fluctuation may be a decorative symbol during low-speed fluctuation, which is slower than normal fluctuation.
In the decorative symbol defect effect C, the cut-in effect is performed after the moving object collision effect G, but the cut-in effect is not limited to this, and the cut-in effect is performed during or either of the moving object collision effects. It may be performed during the decorative pattern restoration effect of.

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol defect effects A to C, the icon image XD1 as a moving body and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, and then the icon image XD1 collides with the decorative symbol 8C, whereby the decorative symbol 8C An effect is performed in which the collision portion is lost and the defective portion XD2 is generated. According to this configuration, the action of the icon image XD1 as a moving body makes it possible to make the variation effect of the decorative pattern mysterious, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the decorative symbol defect effects A to C, when a defective portion XD2 occurs in the decorative symbol 8C in the moving object collision effect, the decorative symbol 8C becomes larger as the defective portion XD2 expands. According to this configuration, when the defective portion XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, the decorative symbol becomes large, so that the enlargement of the defective portion XD2 by the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, and the variation effect of the decorative symbol is more mysterious. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol defect effects A to C, when the defective portion XD2 occurs in the decorative symbol 8C in the moving object collision effect, the decorative symbol 8C is deformed as the defective portion XD2 expands. According to this configuration, when the defective portion XD2 is enlarged by the icon image XD1, the decorative symbol is deformed, so that the enlargement of the defective portion XD2 by the icon image XD1 can be emphasized, and the variation effect of the decorative symbol is more mysterious. As a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol defect effects A to C, in the moving body collision effects A to C, the defective portion XD2 is generated in the decorative symbols 8C, which are the four symbols, and the four symbols disappear, and then the mobile object collision occurs. In the effects D to G, a defective portion XD2 is generated in the decorative symbol 8C, which is the five symbols, and the effect is expanded. According to this configuration, in the decorative symbol 8C, different symbols are sequentially deleted and enlarged, so that the variation effect of the decorative symbol can be made more mysterious, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

In the decorative symbol defect effects A to C, in the moving body collision effects A to C, the defective portion XD2 is generated in the decorative symbols 8C, which are the four symbols, and the four symbols disappear, and then the mobile object collision occurs. In the effects D to G, the decorative symbol 8C, which is the 5 symbols, is produced with the defective portion XD2 and is enlarged, and then the super reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, in the decorative symbol 8C, different symbols are sequentially deleted and enlarged, and further, since it develops into a super reach effect, the variable effect of the decorative pattern can be made more mysterious. Furthermore, the player can be made to pay attention to the subsequent super reach production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.
[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined moving body.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first decorative pattern.
The third display effect is an effect in which the collision portion in the first decorative symbol is lost when the predetermined moving body collides with the first decorative symbol.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-1.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative symbol becomes larger as the defective portion expands.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-2.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the first decorative symbol is deformed as the defective portion expands.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect displays a second decorative symbol different from the first decorative symbol, and when the moving body collides with the second decorative symbol, the collision in the second decorative symbol occurs. It is a production where the part is missing,
The combination effect may include a fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, after the defective portion of the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the first decorative symbol disappears, and then the fourth display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-4.
In the fourth display effect of the combination effect, the missing portion of the second decorative symbol is enlarged, then the second decorative symbol disappears, and then the super reach effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. This ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect is executed during a variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). , It is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the display screen 7a displays the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the jackpot game ends. The number of games displayed GS is displayed. The variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variation display corresponding to the variation of the special figure 1 in the normal state. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game number display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value indicating the number of games (number of fluctuations) since the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of fluctuations (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a character image of "400 games" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the game machine 1 ON / OFF. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON / OFF.

Further, in FIG. 78 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200 times, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC = 201). In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 201, the second threshold value TH2 = 51, the third threshold value TH3 = 11, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 1 are set (stored) as threshold values for the ceiling effect counter. ing. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the sub-control board 90 has the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. After a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the variation display, the first arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position in the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. Since the game machine 1 of the present embodiment starts the "play time mode" effect after reaching the ceiling, an image showing the characters of "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "up to 200 times", and is configured to be read as "up to play time mode of 200 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The part of "200 times" indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling numerically, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached.

The arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends (stop display). That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 is displayed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, The display disappears before the 8R variable display switches to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 78 (B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), as shown in FIGS. 78 (C) and 78 (D), the sub-control board 90 has the decorative symbols 8L and 8C. , The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a after a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the fluctuation display of 8R. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the second position in the center of the right end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD as in the previous (first time) display.

The mode image MG is a character image of the same "play time mode" as the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "90% achieved up to", and is configured to be read as "90% achieved up to play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. .. The "90%" part indicates the ratio (%) of the number of fluctuations executed so far (the number of times required minus the remaining number) to the number of times required to change to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). There is. This arrival schedule information TJ is displayed for the second time, and since the first arrival schedule information TJ was displayed / deleted in FIG. 78 (B) last time, the fluctuation has passed 150 times, so that the player Once I knew the number of remaining fluctuations, I was thrilled that I couldn't understand it again. By displaying the arrival schedule information TJ for the second time, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

The display of the second arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH2 = 51) ends. That is, the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2, and the decorative symbol is displayed. The display disappears before the variable display of 8L, 8C, and 8R is switched to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 78 (D), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold value TH3 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (TC = TH3 = 11), as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the third time. Display the schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position in the center of the left end of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD as in the first (previous and previous) and second (previous) displays. There is.

After the third arrival schedule information TJ is displayed on the display screen 7a, the arrival schedule information TJ moves downward toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 78 (F). When the third position at the lower left end of the display screen 7a is reached, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the arrival schedule information TJ moves to the right toward the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a. ..

When the arrival schedule information TJ reaches the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a, it is displayed side by side with the game number display GS displayed at the lower right end of the display screen 7a and adjacent to each other. Here, a rectangular frame image is newly displayed, and the remaining number information CD of "10 more times until" and the game number display GS of "game number 590" are displayed side by side inside the frame image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), the display of the third arrival schedule information TJ is maintained even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. The display of the third arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the fourth position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of arrivals at the ceiling).

When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1) by repeating the fluctuation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 78 (H), as shown in FIGS. 78 (I) and 78 (J). , The remaining number of arrival information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ is "0 times until", and the number of games display GS is "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed and the next fluctuation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 sets the gaming state to the normal state (normal probability state). And it switches from the non-time saving state and the low base state) to the time saving state (normal probability state and the time saving state and the high base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 hold remains, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed after the rush.

As shown in FIG. 78 (K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 78 (L), the mode image MG of the “play time mode” and the start image TN of the “rush” are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" effect has been started.

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 79 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC = 201). In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 201, the second threshold value TH2 = 51, the third threshold value TH3 = 11, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 1 are set (stored) as threshold values for the ceiling effect counter. ing. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the first time. Display the schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at the first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. Since the game machine 1 of the present embodiment starts the "play time mode" effect after reaching the ceiling, an image showing the characters of "play time mode" is displayed. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "up to 200 times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image represented by "40%".
The character image of "up to 200 times" is configured to be read as "up to play time mode 200 times" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The part of "200 times" indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling numerically, and corresponds to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. The ratio image represented as "40%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times to the ceiling to the required number of fluctuations to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and the area area of the specific color decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can know the degree of the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 79 (A), the display screen 7a also displays a variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS indicating the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game number display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value indicating the number of games (number of fluctuations) since the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of fluctuations (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a character image of "400 games" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the game machine 1 ON / OFF. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON / OFF.

The display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C are displayed. , The display disappears before the 8R fluctuation display is switched to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, the stop display of "567" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed as shown in FIG. 79 (B).

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 79 (B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time as shown in FIG. 79 (C). Display the schedule information TJ. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD as in the case of the previous display. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of the same "play time mode" as the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD includes a character image of "50 more times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image represented by "10%". The character image of "50 more times" is configured to be read as "50 times until the play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The ratio image represented as "10%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the remaining number of times to the ceiling to the required number of fluctuations to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and the area area of the specific color decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. This arrival schedule information TJ is displayed for the second time, and since the change has passed 150 times since the first arrival schedule information TJ was displayed / deleted in FIG. 79 (A) last time, the player Once I knew the number of remaining fluctuations, I was thrilled because I couldn't understand it again. By displaying the arrival schedule information TJ for the second time, it is possible to give a sense of security after the excitement.

After the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right end of the display screen 7a while being reduced and displayed. When the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reached, the game number display GS displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is displayed side by side and adjacent to each other. The display of the second arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of arrivals at the ceiling). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced and moved, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the false arrival schedule information tj is further displayed in a large size while the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Whether or not to display the false arrival schedule information tj by lottery is randomly determined for each fluctuation pattern, and here, it is assumed that the display is determined by lottery. Further, here, the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed at the same fluctuation as the arrival schedule information TJ, but may be displayed at the time of the fluctuation after the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Further, the arrival schedule information TJ may be displayed after the change in which the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed. The false arrival schedule information tj includes the mode image mg and the false remaining number information cd, similarly to the arrival schedule information TJ.

The mode image mg is a character image of the "play time mode" like the mode image MG. The false remaining number information cd includes a character image of "up to 10 times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image represented by "2%". The character image of "up to 10 times" is configured to be read as "up to 10 times of play time mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The part of "10 times" is a numerical value different from the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and a false remaining number of fluctuations is shown. The false remaining number of fluctuations may be larger or less than the actual number of remaining fluctuations, and is randomly determined. The "10 times" part is then decremented one by one for each change. The percentage image represented as "2%" numerically indicates the ratio (%) of the false remaining number of times to the ceiling to the required number of fluctuations to reach the ceiling (for example, 600). In the meter image, the numerical value of the ratio image corresponds to the area of the region of a specific color, and the area area of the specific color decreases as the numerical value of the ratio image decreases. When this false arrival schedule information tj is displayed, the player mistakenly recognizes it as the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached.

After the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the false arrival schedule information tj moves toward the lower left end of the display screen 7a while being reduced and displayed. When it reaches the lower left corner of the display screen 7a, it is displayed side by side with the arrival schedule information TJ displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and adjacent to each other. The player is confused because he does not know which of the arrival schedule information TJ and the false arrival schedule information tj is the correct information. As a result, the player can be thrilled and the interest can be improved.

After repeating the special figure 1 fluctuation a plurality of times from FIG. 79 (F), as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the character image included in the false remaining number information cd of the false arrival schedule information tj is "0 more times". Then, a character image of "lie" is displayed at the same time, and it is notified that the false arrival schedule information tj is a fake. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the display of the false arrival schedule information tj disappears. The arrival schedule information TJ is continuously displayed.

When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1) by repeating the fluctuation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 79 (H), as shown in FIGS. 79 (I) and 79 (J). , The remaining number of arrival information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ is "0 times until", and the number of games display GS is "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "789" and the next fluctuation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 is in the normal state of the game. Switch from (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 hold remains, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed after the rush.

As shown in FIG. 79 (K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 79 (L), the mode image MG of the “play time mode” and the start image TN of the “rush” are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "play time mode" effect has been started.

[Ceiling arrival schedule suggestion production C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect C. The ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect displays information (arrival schedule information) related to the number of remaining fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached in the normal time (normal probability state, non-time reduction state, and low base state). This is an effect that suggests to the player the number of fluctuations (the number of games) until the play time is reached. When the number of fluctuations reaches 600 in the normal state (normal probability state, non-time saving state, and low base state), the main control board 80 switches the gaming state to the time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state, and high base state). .. Here, the number of fluctuations that reach the play time is also called the ceiling, and reaching the number of fluctuations is also called reaching the ceiling.

In FIG. 80 (A), the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is 200, and the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is 201 (TC = 201). In the sub RAM of the game machine 1, the first threshold value TH1 = 201, the second threshold value TH2 = 51, the third threshold value TH3 = 11, and the fourth threshold value TH4 = 1 are set (stored) as threshold values for the ceiling effect counter. ing. The values of these threshold values are examples and can be set to arbitrary numerical values.

The sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the first threshold value TH1 for each fluctuation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1 (TC = TH1 = 201), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the first time as shown in FIG. 80 (A). Display the schedule information TJ. The arrival schedule information TJ is displayed in a large size at the first position near the center of the display screen 7a, and includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD.

The mode image MG represents an effect mode that is executed after the number of fluctuations reaches 600 times (after reaching the ceiling) in the normal state. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the mode effect represented by the smile face image is started after reaching the ceiling, so that the smile face image and the characters of "mode" are displayed. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "coming soon", and is configured to be read as "coming soon to smile face image mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. The "coming soon" part qualitatively indicates the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and corresponds to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. As described above, the remaining number of times information CD may have qualitative contents other than numerical values. Here, "still", "good condition", "soon", "a little more", "almost achieved", and "achieved" are displayed in order according to the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling. When this arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the player can roughly know the degree of the remaining number of fluctuations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached.

As shown in FIG. 80 (A), the display screen 7a also displays a variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and a game number display GS indicating the number of games (number of fluctuations) after the jackpot game ends. Will be done. The variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

The game number display GS is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and includes a numerical value indicating the number of games (number of fluctuations) since the end of the jackpot game. Here, the number of fluctuations (number of games) since the end of the jackpot game is 400, and a character image of "400 games" is displayed. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS is not cleared by turning the power of the game machine 1 ON / OFF. The number of games displayed on the game number display GS may be cleared by turning the power ON / OFF.

The display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears before the change (change of TC = TH1 = 201) ends. That is, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the first threshold value TH1, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C are displayed. , The display disappears before the 8R fluctuation display is switched to the stop display. After the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the stop display of "567" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 80 (B), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the second threshold value TH2 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the second threshold value TH2 (TC = TH2 = 51), the sub-control board 90 reaches the display screen 7a for the second time as shown in FIG. 80 (C). Display the schedule information TJ. The second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the same first position as the first arrival schedule information TJ. That is, it is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The second arrival schedule information TJ includes the mode image MG and the remaining number of times information CD as in the case of the previous display. When the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are reduced.

The mode image MG is a character image of the same "play time mode" as the previous time. The remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "a little more", and is configured so that it can be read as "a little more to the smile face image mode" together with the mode image MG displayed above. This arrival schedule information TJ is displayed for the second time, and since the change has passed 150 times since the first arrival schedule information TJ was displayed / deleted in FIG. 80 (A) last time, the player Once I knew the number of remaining fluctuations, I was thrilled because I couldn't understand it again. By this second display, it is possible to give a sense of security after pounding.

After the second arrival schedule information TJ is displayed, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), the arrival schedule information TJ moves toward the lower right end of the display screen 7a while being reduced and displayed. When the second position at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is reached, the game number display GS displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a is displayed side by side and adjacent to each other. The display of the second arrival schedule information TJ is maintained at the second position at the lower right end of the display screen 7a until it reaches the ceiling (until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of arrivals at the ceiling). As the arrival schedule information TJ is reduced and moved, the display areas of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are expanded.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been variablely displayed are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 80 (F), when the next fluctuation is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been stopped and displayed are again displayed as fluctuations. On the other hand, the content of the arrival schedule information TJ is not changed from the previous change, and the same content is continuously displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued even after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been further varied and displayed are stopped and displayed. The content of the arrival schedule information TJ has not changed since the previous change, and the same content is continuously displayed. That is, the remaining number of times information CD is a character image of "a little more", and does not change for each change number, and the character content changes after a certain number of changes.

After repeating the variation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 80 (G), the sub-control board 90 determines whether or not the value TC of the ceiling effect counter is equal to the third threshold value TH3 for each variation. Then, when the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the third threshold value TH3 (TC = TH3 = 11), as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the sub-control board 90 has the remaining number of times information of the arrival schedule information TJ. Change the contents of the CD. Specifically, the character image of "a little more" is changed to "almost achieved".

When the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes equal to the fourth threshold value TH4 (TC = TH4 = 1) by repeating the fluctuation of the special figure 1 a plurality of times from FIG. 80 (H), as shown in FIGS. 80 (I) and 80 (J). , The content of the remaining number information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ is further changed. Specifically, the character image of "almost achieved" is changed to "achieved". The number of games display GS is "600 games".

When the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "678" and the next fluctuation is started, the value TC of the ceiling effect counter becomes 0 (zero), and the main control board 80 is in the normal state of the game. Switch from (normal probability state, non-time saving state and low base state) to time saving state (normal probability state, time saving state and high base state). As a result, the b time reduction (play time) is entered. Here, since the special figure 1 hold remains, the special figure 1 lottery in a time-saving state is executed after the rush.

As shown in FIG. 80 (K), the display of the arrival schedule information TJ disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 80 (L), the mode image MG of the “smile face image mode” and the start image TN of the “rush” are displayed. As a result, it is notified that the ceiling has been reached and the "smile face image mode" effect has been started.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect of suggesting that the ceiling will reach the ceiling.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78A to 78E, the arrival schedule information TJ, which is information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the ceiling is achieved, is displayed in the normal state. After the first effect and the first effect, the arrival schedule information TJ disappears in the normal state. After the second effect and the second effect, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed again in the normal state. It is possible to carry out the third effect to be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 78 (E) to 78 (J), in the third effect, the display of the arrival schedule information TJ is continued until the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling is reached. To. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the arrival schedule information TJ is a mode image representing an effect mode (play time mode) executed after the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches the number of times the ceiling has been reached. According to this configuration, which includes the above, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78 (L), as shown in, at the start of the effect mode executed after reaching the ceiling, a mode image representing the effect mode is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 79 and 80.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, in the first effect, the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed at the first position on the display screen 7a, and in the third effect, the arrival schedule information TJ. Is displayed at the first position, then moves to the second position of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is continuously displayed at the second position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 80.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, the arrival schedule information TJ includes a numerical image showing the remaining number of fluctuations until the number of arrivals at the ceiling is reached, and in the third production, the third effect A numerical image showing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the arrival schedule information TJ at the position 2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 79.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effects A and B, the remaining number of times information CD is assumed to correspond to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. However, the remaining number of times information CD may correspond to the value TC of the ceiling effect counter. For example, in the above embodiment, the remaining number information CD is displayed as 0 when the fluctuation is one before reaching the ceiling, but the remaining number information CD is 1 when the fluctuation is one before reaching the ceiling. The play time mode may be started without displaying the state in which the remaining number of times information CD becomes 0.

[Modification 2]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B, the timing at which the false arrival schedule information tj is displayed is randomly determined. That is, the false arrival schedule information tj may be displayed before the arrival schedule information TJ is displayed. Further, which of the remaining number information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ and the false remaining number information cd of the false arrival schedule information tj may become 0 first. For example, even if the false remaining number information cd of the false arrival schedule information tj is not 0, the remaining number information CD of the arrival schedule information TJ becomes 0 first, and the remaining number information CD play time mode is entered. Good.

[Modification 3]
In the ceiling arrival schedule suggestion effect B, the remaining number of times information CD is assumed to include a character image of "up to 200 times", a rectangular meter image, and a ratio image represented by "40%". .. However, the remaining number information CD may be at least one of these.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A10-1]
A display means that can display multiple types of images,
A gaming machine including a gaming state switching means for switching the gaming state to the second gaming state when the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches a specific number of times.
In the first gaming state, the first effect of displaying the arrival schedule information, which is information related to the remaining number of fluctuations until the specific number of times is reached, and
After the first effect, in the first game state, the display of the arrival schedule information disappears, and the second effect.
After the second effect, in the first game state, a third effect in which the arrival schedule information is displayed again can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-1.
In the third effect, the display of the arrival schedule information is continued until the number of fluctuations in the first gaming state reaches the specific number of times.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A10-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A10-1 or the aspect A10-2.
The arrival schedule information includes a mode image showing an effect mode to be executed after the number of fluctuations in the first game state reaches the specific number of times.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-3.
At the start of the effect mode, the mode image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4.
In the first effect, the arrival schedule information is displayed at the first position of the display means.
In the third effect, the arrival schedule information is displayed at the first position, then moved to the second position of the display means while being reduced, and continuously displayed at the second position. Ru,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-5.
The arrival schedule information includes a numerical image showing the remaining number of fluctuations until the specified number of times is reached.
In the third effect, a numerical image representing the number of games is displayed adjacent to the arrival schedule information at the second position.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). At that time, that is, when the ceiling is reached), the play time (low probability time reduction state) is entered. This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode in the normal state is also referred to as the normal mode, and the display mode in the low accuracy time reduction (play time) is also referred to as the "explosion time reduction mode". Hereinafter, in the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter becomes 0)" is also simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached".

The mode suggestion image display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. This mode suggestion image display effect is executed during the game state of the normal state (low probability state) or the time saving state (low probability low base state) of the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the mode suggestion image display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Mode suggestion image display effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect A. In this mode suggestion image display effect A, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol before reaching the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) in the low probability state (normal state), the number at the time of reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuation. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect A, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the variation of the special symbol. The display effect is when the number of fluctuations is 2 remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling arrival effects A to C. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), and the ceiling arrival effect D is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation after reaching the ceiling. , It is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the short-time explosive mode (play time), and the ceiling arrival effect E is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined fluctuation (for example, 10 fluctuations) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 81, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect A, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time reduction mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this ceiling-front effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining fluctuation number until reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining until it reaches the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (D), in the ceiling arrival effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side, the right-handed display XE3 is displayed on the upper right, and the explosion occurs. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed in the substantially center. The right-handed display XE3 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball. The blasting time reduction mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image suggesting that the player has entered the blasting time reduction mode, and is described as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is ceilinged, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (E), in the ceiling arrival effect B, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed in the lower left corner on the display screen 7a. .. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a trapezoidal shape, which is different from the shape of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing the explanation of the explosive time saving mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable accessory is movable", that is, the explosive time saving mode is a movable accessory (for example, It is shown that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), in the ceiling arrival effect D, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed in the lower left corner on the display screen 7a. Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D have the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling arrival effect D (for example, after 10 changes), as shown in FIG. 81 (H), in the ceiling arrival effect E, the right-handed display XE3 continues to the upper right on the display screen 7a. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from substantially the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E have the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.
After that, during the explosive time reduction mode, the same effect as the ceiling arrival effect E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect B. In this mode suggestion image display effect B, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol before reaching the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) in the low probability state (normal state), the number at the time of reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuation. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect B, the ceiling-front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the ceiling-front effect B is the variation of the special symbol. The display effect is when the number of fluctuations is 2 remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the ceiling front effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until the ceiling is reached. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), and the ceiling arrival effect D is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation after reaching the ceiling. , It is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the short-time explosive mode (play time), and the ceiling arrival effect E is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined fluctuation (for example, 10 fluctuations) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 82, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect B, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 82 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time reduction mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this ceiling-front effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining fluctuation number until reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining until it reaches the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), in the ceiling arrival effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side, the right-handed display XE3 is displayed on the upper right, and the explosion occurs. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed in the substantially center. The right-handed display XE3 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball. The blasting time reduction mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image suggesting that the player has entered the blasting time reduction mode, and is described as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is ceilinged, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from the bottom of the substantially center. It is displayed toward the lower right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a rectangular shape and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (F), in the ceiling arrival effect C, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing the explanation of the explosive time saving mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable accessory is movable", that is, the explosive time saving mode is a movable accessory (for example, It is shown that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from the bottom of the substantially center. It is displayed from the lower right, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D have the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling arrival effect D (for example, after 10 changes), as shown in FIG. 82 (H), in the ceiling arrival effect E, the right-handed display XE3 continues to the upper right on the display screen 7a. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from substantially the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E have the same size as the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.
After that, during the explosive time reduction mode, the same effect as the ceiling arrival effect E is performed.

[Mode suggestion image display effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image display effect C. In this mode suggestion image display effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol before reaching the ceiling (ceiling count is 0) in the low probability state (normal state), the number at the time of reaching the ceiling, and the number after reaching the ceiling. Represents each display effect in fluctuation. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image display effect C, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 remaining until reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the variation of the special symbol. The display effect is when the number of fluctuations is 2 remaining until the ceiling is reached, and the ceiling front effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until the ceiling is reached. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), and the ceiling arrival effect D is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 fluctuation after reaching the ceiling. , It is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by 1 after entering the short-time explosive mode (play time), and the ceiling arrival effect E is, in other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol changes by a predetermined value (for example, 10 fluctuations) after reaching the ceiling. This is a display effect when a predetermined fluctuation (for example, 10 fluctuations) occurs after entering the time saving mode (play time). In the mode suggestion image display effect in FIG. 83, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the figure.

In this mode suggestion image display effect C, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 83 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The first mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is an image suggesting the explosive time reduction mode, and has a rectangular shape. That is, in this ceiling-front effect A, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the gaming state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1 and represents the remaining fluctuation number until reaching the ceiling. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the display screen 7a. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect B, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the ceiling is reached, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the first from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The mode suggestion image XE1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XE2 are continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. In this ceiling-front effect C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed even though the game state is the normal state and the display mode is the normal mode. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image XE1. In the ceiling front effect C, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining until it reaches the ceiling, so the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "one remaining".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), in the ceiling arrival effect A, on the display screen 7a, the remaining fluctuation number display XE2 is continuously displayed on the lower side, the right-handed display XE3 is displayed on the upper right, and the explosion occurs. The time saving mode entry suggestion image XE4 is displayed in the substantially center. The right-handed display XE3 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball. The blasting time reduction mode entry suggestion image XE4 is an image suggesting that the player has entered the blasting time reduction mode, and is described as "Congratulations!". In the ceiling reaching effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is ceilinged, the remaining number of fluctuations display XE2 is expressed as "0 remaining times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), in the ceiling reaching effect B, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from the bottom of the substantially center. It is displayed toward the lower right. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is an image suggesting the explosive time saving mode. The second mode suggestion image XE5 has a rectangular shape and has the same shape as the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is formed larger than the first mode suggestion image XE1. The display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 is the same as the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display position of the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different from the display position of the first mode suggestion image XE1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect C, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the mode explanation image XE6 is displayed substantially in the center. This mode explanation image XE6 is an image showing the explanation of the explosive time saving mode, and specifically, it is displayed as "a big hit if the movable accessory is movable", that is, the explosive time saving mode is a movable accessory (for example, It is shown that if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) move (move) from the retracted position to the deployed position, it becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), in the ceiling reaching effect D, the right-handed display XE3 is continuously displayed on the upper right on the display screen 7a, and the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed from the bottom of the substantially center. It is displayed from the lower right, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center to the right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect D are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.

Next, after a predetermined change from the ceiling arrival effect D (for example, after 10 changes), as shown in FIG. 83 (H), in the ceiling arrival effect E, the right-handed display XE3 continues to the upper right on the display screen 7a. The second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased from the lower left, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are continuously displayed from substantially the center to the right side. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling reaching effect E are displayed smaller than the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R in the ceiling front effects A to C.
After that, during the explosive time reduction mode, the same effect as the ceiling arrival effect E is performed.

[Modification example]
In the mode suggestion image display effect A, the shapes of the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 are different, but in the first mode suggestion image XE1 and in the second mode suggestion image XE5. The written characters "explosion time reduction mode" are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the characters displayed in the first mode suggestion image XE1 and the second mode suggestion image XE5 may be different.

[Effect example]
In the above mode suggestion image display effects A to C, in the normal state, before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the ceiling, the blast time reduction mode (play time) is performed even though the normal mode is in the normal state. The first mode suggestion image XE1 suggesting is displayed, and then the display mode is changed from the normal mode to the explosive time saving mode by changing the normal state to the low probability time saving state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the ceiling. In this case, the second mode suggestion image XE5 suggesting the explosive time reduction mode is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for the explosive time reduction mode even before reaching the ceiling, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the first mode suggestion image XE1 is displayed in association with the remaining fluctuation number display XE2. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a higher expectation for the explosive time reduction mode even before reaching the ceiling, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased after a predetermined fluctuation after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the ceiling (prescribed number of 500 times). According to this configuration, the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased after the display mode enters the blast time reduction mode, so that the player can pay attention to the display effect of the blast time reduction mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, when the ceiling is reached (before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is erased), the mode explanation image XE6 which is an image showing the explanation of the explosive time reduction mode is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to convey the details of the explosive time reduction mode while giving the player the expectation of the explosive time reduction mode, so that the expectation of the explosive time reduction mode can be dramatically increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image display effects A to C, the right-handed display XE3 is displayed before the second mode suggestion image XE5 is displayed when the ceiling is reached. According to this configuration, it is possible to urge the player to launch the game ball when entering the explosive time reduction mode, and it is possible to suppress the player from suffering a disadvantage. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The gaming machine is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the game is performed in the first gaming state. In the state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, the game is changed to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the display mode in the display means shifts to a specific mode.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
In the first display effect, even though the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number of times, it is the first gaming state. , Is an effect of displaying a first mode suggestion image suggesting the specific mode in the second gaming state.
In the second display effect, the gaming state is changed from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times, and the display mode is the specific. It is an effect of displaying a second mode suggestion image suggesting the specific mode when shifting to the mode.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-1.
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the remaining number of times up to the predetermined number of times is displayed in association with the first mode suggestion image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-2.
In the second display effect of the combination effect, the second mode suggestion image is deleted after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a specific number of times and then becomes a specific number of times.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which a mode explanation display representing the explanation of the specific mode is performed.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the third display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image is erased.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which a direction suggestion display suggesting the launch direction of the game ball is performed.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed before the second mode suggestion image in the second display effect is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). At that time, that is, when the ceiling is reached), the play time (low probability time reduction state) is entered. This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the present embodiment, the display mode in the normal state is also referred to as the normal mode, and the display mode in the low accuracy time reduction (play time) is also referred to as the "explosion time reduction mode". Hereinafter, in the low probability state (normal state), "when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500 times (when the ceiling counter becomes 0)" is also simply referred to as "when the ceiling is reached".

Further, in the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, when the V flag is OFF (step 2301: NO) in the game state setting process of FIG. 32 (that is, when shifting to the low probability time saving game state). Is set to 100 in the time reduction counter (step S2303) (that is, the low probability time reduction game state is performed after the big hit until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the low accuracy after the big hit is low. When shifting to the probable time saving game state, the low probable time saving state may be continued until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 499 times. Further, in the game state setting process of FIG. 32, when the V flag is ON (step 2301: YES) (that is, when shifting to the high accuracy time saving game state), 100 is set to the time saving count (step S2308). After the big hit, the high accuracy time saving state is performed until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times. In this case, after the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol further becomes 499 times. In some cases, the low accuracy time saving state may be continued until it becomes.
In the following mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C, in this way, when the low probability time saving state continues until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 499 times after the big hit, or after the high probability time saving state, the fluctuation of the special symbol This is an effect that can occur when the low probability time saving state continues until the number of times reaches 499 times.
In addition, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 499 times after the big hit, it shifts to the low probability time saving game state, or after the big hit, it shifts to the high probability time saving state, and then it shifts to the low probability time saving game state and it is special. When the number of fluctuations of the symbol is 499 times, it is called "when the fluctuation occurs before reaching the ceiling".
In addition, if there is no big hit after reaching the ceiling and entering the time-saving game state (play time), the time-saving game state continues until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 rotations, and then the normal game state is entered. In this case, the ceiling counter will not be reset again until the next big hit. That is, after reaching the ceiling, after the number of rotations of the special symbol reaches 700 rotations, the game will not be in a time-saving game state without a big hit.

The mode suggestion image continuation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. This mode suggestion image continuous effect is executed during the game state of the normal state (low probability state) or the time saving state (low probability low base state) of the decorative symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the mode suggestion image continuation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Mode suggestion image continuation production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image continuous effect A. In this mode suggestion image continuous effect A, in the low probability state (normal state), the number variation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling variation, the pre-ceiling variation, and the variation at the time of reaching the ceiling are each. Represents a display effect. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuous effect A, the ceiling-front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the variation before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling-front effect B is the special symbol. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. The pre-ceiling variation effects A to B are display effects when the pre-ceiling variation occurs, and the ceiling arrival effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), that is, blasting. This is a display effect when the time saving mode (play time) is entered. In this mode suggestion image continuous effect A, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In this mode suggestion image continuous effect A, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 84 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and from the bottom to the lower right of the substantially center. The explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 are displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is an image suggesting that the gaming state is a low probability time reduction state, that is, an image suggesting the explosion time reduction mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. Explosion time saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the characters "runaway time saving mode" and various effects. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, in other words, until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. Represents the number of remaining times. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times". The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode is displayed from the bottom to the lower right of the display screen 7a. The suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XF2 are continuously displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode is displayed from the bottom to the lower right of the display screen 7a. The suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XF2 are continuously displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining fluctuation until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining one number of times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image enlarged substantially in the center. XF1 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and are displayed from the substantially center to the lower right. The explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 are displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is based on the pre-ceiling variation, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 remaining until the pre-ceiling variation, so the remaining variation number display XF2 is "0 remaining". It is expressed as. That is, in this pre-ceiling variation effect B, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, suggesting the explosive time reduction mode from the bottom to the lower right of the display screen 7a. The image XF1 is displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed.
After that, if there is no big hit, the explosive time saving mode is continued, and the effect such as the ceiling reaching effect is continued in the low accuracy time saving state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 after reaching the ceiling, the game state is changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, the blasting time saving mode ends, and the display of the blasting time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. ..

[Mode suggestion image continuation production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image continuous effect B. In this mode suggestion image continuous effect B, in the low probability state (normal state), the number variation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling variation, the pre-ceiling variation, and the variation at the time of reaching the ceiling are each. Represents a display effect. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuous effect B, the ceiling-front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the variation before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling-front effect B is the special symbol. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. The pre-ceiling variation effects A to B are display effects when the pre-ceiling variation occurs, and the ceiling arrival effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), that is, blasting. This is a display effect when the time saving mode (play time) is entered. In this mode suggestion image continuous effect B, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In this mode suggestion image continuous effect B, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 85 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image is displayed on the lower side. XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XF2 are displayed, and right-handed display XF4 is displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is an image suggesting that the gaming state is a low probability time reduction state, that is, an image suggesting the explosion time reduction mode, and has a trapezoidal shape. Explosion time saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the characters "runaway time saving mode" and various effects. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, in other words, until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. Represents the number of remaining times. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times". Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation number display XF2 move from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move to the left direction again. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from the substantially center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the rest remain on the lower side. The fluctuation number display XF2 is continuously displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times". Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation number display XF2 move from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move to the left direction again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the rest remain on the lower side. The fluctuation number display XF2 is continuously displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining fluctuation until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining one number of times". Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation number display XF2 move from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move to the left direction again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image enlarged substantially in the center. XF1 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, and the explosive time reduction mode is suggested on the lower side. The image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuation display XF2 are displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is based on the pre-ceiling variation, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 remaining until the pre-ceiling variation, so the remaining variation number display XF2 is "0 remaining". It is expressed as. That is, in this pre-ceiling variation effect B, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state. Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation number display XF2 move from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move to the left direction again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed from substantially the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed on the lower side. , Right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and moves to the left direction again.
After that, if there is no big hit, the explosive time saving mode is continued, and the effect such as the ceiling reaching effect is continued in the low accuracy time saving state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 after reaching the ceiling, the game state is changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, the blasting time saving mode ends, and the display of the blasting time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. ..

[Mode suggestion image continuation production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the mode suggestion image continuous effect C. In this mode suggestion image continuation effect C, in the low probability state (normal state), the number variation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling variation, the pre-ceiling variation, and the variation at the time of reaching the ceiling are respectively. Represents a display effect. Specifically, in the mode suggestion image continuous effect C, the ceiling front effect A is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the variation before reaching the ceiling, and the ceiling front effect B is the special symbol. Is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 2 fluctuations remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, and the pre-ceiling effect C is a display effect when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 1 variation remaining until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. The pre-ceiling variation effects A to B are display effects when the pre-ceiling variation occurs, and the ceiling arrival effect is when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 0 fluctuations remaining until the ceiling is reached (ceiling arrival), that is, blasting. This is a display effect when the time saving mode (play time) is entered. In this mode suggestion image continuous effect C, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In this mode suggestion image continuous effect C, in the ceiling front effect A shown in FIG. 86 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the rest remain on the lower side. The number of fluctuation display XF2 is displayed, and the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 7 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the blast time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is an image suggesting that the gaming state is a low probability time saving state, that is, an image suggesting a blasting time saving mode, and has a band shape from the lower right to the lower left of the display screen 7a. Is formed in. Explosion time saving mode suggestion image XF1 includes the characters "runaway time saving mode" and various effects. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, and the remaining number of times until the gaming state shifts from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state, in other words, until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling. Represents the number of remaining times. In the ceiling front effect A, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 3 times". Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the character indicating "runaway time reduction mode" moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and then moves to the left direction again. Moving. The right-handed display XF4 is a display that suggests the launching direction of the game ball to the player, and specifically, is a display that suggests the player to hit the right-handed ball.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), in the ceiling front effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed on the lower side. XF2 and XF2 are continuously displayed, and right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 8 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 4 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect B, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 2 fluctuations until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining 2 times". Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the character indicating "runaway time reduction mode" moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and then moves to the left direction again. Moving. Further, in this explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1, the band portion does not move, but the effect may move together with the characters. Further, in the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, in addition to characters and effects, non-moving objects such as non-moving characters and non-moving characters may be included. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the band may move and the characters may be stationary.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), in the ceiling front effect C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of fluctuations are displayed at the lower side. XF2 and XF2 are continuously displayed, and right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 5 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the ceiling front effect C, since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is one remaining fluctuation until the fluctuation before reaching the ceiling, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is expressed as "remaining one number of times". Further, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the fluctuation number display XF2 move from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when they reach the left end, they appear again from the right end and move to the left direction again. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the character indicating "runaway time reduction mode" moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and then moves to the left direction again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), in the pre-ceiling variation effect A, the right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed in the upper right corner on the display screen 7a, and the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image enlarged substantially in the center. XF1 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), in the pre-ceiling variation effect B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the lower left, and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 and the remaining number of variations are displayed at the lower left. XF2 is displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 4 symbols stopped and displayed, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 8 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is displayed in association with the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1. In the pre-ceiling fluctuation effect B, the effect is based on the pre-ceiling variation, that is, the number of variations of the special symbol is 0 remaining until the pre-ceiling variation, so the remaining variation number display XF2 is "0 remaining". It is expressed as. That is, in this pre-ceiling variation effect B, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed even though the game state has been changed from the low probability time reduction state to the normal state. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the character representing "runaway time reduction mode" moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and then moves to the left direction again. Moving.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), in the ceiling reaching effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a, the explosion time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the lower side, and the explosion time saving mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed at the upper right. The right-handed display XF4 is continuously displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are out-of-order symbols. Specifically, the decorative symbol 8L has 9 symbols stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol 8C has 5 symbols stopped, and the decorative symbol 8R has a stop display. 7 symbols are stopped and displayed. Further, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed on the front side of the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 (characters, effects, etc.). In other words, the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed behind the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Further, in the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the character representing "runaway time reduction mode" moves from the right direction to the left direction on the display screen 7a, and when it reaches the left end, it appears again from the right end and then moves to the left direction again. Moving.
After that, if there is no big hit, the explosive time saving mode is continued, and the effect such as the ceiling reaching effect is continued in the low accuracy time saving state. When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 700 after reaching the ceiling, the game state is changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state, the blasting time saving mode ends, and the display of the blasting time saving mode suggestion image XF1 also ends. ..

[Modification example]
In the mode suggestion image continuous effect C, in the blast time reduction mode suggestion image XF1, the characters and effects included in the blast time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 move in a predetermined direction, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the blast time reduction mode suggestion. The internal characters and effects may be moved while the image XF1 is moving.

In the above mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation effect were the same, but the explosion time reduction mode in the ceiling front effect. The suggestion image XF1 and the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation effect may have different shapes, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may have different images. May include. Further, although the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival effect were the same, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosion time reduction in the ceiling arrival effect The mode suggestion image XF1 may have a different shape, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain different images. Further, although the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation effect and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival effect were the same, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival effect and the ceiling arrival effect The explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 in the above may have a different shape, may contain different characters, may contain different effects, or may contain different images.
In the mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, the right-handed display XF4 is displayed in the effects A and B before reaching the ceiling, although the game is in the normal gaming state. In the pre-ceiling effects A and B, which are in the gaming state, the right-handed display XF4 may not be performed.

[Effect example]
In the above mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, in the pre-ceiling effect of the number variation before the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the pre-ceiling variation in the low probability state (normal state), the explosive time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is displayed. After that, in the pre-ceiling variation effect when the number of changes of the special symbol reached 499 times in front of the ceiling (corresponding to the second specified number), the game state was changed from the low probability time saving state to the normal state. Despite this, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 indicating the low probability time reduction state is displayed, and then, when the ceiling is reached, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 is continuously displayed in the ceiling arrival effect. According to this configuration, it returns to the normal state from the low probability time saving state before reaching the ceiling, and immediately returns to the low probability time saving state by reaching the ceiling, and once it returns to the normal state, it returns to the normal state. Since the blast time saving mode that is advantageous to the player is notified without notifying that, the player's mood depression due to returning to the normal state can be suppressed, and the player feels comfortable with the blasting time saving mode. You can enjoy it. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the pre-ceiling variation effect have the same configuration. According to this configuration, the low probability time saving state is temporarily returned to the normal state before reaching the ceiling, and immediately returns to the low probability time saving state by reaching the ceiling. Once the normal state is returned, the normal state is restored. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to this, and the player can enjoy the explosive time reduction mode comfortably. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling front effect and the explosion time reduction mode suggestion image XF1 in the ceiling arrival effect have the same configuration. According to this configuration, the low probability time saving state is temporarily returned to the normal state before reaching the ceiling, and immediately returns to the low probability time saving state by reaching the ceiling. Once the normal state is returned, the normal state is restored. It is possible to suppress the depression of the player's mood due to this, and the player can enjoy the explosive time reduction mode comfortably. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuous effect C, the explosive time saving mode suggestion image XF1 has a configuration in which internal characters and effects move. According to this configuration, the blast time saving mode suggestion image XF1 can be emphasized to the player, and the player can enjoy the blasting time saving mode comfortably. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the mode suggestion image continuous effects A to C, the remaining fluctuation number display XF2 is performed in the ceiling front effects A to C. According to this configuration, it is possible to display a countdown from the low probability time saving state to the time when it returns to the normal state, and it is possible to give a sense of urgency to the player until it returns to the normal state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
One of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state relatively advantageous to the player, provided with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects. A gaming machine in which a game is played in a gaming state, and when the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number, the gaming machine is changed to the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the second specified number of times, which is less than the first specified number of times, the gaming state becomes the second specified number of times. The gaming state of the above may be changed to the first gaming state.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an advantageous mode suggestion image suggesting that the display means is a mode advantageous to the player in the second gaming state.
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the second. It is an effect of displaying the advantageous mode suggestion image even though the game state has been changed to the first game state after reaching the specified number of times of 2.
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, and the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed. It is a production,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-1.
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the second display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-2.
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the third display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-3.
The advantageous mode suggestion image includes a moving image.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-4.
In the first display effect, the remaining number of fluctuations indicating the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

Hereinafter, a plurality of section display effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. This multi-section display effect is executed during a variation effect of a decorative symbol in a normal state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a probability variation state (high probability high base state). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the multi-segment display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Multi-section display effect A]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of section display effect A. The multi-section display effect A in FIG. 87 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the multi-section display effect A, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with two symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. Region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in the compartment G22. In other words, in this screen division effect, the division area G is formed so that the button image XG is located in the division G22. Each section of the divided region G is formed in a matrix shape (lattice shape, grid shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), a section image display effect is performed. In the division image display effect, in the division area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, and then the first character group CRA is displayed. , The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each section clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing how a friendly character and an enemy character fight. The second character group CRB is an image representing a smiling face character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (E), the section image erasing effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G is erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 87 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. In addition, instead of the blackout, another image, for example, a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the image display effect of the entire section is performed. In this section-wide image display effect, a character image CRC different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the entire division area G (each section). This character image CRC represents a character of a fighting warrior.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the division area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined value is displayed. Expand the action of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (I), the super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the action of confronting them is developed.
After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the missed symbol or the jackpot symbol, and the missed or jackpot is notified.

[Multi-section display effect B]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of section display effect B. The multi-section display effect B in FIG. 88 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the multi-section display effect B, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88B, a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with two symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (C), the screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. Region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in the compartment G22. In other words, in this screen division effect, the division area G is formed so that the button image XG is located in the division G22. Each section of the divided region G is formed in a matrix shape (lattice shape, grid shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), a section image display effect is performed. In the division image display effect, in the division area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, and then the first character group CRA is displayed. , The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each section clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing how a friendly character and an enemy character fight. The second character group CRB is an image representing a smiling face character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Further, in the divided region G, the frame portion of each section has an effect style of a predetermined color, and the color of the effect portion of the frame portion differs depending on the image displayed in each section. Specifically, in the sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 on which the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the compartments G12 and G11, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is blue, and in the compartment G22 on which the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the section image erasing effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G is erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 88 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. In addition, instead of the blackout, another image, for example, a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the image display effect of the entire section is performed. In this section-wide image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display effect are displayed in the entire division area G (each section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the division area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined value is displayed. Expand the action of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (I), the super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the action of confronting them is developed. The character image CRC represents a character of a fighting warrior.
After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the missed symbol or the jackpot symbol, and the missed or jackpot is notified.

[Multiple section display effect C]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the plurality of section display effect C. The multi-section display effect C in FIG. 89 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the multi-section display effect C, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), a button display effect is performed. In this button display effect, the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, and the button image XG is displayed on the changing decorative symbol 8C. This button image XG is an image for prompting the player to operate the effect button 63, and "PUSH" is displayed in the image. The decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with two symbols, and the decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with three symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (C), the screen division effect is performed. In this screen division effect, the button image XG is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the predetermined area is divided into nine sections G11, G12, G13, G21, G22, G23, G31, G32, and G33. Region G is formed. The button image XG is displayed in the compartment G22. In other words, in this screen division effect, the division area G is formed so that the button image XG is located in the division G22. Each section of the divided region G is a quadrangle and is formed in a substantially matrix shape (lattice shape, grid shape). The shape and size of each section of the divided area G are different.
Further, the adjacent sections of the divided areas G are basically separated by a predetermined distance. However, the adjacent sections of the divided regions G may have a contact portion. In the following section image display effect, section image erasure effect, and section whole image display effect, the distance between adjacent sections is the same as the distance at the time of the screen division effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), a section image display effect is performed. In the division image display effect, in the division area G, the second character group CRB is displayed in the division G11, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G21, and then the first character group CRA is displayed in the division G31. The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G32, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G33, then the first character group CRA is displayed in the section G23, and then the first character group CRA is displayed. , The first character group CRA is displayed in the section G13, and then the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G12. That is, in the section image display effect, after the second character group CRB is displayed in the section G11 in the divided area G, the first character group CRA or the second character group is displayed in each section clockwise starting from the button image XG. CRBs are displayed in order. The first character group CRA is an image showing how a friendly character and an enemy character fight. The second character group CRB is an image representing a smiling face character and an emblem composed of a circle and a triangle.

Further, in the divided region G, the frame portion of each section has an effect style of a predetermined color, and the color of the effect portion of the frame portion differs depending on the image displayed in each section. Specifically, in the sections G21, G31, G32, G33, G23, and G13 on which the first character group CRA is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is red, and the second character group CRB is displayed. In the compartments G12 and G11, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is blue, and in the compartment G22 on which the button image XG is displayed, the color of the effect portion of the frame portion is green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the section image erasing effect is performed. In this section image erasing effect, the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, or the button image XG displayed in each section of the divided area G is erased all at once and blacked out. In the example of FIG. 89 (E), the blackout state is represented by hatching. In addition, instead of the blackout, another image, for example, a sandstorm image may be displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the image display effect of the entire section is performed. In this section-wide image display effect, the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in each section in the section image display effect are displayed in the entire division area G (each section).

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, the reach state is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C fluctuate at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first character group CRA displayed in a plurality of sections of the division area G of the section image display effect is displayed, and a predetermined value is displayed. Expand the action of.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (I), the super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the character image CRC and the second character group CRB are displayed while the reach state is continued by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the action of confronting them is developed.
After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R display the missed symbol or the jackpot symbol, and the missed or jackpot is notified.

[Modification example]
In the multiple section display effects B and C, in the section-wide image effect, the first character group CRA having a large number of displayed sections is divided into the divided areas among the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB in the section image display effect. It was designed to be displayed on the entire G, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second character group CRB having a smaller number of displayed sections among the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the section image display effect. It may be displayed.
In the above-mentioned multi-section display effects A to C, the button images XG use the same shape and size in the button display effect, the screen division effect, and the section image display effect, but the button image XG is not limited to this. In the display effect, the screen division effect, and the section image display effect, different shapes and / or different sizes may be used.

[Effect example]
In the multiple section display effects A to C, the divided areas G that divide the predetermined area of the display screen 7a are displayed in the screen divided effect, and in the divided image display effect, 6 of the 9 sections of the divided area G The first character group CRA is displayed, the second character group CRB is displayed in two of the nine sections of the divided area G, and then the effect button 63 is pressed by the player in the section image erasing effect. As a result, the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections disappear. According to this configuration, different image groups displayed in a plurality of sections disappear, so that the player can be provided with a momentary spectacular view, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the multiple section display effects A to C, in the screen division effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in 6 of the 9 sections of the divided area G, and 2 of the 9 sections of the divided area G are displayed. When the second character group CRB is displayed in, the button image XG representing the effect button 63 is displayed. According to this configuration, the button image XG is displayed mixed with the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB displayed in a plurality of sections, so that the player can be provided with a spectacular and mysterious feeling. It can improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned multi-section display effect A, in the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in 6 of the 9 sections of the divided area G, and in 2 of the 9 sections of the divided area G. The second character group CRB is displayed, and then, in the section image erasing effect, when the effect button 63 is pressed by the player, the first character group CRA displayed in the six sections and the first character group CRA are displayed in the two sections. The second character group CRB disappears, and then, in the entire section image production, a part of an image (character image CRC) different from the first character group CRA and the second character group CRB is displayed in the divided area G. .. According to this configuration, a mysterious feeling can be created for displaying the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG in the divided area G, and the interest of the section image display effect can be created. Can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned multi-section display effect A, in the section image display effect, the first character group CRA is displayed in 6 of the 9 sections of the divided area G, and in 2 of the 9 sections of the divided area G. The second character group CRB is displayed, the button image XG is displayed in one section of the divided area G, and then, in the section image erasing effect, the effect button 63 is pressed by the player to display the button image XG in six sections. The first character group CRA, the second character group CRB displayed in the two sections, and the button image XG disappear, and then, in the whole section image production, the first character group CRA and the first character group CRA are set in the divided area G. An image (character image CRC) different from the two character group CRB and the button image XG is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to create a more mysterious feeling when the first character group CRA, the second character group CRB, and the button image XG are displayed in the divided area G, and it is possible to create a more mysterious feeling. Can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the plurality of section display effects A to C, the divided area G is formed so that the button image XG is included in one section in the screen split effect while the button image XG is displayed in the button display effect. According to this configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the divided region G is formed around the button image XG, and the player can expect the effect using the effect button 63 corresponding to the button image XG. Can be granted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means that can be operated by a player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
In the first display effect, the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, and the first image is displayed in each of the first number of sections among the plurality of sections, and the plurality of sections are displayed. It is an effect that a second image is displayed in each of the second number of sections of the section.
The second display effect includes the first image displayed in the first number of compartments and the second image displayed in the second number of compartments by the operation of the operating means by the player. It is a production that disappears from the image of
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[XG-2]
The gaming machine described in XG-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect in which an operation means image representing the operation means is displayed in a predetermined section of the plurality of sections of the display means.
The combination effect includes the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[XG-3]
The gaming machine described in XG-2.
In the second display effect in the combination effect, the first image and the second image disappear, and an image different from the first image and the second image is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[XG-4]
The gaming machine described in XG-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
In the fourth display effect, in the plurality of sections of the display means, the section in which the first image is displayed, the section in which the second image is displayed, and the operation means image are displayed. It is a production in which a predetermined image is expressed using a section.
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[XG-5]
The gaming machine described in XG-4.
In the case where the first display effect and the third display effect of the combination effect are performed, if the display area of the display means is divided into a plurality of sections and displayed, the operation means image is displayed. Performed in the displayed state,
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The function-specific timer display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. This function-based timer display effect is executed while the game state is in a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), such as during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the function-specific timer display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Timer display effect by function A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the timer display effect A for each function. The function-specific timer display effect A of FIG. 90 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the function-specific timer display effect A, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90B, the first timer display effect A is performed. In the first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below the first timer display XH1. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double square frame, and the timer value can display the number of seconds in two digits, and is the second decimal place. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the example of the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. In the first timer display XH1, 0 second (00:00) is the target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90C, the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds, which is the arrival target timer value. Is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the movable accessory operation effect is performed. In this movable accessory operation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated to move from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, on the display screen 7a, the region where the first movable accessory 14 passes and becomes dark is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the jackpot symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 6 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 7 symbols described later. It is a jackpot design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XH2 is displayed at the same position on the display screen 7a as the position where the above-mentioned first timer display XH1 was displayed. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a single square frame, which is different from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds after the decimal point is omitted. In the example of the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 second is the arrival target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 starts. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the jackpot symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 7 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the probability change state (high accuracy time saving state), and it is a jackpot symbol that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 6 symbols described above. is there.
After that, a big hit game is performed, and after the big hit game, it shifts to a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

[Timer display effect B by function]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the timer display effect B for each function. The function-specific timer display effect B in FIG. 91 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the function-specific timer display effect B, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the first timer display effect A is performed. In the first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below the first timer display XH1. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double square frame, and the timer value can display the number of seconds in two digits, and is the second decimal place. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the example of the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. In the first timer display XH1, 0 second (00:00) is the target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and the timer value of the first timer display XH1 is 0 seconds, which is the arrival target timer value. Is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the movable accessory operation effect is performed. In this movable accessory operation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated to move from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, on the display screen 7a, the region where the first movable accessory 14 passes and becomes dark is indicated by hatching.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the jackpot symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 6 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 7 symbols described later. It is a jackpot design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XH2 is displayed at a position different from the position where the first timer display XH1 described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, which is different from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds after the decimal point is omitted. In the example of the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 second is the arrival target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 starts. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the jackpot symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 7 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the probability change state (high accuracy time saving state), and it is a jackpot symbol that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 6 symbols described above. is there.
After that, a big hit game is performed, and after the big hit game, it shifts to a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

[Timer display effect C by function]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the timer display effect C for each function. The function-specific timer display effect C in FIG. 92 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the function-specific timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92B, the first timer display effect A is performed. In the first timer display effect A, the first timer display XH1 is displayed on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed below the first timer display XH1. The first timer display XH1 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a double square frame, and the timer value can display the number of seconds in two digits, and is the second decimal place. It is possible to display the number of seconds until. In the example of the figure, the first timer display XH1 is set to a value exactly 10 seconds as the initial timer value. In the first timer display XH1, 0 second (00:00) is the target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92C, the first timer display effect B is performed. In this first timer display effect B, the first timer display XH1 and the ally character CRA are continuously displayed at the same position, and before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 becomes 0 seconds, which is the arrival target timer value. It is a production that takes 5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the movable accessory operation effect is performed. In this movable accessory operation effect, the first movable accessory 14 is activated to move from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a to the deployed position. That is, this movable accessory operation effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 is activated before the timer value of the first timer display XH1 reaches the arrival target timer value of 0 seconds. At this time, on the display screen 7a, the area through which the first movable accessory 14 has passed is displayed darkly, emphasizing that the first movable accessory 14 has been activated. In the example of the figure, on the display screen 7a, the region where the first movable accessory 14 passes and becomes dark is indicated by hatching. Further, in the figure, in the first timer display XH1, the timer value is 04:50 before the arrival target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the jackpot symbol effect A is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect A, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 6 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 6 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 6 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state), and is less valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 7 symbols described later. It is a jackpot design.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XH2 is displayed at a position different from the position where the first timer display XH1 described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. The second timer display XH2 is a countdown type timer, and the timer value is displayed in a hexagonal frame, which is different from the first timer display XH1. Further, in the second timer display XH2, the timer value can display a two-digit number of seconds, but the number of seconds after the decimal point is omitted. In the example of the figure, the second timer display XH2 is set to a value of 5 seconds as the initial timer value. In the second timer display XH2, 0 second is the arrival target timer value.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), a button image display effect is performed. In this button image display effect, the button image XH3 is displayed below the second timer display XH2 on the display screen 7a. The button image XH3 is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63, and is displayed in association with the second timer display XH2. The button image XH3 is displayed a little after the countdown of the second timer display XH2 starts. In the figure, the button image XH3 is displayed when the timer value of the second timer display XH2 is 3 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), the jackpot symbol effect B is performed. In this jackpot symbol effect B, a jackpot symbol is formed using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. At this time, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of 7 symbols, that is, the jackpot symbols are formed by doublets of the 7 symbols. The jackpot symbol with these 7 symbols suggests that the game state after the jackpot shifts to the probability change state (high accuracy time saving state), and it is a jackpot symbol that is more valuable to the player than the jackpot symbol with the 6 symbols described above. is there.
After that, a big hit game is performed, and after the big hit game, it shifts to a probabilistic state (high probability high base state).

[Modification example]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the timer display effects A to C for each function are performed in the same fluctuation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timer display effects A to C for each function are performed over a plurality of fluctuations. You may do it.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, in the same fluctuation, the first movable accessory 14 operates based on the first timer display effect, a jackpot symbol effect is performed, and then the second timer display effect is performed. The jackpot symbol effect is performed based on the jackpot symbol effect, but not limited to this, the jackpot symbol effect is performed based on the second timer display effect, and then the first movable accessory 14 is performed based on the first timer display effect. May be activated to produce a jackpot symbol.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are countdown type timers, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one of the two timers or one of the two timers is used. Both may be count-up timers.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XH1 and the second timer display XH2 are configured not to appear at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first timer display XH1 and the second timer are not limited to this. The display XH2 may appear at the same timing.
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, the button image XH3 is displayed after the second timer display XH2 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button image XH3 is displayed before the second timer display XH2 is displayed or. It may be displayed at the timing when the second timer display XH2 is displayed.
In the above function-specific timer display effects A to C, when the second timer display XH2 appears and the button image XH3 is displayed, the jackpot symbol (decorative symbol), which is relatively more valuable to the player than in the jackpot symbol effect A, is displayed. The jackpot symbol of 7 symbols by 8L, 8C, 8R) was displayed, but if the button image XH3 does not appear even if the second timer display XH2 appears, the jackpot symbol does not upgrade and the jackpot The same jackpot symbol as in the symbol effect A may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, in the same fluctuation, the first movable accessory 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1, and then the jackpot symbol is displayed based on the second timer display XH2. Will be done. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same fluctuation, and their roles are different. One timer display activates the first movable accessory 14, and the other timer display displays a jackpot symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the mannerism of the timer production and improve the interest in the timer production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects A to C, the first movable accessory 14 operates (moves) based on the first timer display XH1 in the same fluctuation, and six symbols suggesting a jackpot with low comparative value for the player. The jackpot symbol is displayed, and then, based on the second timer display XH2, seven jackpot symbols suggesting a jackpot that is relatively valuable to the player are displayed. According to this configuration, two different timer displays are performed with the same fluctuation, and their roles are different. One timer display activates the first movable accessory 14 and suggests a jackpot with low comparative value for the player. The jackpot symbol of 6 symbols is displayed, and the other timer display displays the jackpot symbol of 7 symbols suggesting a jackpot that is relatively valuable to the player, so that the player enjoys each timer display. It is possible to suppress the mannerism of the timer production and improve the interest in the timer production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the timer display effect C for each function, in the first timer display effect, the initial timer value of the first timer display XH1 is set and counted down, and the first movable is performed before the timer value reaches the target 0 seconds. The accessory 14 is configured to operate. According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and the interest of the timer production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned function-specific timer display effects B and C, the display position of the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the display position of the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect are different. There is. According to this configuration, since the display position of the first timer display XH1 and the display position of the second timer display XH2 are different, the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the two timer displays separately, suppress the mannerism of the timer effect, and improve the interest in the timer effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the function-specific timer display effects B and C, the first timer display XH1 in the first timer display effect and the second timer display XH2 in the second timer display effect have different sizes. According to this configuration, the size of the first timer display XH1 and the size of the second timer display XH2 are different, so that the difference between the two timer displays can be clearly shown to the player. Therefore, the player can enjoy the two timer displays separately, suppress the mannerism of the timer effect, and improve the interest in the timer effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XH-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and a movable member.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect in which the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first aspect.
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the first jackpot symbol based on the timer display of the second aspect, which is different from the timer display of the first aspect.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-1.
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the movable member operates based on the timer display of the first aspect, and a second jackpot symbol different from the first jackpot symbol is displayed.
The first jackpot symbol is a jackpot symbol that is more valuable to the player than the second jackpot symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-2.
In the first display effect of the combination effect, the initial timer value of the timer display of the first aspect is set and counted, and the timer value of the timer display of the first aspect becomes the target value. Movable members work,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-3.
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first aspect in the first display effect and the timer display of the second aspect in the second display effect have different display positions in the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XH-4.
In the combination effect, the timer display of the first aspect in the first display effect and the timer display of the second aspect in the second display effect are different in size.
A game machine characterized by that.

The specific image transition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. This specific image transition effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image transition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Specific image transition effect A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the specific image transition effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is a start effect of a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93 (D) to 93 (F), the image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, four images G1, G2, G3, and G4 called "FIGHT" are displayed on the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 is displayed at the left part of the display screen 7a, the image G3 is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a, and the image G4 is displayed at the right part of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in.

In FIG. 93 (D), the brightness of the image G1 which is one of the four images "FIGHT" is set higher than that of the other images G2 to G4. As a result, the image G1 looks brighter than the other images G2 to G4.

In FIG. 93 (E), the brightness of the image G2, which is one of the four images "FIGHT", is set higher than that of the other images G1, G3, and G4. As a result, the image G2 looks brighter than the other images G1, G3, and G4.

In FIG. 93 (F), the brightness of the image G4, which is one of the four images "FIGHT", is set higher than that of the other images G1 to G3. As a result, the image G4 looks brighter than the other images G1 to G3.

In the image transition effect, an image having higher brightness than other images is created in the order of image G1 → image G2 → image G3 → image G4 → image G1 → .... As a result, in the image transition effect, the brightly displayed "FIGHT" image is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the winning / losing determination effect is executed. The winning / losing decision production is a production that notifies the result of the battle production. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle production. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet and are fixedly stopped. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the specific image transition effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is a start effect of a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 94 (D) to 94 (F), the image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 constituting the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed at the left part of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed at the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The image G4 of "T" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a, the image G5 of "L" is displayed at the lower right part of the display screen 7a, and the image G6 of "E" is displayed at the upper right part of the display screen 7a. Is displayed in.

In FIG. 94 (D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images constituting the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than that of the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the image G1 of "B" looks brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 94 (E), the brightness of the image G4 of "T", which is one of the six images constituting the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than that of the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6. doing. As a result, the image G4 of "T" looks brighter than the other images G1 to G3, G5, and G6.

In FIG. 94 (F), the brightness of the image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images constituting the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than that of the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the image G6 of "E" looks brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In the image transition effect, "B" image G1 → "A" image G2 → "T" image G3 → "T" image G4 → "L" image G5 → "E" image G6 → "B" In the order of image G1 → ..., an image having higher brightness than other images is created. As a result, in the image transition effect, each character constituting the character string of "BATTLE" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the winning / losing determination effect is executed. The winning / losing decision production is a production that notifies the result of the battle production. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle production. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet and are fixedly stopped. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Specific image transition effect C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the specific image transition effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the battle start effect is executed. The battle start effect is a start effect of a battle effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a state of facing each other. The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 95 (D) to 95 (F), the image transition effect is executed. In the image transition effect, six images G1, G2, G3, G4, G5, and G6 constituting the character string "BATTLE" are displayed on the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the image G1 of "B" is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the image G2 of "A" is displayed in the left part of the display screen 7a, and the image G3 of "T" is displayed in the lower left part of the display screen 7a. The "T" image G4 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a, the "L" image G5 is displayed at the bottom right of the display screen 7a, and the "E" image G6 is displayed at the top right of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the section.

Further, in the image transition effect, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position and stands still at the advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The characters "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 are configured to be able to emit light one by one independently. Further, the configuration may be such that the brightness can be adjusted as well as the light emission.

In FIG. 95 (D), the brightness of the image G1 of "B", which is one of the six images constituting the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than that of the other images G2 to G6. As a result, the image G1 of "B" looks brighter than the other images G2 to G6.

In FIG. 95 (E), the brightness of the image G6 of "E", which is one of the six images constituting the character string "BATTLE", is set higher than that of the other images G1 to G5. As a result, the image G6 of "E" looks brighter than the other images G1 to G5.

In FIG. 95 (F), the brightness of the character "O" ("O" at the right end), which is one of the four characters constituting the character string "OARO", is set higher than that of the other characters. ing. As a result, the letter "O" looks brighter than the other letters.

In the image transition effect, "B" image G1 → "A" image G2 → "T" image G3 → "T" image G4 → "L" image G5 → "E" image G6 → "O" Character → "R" character → "A" character → "O" character → "B" image G1 → ... Creates images and characters with higher brightness than other images. .. As a result, in the image transition effect, each character constituting the character strings of "BATTLE" and "OARO" is displayed so as to rotate counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a.

When the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, during the image transition effect, the left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the winning / losing determination effect is executed. The winning / losing decision production is a production that notifies the result of the battle production. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the ally character CRA has won the battle production. If the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle effect, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet and are fixedly stopped. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image transition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of images are displayed on the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and a specific image among the plurality of images is distinguished from the remaining images by changing the brightness of the images. The process of enabling is repeated to transition a specific image among a plurality of images. Specifically, four images called "FIGHT" are displayed, and the character string "FIGHT" is changed by changing the brightness of the four images G1 to G4 (FIGS. 93 (D), (E), and (F)). ). Further, by changing the brightness of the six images G1 to G6 constituting the character string of "BATTLE", each character is changed (FIGS. 94 (D) (E) (F), 95 (D) (E)). (F)). According to this configuration, the display of the image on the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a becomes novel, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The images G1 to G4 of "FIGHT" and the images G1 to G6 constituting the character string of "BATTLE" correspond to "predetermined images". In addition, the brightness corresponds to the "color attribute". Further, the image transition effect of FIGS. 93 to 95 corresponds to the “transition effect”.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the image transition effect, a specific image among the plurality of images transitions counterclockwise toward the display screen 7a (FIGS. 93 (D) to (F), FIG. 94). (D) to (F), FIGS. 95 (D) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to add a rotation motion to the display of the image on the peripheral portion of the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes the second movable accessory 15, and the characters constituting the character string of "OARO" emit light in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to add movement to the display of the image in the peripheral portion including the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "light emitting unit" and the "accessory".

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the image transition effect is being executed, a battle effect between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is unfolded in the central portion of the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to add movement to the periphery of the battle effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The moving image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight corresponds to the "image related to the predetermined image", and the battle effect corresponds to the "image display effect".

[Modification example]
A modified example of the specific image transition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the brightness of the image is changed in the transition effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any color attribute which is an attribute of the display color of the predetermined image may be changed. The color attributes referred to here include brightness, lightness, saturation, hue, and the like.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the specific image is transitioned counterclockwise in the transition effect, but it may be transitioned clockwise. In addition to clockwise and counterclockwise, the specific images may be transitioned in a predetermined order, or the specific images may be transitioned in a random order.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 is used to emit light of the characters constituting the character string of "OARO" in accordance with the transition of the specific image (FIG. 95 (F)). On the other hand, the "light emitting unit" may be realized as an image. For example, the characters "OARO" may be displayed as an image on the display screen 7a.

[Modification example 4]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 is adopted as the "light emitting unit", but there may be a plurality of "light emitting units". For example, four board lamps may be provided near the corner portion of the display screen 7a. ..

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B6-1]
A game machine with a display device
By displaying a plurality of predetermined images on the peripheral edge of the display screen of the display device and changing the color attribute which is the display color attribute of the plurality of predetermined images, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images remains. It is possible to execute a transition effect of transitioning the specific image by repeating the process of making it distinguishable from the image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1.
In the transition effect, the specific image among the plurality of predetermined images transitions clockwise or counterclockwise toward the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-1 or aspect B6-2.
It is arranged in the vicinity of the peripheral portion of the display screen and further includes a light emitting portion capable of emitting light.
The light emitting unit emits light in accordance with the transition of the specific image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3.
The light emitting unit is displayed as an image on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B6-3.
The light emitting unit is arranged as an accessory on the peripheral edge of the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B6-1 to B6-5.
In parallel with the transition effect, it is possible to execute an image display effect of displaying an image related to a predetermined image in a specific area of the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

Specific image absorption effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. This specific image absorption effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific image absorption effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main image is read. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Specific image absorption effect A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the specific image absorption effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 96A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 96 (C), (D), and (F), the image effect is executed. The image effect is performed in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the image effect is also executed in the enlarged image display effect of FIG. 96 (G) and the display color change effect of FIG. 96 (H). A character string of "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is described in the second movable accessory 15.

As shown in FIG. 96 (C), in the image production (initial stage), the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" among the plurality of characters constituting the character string of the second movable accessory "OARO". The images TG1, TG2, and TG3 corresponding to are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y3. The image corresponding to the rightmost "O" constituting the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

The moving speeds of the images TG1 to TG3 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 96C, the images TG1 to TG3 may move in a straight line or in a curved orbit so as to sway. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG3 may be moved while rotating. The rotation axis at this time may be any, but for example, it is conceivable that the axis is perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 96 (D), in the image production (mid-term), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image production (initial). .. The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. Further, the image TG2 of "A" moves as shown by the arrow Y2 and disappears in the vicinity of "A" of the second movable accessory 15 (indicated by a broken line in the figure). For example, the image TG2 of "A" is reduced so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, and at the same time, the transparency is increased and disappears. When the image TG2 of "A" disappears, the image TG4 of "A" is newly displayed. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y4. Further, the image TG3 of "R" is closer to "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than the image effect (initial). The image TG3 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y3.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the chance effect is executed. Chance production is a production that is executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "chance" is displayed. The chance effect is not limited to such an effect, and may be an effect using, for example, a sound that outputs a sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 96 (F), in the image production (late stage), the image TG5 of "O" is displayed toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y5. Move on. The image TG6 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y6. The image TG7 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y8. The images TG5 to TG8 move toward the corresponding character of the second movable accessory 15, and disappear in the vicinity of the character.

In the image production (late stage), the image TG8 corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, the image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed and moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" are displayed. It suggests that the expectation for hitting is higher when the production is performed with the images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" than when the production is performed with the corresponding images. It has become. That is, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning. Therefore, when the effect is performed with the image corresponding to "O" of "OARO", the effect may be performed with the image corresponding to "O" and "A" of "OARO".

Although the image effect is executed in parallel in the subsequent effects, the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the image effect (late stage).

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the characters that has been the target of the effect corresponding to the "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the image UG of "O" is displayed. Expectations for hits may differ depending on the character. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "O" is blue. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. And it suggests that the expectation for hitting is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the display color change effect is executed. The display color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the enlarged image displayed by the enlarged image display effect. Here, it is shown that the color of the image UG of "O" is changed to red. This is a production that suggests that the expectation for hitting is high.

[Specific image absorption effect B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the specific image absorption effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 97A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 97 (C), (D), and (F), the image effect is executed. The image effect is performed in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the image effect is also executed in the enlarged image display effect of FIG. 97 (G) and the battle effect of FIG. 97 (H). A character string of "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is described in the second movable accessory 15.

As shown in FIG. 97 (C), in the image production (initial stage), the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" among the plurality of characters constituting the character string of the second movable accessory "OARO". The images TG1, TG2, TG3, TG4, and TG5 corresponding to the above are displayed. Then, the image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. The image TG3 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y3. The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y5. The image corresponding to the rightmost "O" constituting the character string "OARO" is not displayed here.

The moving speeds of the images TG1 to TG5 may be the same or different. Further, as shown in FIG. 97C, the images TG1 to TG5 may move in a straight line or in a curved orbit so as to sway. Furthermore, the images TG1 to TG5 may be moved while rotating. The rotation axis at this time may be any, but for example, it is conceivable that the axis is perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

Here, the images TG1 and TG2 correspond to the leftmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15. Further, the images TG3 and TG4 correspond to "A" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15. In this way, the images corresponding to the characters constituting the character string of the second movable accessory 15 may be a plurality of images. For example, three or more images may be associated with each character.

As shown in FIG. 97 (D), in the image effect (mid-term), the image TG1 of "O" is closer to the leftmost "O" of the second movable accessory 15 than in the image effect (initial). .. The image TG1 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y1. The image TG2 of "O" is closer to "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 than the image effect (initial). The image TG2 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y2. Further, the image TG3 of "A" moves as shown by the arrow Y3 and disappears in the vicinity of "A" of the second movable accessory 15 (indicated by a broken line in the figure). For example, the image TG3 of "A" is reduced so as to be sucked into "A" of the second movable accessory 15, and at the same time, the transparency is increased and disappears. The image TG4 of "A" is closer to "A" of the second movable accessory 15 than the image effect (initial). The image TG4 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "A" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y4. The image TG5 of "R" is closer to "R" of the second movable accessory 15 than the image effect (initial). The image TG5 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to "R" of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the chance effect is executed. Chance production is a production that is executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "chance" is displayed. The chance effect is not limited to such an effect, and may be an effect using, for example, a sound that outputs a sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 97 (F), in the image production (late stage), the image TG6 of “O” is displayed on the display screen 7a toward “O” at the left end of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y6. Move on. The image TG7 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the left end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y7. The image TG8 of "A" moves on the display screen 7a toward "A" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y8. The image TG9 of "R" moves on the display screen 7a toward "R" of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y9. The image TG10 of "O" moves on the display screen 7a toward "O" at the right end of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y10. The images TG6 to TG10 move toward the corresponding character of the second movable accessory 15, and disappear in the vicinity of the character.

In the image production (late stage), the image TG10 corresponding to the rightmost "O" of the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, the image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed and moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the leftmost "O", "A", and "R" are displayed. It suggests that the expectation for hitting is higher when the production is performed with the images corresponding to "O", "A", "R", and "O" than when the production is performed with the corresponding images. It has become. That is, the corresponding character is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning. Therefore, when the effect is performed with the image corresponding to "O" of "OARO", the effect may be performed with the image corresponding to "O" and "A" of "OARO".

Although the image effect is executed in parallel in the subsequent effects, the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the image effect (late stage).

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect in which one of the characters that has been the target of the effect corresponding to the "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is enlarged and displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the image UG of "O" is displayed. Expectations for hits may differ depending on the character. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "O" is red. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. And it suggests that the expectation for hitting is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. After the image UG of "O" disappears, the battle effect is unfolded in the display area of the image UG of "O". In addition, the hit is confirmed by winning the battle production.

[Specific image absorption effect C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the specific image absorption effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 98 (C), (D), and (F), the image effect is executed. The image effect is performed in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is moved so as to overlap the upper part of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the image effect is also executed in the enlarged image display effect of FIG. 98 (G) and the display color change effect of FIG. 98 (H). A character string of "OARO" composed of a plurality of characters is described in the second movable accessory 15.

As shown in FIG. 98 (C), in the image production (initial stage), the image TG1 corresponding to "OA" is displayed among the plurality of characters constituting the character string of "OARO" of the second movable accessory. Then, the image TG1 of the “OA” moves on the display screen 7a toward the “OA” of the second movable accessory 15, as indicated by the arrow Y1. Further, here, the image of "OA" is larger than that of "OA" of the second movable accessory 15. As with the specific image absorption effect B, the number of "OA" images may be two or more.

As shown in FIG. 98 (C), the image TG1 may move in a straight line or in a curved orbit so as to sway. Furthermore, the image TG1 may move while rotating. The rotation axis at this time may be any, but for example, it is conceivable that the axis is perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 98 (D), in the image production (mid-term), the image TG1 of "OA" moves as shown by the arrow Y1 and disappears in the vicinity of "OA" of the second movable accessory 15. Shown by broken lines in the figure). For example, the image TG1 of the "OA" is reduced so as to be sucked into the "OA" of the second movable accessory 15, and at the same time, the transparency is increased and disappears. The image TG1 of "OA" is reduced and becomes smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the chance effect is executed. Chance production is a production that is executed based on the degree of expectation for winning. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the message image MSG "chance" is displayed. The chance effect is not limited to such an effect, and may be an effect using, for example, a sound that outputs a sound effect.

As shown in FIG. 98 (F), in the image production (late stage), the image TG2 of the “OA” is displayed on the display screen 7a toward the “OA” of the second movable accessory 15 as shown by the arrow Y2. Moving. The image TG3 of the “RO” moves on the display screen 7a toward the leftmost “RO” of the second movable accessory 15, as shown by the arrow Y3. The images TG2 and TG3 move toward the corresponding character string of the second movable accessory 15, and disappear in the vicinity of the character string.

In the image production (late stage), the image TG3 corresponding to the “RO” of the character string “OARO” of the second movable accessory 15 is newly displayed and moves on the display screen 7a. In the image production, the image corresponding to the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed, moves on the display screen 7a and disappears, but the production is performed with the image corresponding to "OA". Compared to the case, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for hitting is higher when the production is performed with the images corresponding to "OA" and "RO". That is, the corresponding character string is determined based on the degree of expectation for winning.

Although the image effect is executed in parallel in the subsequent effects, the description thereof will be omitted because it is the same as the image effect (late stage).

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the enlarged image display effect is executed. The enlarged image display effect is an effect of enlarging and displaying one of the character strings corresponding to the "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 at the lower center of the display screen 7a. .. Here, it is shown that the image UG of "OA" is displayed. The degree of expectation for winning may differ depending on the character string. It is assumed that the display color of the image UG of "OA" is blue. The display color here may be, for example, blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like. And it suggests that the expectation for hitting is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (H), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. After the image UG of "OA" disappears, the battle effect is unfolded in the display area of the image UG of "OA". In addition, the hit is confirmed by winning the battle production.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific image absorption effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character image similar to the characters displayed by the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the characters are moved on the display screen 7a so as to be closer to the characters of the second movable accessory 15. And disappear in the vicinity of the character of the second movable accessory 15 (FIGS. 96 (C) (D) (F), FIG. 97 (C) (D) (F), FIG. 98 (C) (D) (F). )). According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "display unit", the images TG1 to TG10 correspond to the "specific image", and the image effect corresponds to the "specific image effect".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 displays a plurality of characters "O", "A", "R", and "O", and in the image production, "O", "A", and "R". The production is performed for at least one of the letters "O" (FIGS. 96 (C) (D) (F), FIG. 97 (C) (D) (F), FIG. 98 (C) (D). ) (F)). According to this configuration, the production in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15 becomes wide, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters to be the target of the image production in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is determined based on the degree of expectation for hitting. According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for hitting by the production in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "hit" corresponds to "advantageous game advantageous to the player", and "advantageous game" includes a normal state (low accuracy low) such as a big hit, a small hit, a high accuracy high base state, and a low accuracy high base state. Includes a game state that is more advantageous than the base state).

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of characters to be image-directed in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is increased during the fluctuation of the effect symbol (FIG. 96 (F), FIG. 97 (F), FIG. 98 (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for hitting by the production in cooperation with the second movable accessory 15, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) to be image-directed in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. An enlarged image display effect to be displayed in the lower center is executed (FIGS. 96 (G), 97 (G), 98 (G)). According to this configuration, one of the characters that was the target of the production is enlarged and displayed, which can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

The image UG corresponds to the "corresponding image", and the enlarged image display effect corresponds to the "image display effect".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for the image production in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is hit. It is determined based on the degree of expectation for (FIG. 96 (H), FIG. 97 (G), FIG. 98 (G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for hitting by using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for the image production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for image production in the character string "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 is changed. Change in (Fig. 96 (H)). According to this configuration, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for hitting by using the image UG corresponding to one of the characters (character strings) targeted for the image production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. it can.

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the image UG, a battle effect is executed instead of the image UG (FIGS. 97 (G) (H), 98 (G) (H)). According to this configuration, the connection between the productions becomes smooth, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the specific image absorption effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the images of the characters "O", "A", "R", and "O" constituting the character string of "OARO" of the second movable accessory 15 or the images of the character strings "OA" and "RO" are used. I was doing image production. However, it does not have to be limited to such characters. That is, the "symbol displayed by the display unit" includes a figure with a meaning such as a mark or a picture.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 displayed the character string "OARO", but the accessory that displays "O", the accessory that displays "A", the accessory that displays "R", and so on. May be provided with a plurality of display units. For example, four display units may be provided near the corners of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the second movable accessory 15 is configured to be movable between the retracted position and the advanced position, but it may be configured to use a non-movable display unit.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B7-1]
A display device that can display images and
A gaming machine including a display unit that is arranged close to the peripheral edge of the display screen of the display device and displays symbols.
A specific image which is an image similar to the symbol displayed by the display unit is displayed on the display screen and moved on the display screen so as to be close to the symbol of the display unit, and the symbol of the display unit is displayed. It is possible to perform a specific image effect that disappears in the vicinity.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-1.
The display unit displays a plurality of symbols and
In the specific image effect, at least one of the plurality of symbols is targeted for the effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2.
In the specific image effect, the number of symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols is determined based on the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-2 or aspect B7-3.
In the specific image effect, the number of symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols can be increased during the fluctuation of the effect symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-1 to B7-4.
An image display effect is executed in which a corresponding image obtained by enlarging an image corresponding to one of the symbols targeted for the specific image effect among the plurality of symbols is displayed in a specific area of the display screen of the display device. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5.
In the image display effect, the display color of the corresponding image is determined based on the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B7-5 or aspect B7-6.
In the image display effect, the display color of the corresponding image can be changed while the effect symbol is changing.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B7-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B7-5 to B7-7.
In the image display effect, after displaying the corresponding image, a moving image can be displayed instead of the corresponding image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The character string decomposition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. This character string decomposition effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the character string decomposition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Character string decomposition effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 99A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99B, the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99C, the character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, the character string image MG "chance!" Is displayed, and the frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the border change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed according to the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 99 (E) and 99 (F), the constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" That compose the character string "chance!" Move in a predetermined direction, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 99 (E), in the constituent character effect (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. Further, the character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5.

As shown in FIG. 99 (F), in the constituent character effect (second half), in addition to the movement in the constituent character effect (first half), each character image K1 to K5 is further moved. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. Further, the character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" Has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

The moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved so as to draw a straight orbit, or may be moved so as to sway in a curved orbit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, the loss is confirmed when the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". At the same time as the final stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[Character string decomposition effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 100A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (C), the character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, the character string image MG "chance!" Is displayed, and the frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the border change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed according to the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 100 (E) and 100 (F), the constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" That compose the character string "chance!" Move in a predetermined direction while rotating.

As shown in FIG. 100 (E), in the constituent character effect (first half), the character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" Rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 100 (F), in the constituent character effect (second half), in addition to the movement in the constituent character effect (first half), the character images K1 to K5 are further moved. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" Rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" Has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

The moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved so as to draw a straight orbit, or may be moved so as to sway in a curved orbit. Furthermore, the rotation axes of the images K1 to K5 are not limited. For example, the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis, or the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis. Further, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, the loss is confirmed when the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped at "6". At the same time as the final stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[Character string decomposition effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the character string decomposition effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the character string display effect is executed. The character string display effect is an effect of displaying an image of a character string on the display screen 7a. Here, the character string image MG "chance!" Is displayed, and the frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed. It is assumed that the boundary of the frame image WG is white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (D), the border change effect is executed. The frame line change effect is an effect of enlarging the frame image WG displayed according to the character string image MG. Here, the frame image WG is enlarged to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the boundary of the frame image is thickened, and the display color of the boundary is red. The display color of the boundary of the frame image WG suggests the degree of expectation for hitting. For example, the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 101 (E) and 101 (F), the constituent character effect is executed. The constituent character effect is an effect in which the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" That compose the character string "chance!" Move in a predetermined direction while rotating.

As shown in FIG. 101 (E), in the constituent character effect (first half), the character image K1 of “chi” moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" Rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 101 (F), in the constituent character effect (second half), in addition to the movement in the constituent character effect (first half), the character images K1 to K5 are further moved. The character image K1 of "chi" moves diagonally downward to the left on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y1. The character image K1 of "chi" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K2 of "ya" moves substantially upward on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y2. The character image K2 of "ya" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K3 of "n" moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y3. The character image K3 of "n" rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K4 of "su" moves diagonally upward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y4. The character image K4 of "su" rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of “!” Moves diagonally downward to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y5. The character image K5 of "!" Rotates clockwise (clockwise) about the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a. The character image K5 of "!" Has reached the boundary of the frame image WG.

The moving speeds of the images K1 to K5 may be the same or different. Further, the images K1 to K5 may be moved so as to draw a straight orbit, or may be moved so as to sway in a curved orbit. Furthermore, the rotation axes of the images K1 to K5 are not limited. For example, the horizontal direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis, or the vertical direction parallel to the display screen 7a may be the rotation axis. Further, a rotation axis having a predetermined angle may be set.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which a friendly character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight each other. Winning is confirmed when the ally character CRA wins in the battle production. On the other hand, the loss is confirmed when the ally character CRA is defeated in the battle production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in a hit manner. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R all stop at "5". At the same time as the final stop effect, the variable icon 9C is hidden.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a character string display effect of displaying the character string "chance!" On the display screen 7a of the display device 7 is executed (FIGS. 99 (C), 100 (C), 101 (FIG. 101). C))) Next, the constituent character effect of moving the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" That compose the character string in the predetermined directions is executed (FIG. 99 (Fig. 99). E) (F), FIGS. 100 (E) (F), FIGS. 101 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the message quality is higher than that of the effect of simply displaying a character string, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The character string of "chance!" Corresponds to "symbol string" and "character string", and the character string display effect corresponds to "first effect", and "chi", "ya", and "n" that compose the character string. The characters "su" and "!" Correspond to "constituting symbols" and "constituting characters", and the constituent character production corresponds to "second production".

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the constituent character production, the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" That constitute the character string are moved in predetermined directions while rotating. (FIGS. 100 (E) (F), FIGS. 101 (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the message quality is higher than that of the effect of simply displaying a character string, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the frame image WG surrounding the character string image MG is displayed in the character string display effect. According to this configuration, since the character string image MG is emphasized by the frame image WG, the interest of the game can be improved.
The frame image WG may be, for example, a "speech balloon" indicating that it is a character line.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, before executing the constituent character effect, the frame line change effect is executed to expand the boundary of the frame image WG to the peripheral edge of the display screen 7a (FIGS. 99 (D), 100. (D), FIG. 101 (D)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the next constituent character production will be watched, and the interest of the game can be improved. The border change effect is included in the "second effect".

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the constituent character production, the character "!" Constituting the character string reaches the boundary of the frame image WG (FIGS. 99 (F), 100 (F), 101 (FIG. 101). F)). According to this configuration, the composition character production becomes dynamic, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The above is an example of displaying the character string "Chance!", But it is not necessary to limit the character string to such a character string. The "symbol string" includes figures with meanings such as marks and pictures.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" Constituting the character string were rotated with the direction perpendicular to the display screen 7a as the rotation axis, but what kind of rotation axis is used to rotate them. You may. In that case, it is conceivable to model the characters "chi", "ya", "n", "su", and "!" As a three-dimensional model.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B8-1]
A game machine equipped with a display device capable of displaying an image.
The first effect of displaying a symbol string on the display screen of the display device, and
It is possible to execute a second effect of moving the constituent symbols constituting the symbol string displayed in the first effect in predetermined directions.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1.
The symbol string is a character string, and the constituent symbol is a constituent character.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-1 or aspect B8-2.
In the second effect, the constituent symbols are moved while being rotated.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B8-1 to B8-3.
In the first effect, the symbol string is displayed and a frame image surrounding the symbol string is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4.
In the second effect, after the frame image is deformed, the constituent symbols are moved.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-5.
In the second effect, at least a part of the constituent symbols reaches the boundary of the frame image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B8-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B8-4 or aspect B8-6.
The display color of the frame image suggests the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), the play time (low probability time reduction state) shifts. This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times. In the case of a 2R jackpot, two round games are played at the first prize opening 30. In this case, in one round game, when 10 game balls win in the 1st big winning opening 30, the 1st big winning opening 30 closes, and 1 game in the 1st big winning opening 30. When a ball wins, 10 game balls are paid out, that is, 100 game balls are paid out in one round game (when there is no over prize). Therefore, the number of game balls that can be paid out in the 2R jackpot is 200 if there is no over-winning.
The jackpot game count display effects A to C shown below are effects that can appear when either of the two types of 2R jackpots is won.

The jackpot game count display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. This jackpot game count display is executed while the game state is in a normal state, a time saving state (low probability low base state), or a probability variation state (high probability high base state), during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the jackpot game count display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Big hit game count display production A]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect A. The jackpot game count display effect A in FIG. 102 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the jackpot game count display effect A, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is then performed, and then a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuated at high speed in the vertical direction to form a reach state. Further, in this reach effect, the variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation number display XI6 represents the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed with a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. Further, in the special jackpot notification effect, the fluctuation number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially below the center, and the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center. The number of acquired game balls display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a count-up type count, and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 indicates "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 indicates "0" in the hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the target count value (the count value that can be the final) of the count display XI2, is written as "Aim count 20!", And the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 It suggests that it is "20". In this jackpot game effect A, the display of the fluctuation number display XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the jackpot game effect B is performed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production A. Further, in the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is indicated by "100", and the count display XI2 is indicated by "10" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is increased by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is increased by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the first round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), the jackpot game effect C is performed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production B. Further, in the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is indicated by "200", and the count display XI2 is indicated by "20" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 also increases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 increases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is increased by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is increased by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if this jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if this jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be performed. Game production E is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game effect D is performed as shown in FIG. 102 (F). In this jackpot game effect D, the super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is described as "super-explosion mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-explosion mode. It is an image suggesting that there is.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super-explosion mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a probable change state is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game production E is performed as shown in FIG. 102 (G). In this jackpot game effect E, the loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This loose mode suggestion image XI5 is described as "loose mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big hit becomes the loose mode. Specifically, the gaming state after the big hit is the latent probability change state. It is an image suggesting.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the latent probability change state is performed.

[Big hit game count display production B]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect B. The jackpot game count display effect B in FIG. 103 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the jackpot game count display effect B, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is then performed, and then a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuated at high speed in the vertical direction to form a reach state. Further, in this reach effect, the variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation number display XI6 represents the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed with a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. Further, in the special jackpot notification effect, the fluctuation number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially below the center, and the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center. The number of acquired game balls display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown type count, and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in the hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the target count value (count value that can be the final) of the count display XI2, is written as "Aim count 0!", And the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is It suggests that it is "0". In this jackpot game effect A, the display of the fluctuation number display XI6 is erased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the jackpot game effect B is performed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production A. Further, in the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is indicated by "100", and the count display XI2 is indicated by "10" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is reduced by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the first round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the jackpot game effect C is performed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, and the count target suggestion display XI3 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production B. Further, in the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 indicates the acquired ball output as "200", and the count display XI2 indicates "0" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is reduced by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if this jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if this jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be performed. Game production E is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game effect D is performed as shown in FIG. 103 (F). In this jackpot game effect D, the super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is described as "super-explosion mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-explosion mode. It is an image suggesting that there is.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super-explosion mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a probable change state is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game production E is performed as shown in FIG. 103 (G). In this jackpot game effect E, the loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This loose mode suggestion image XI5 is described as "loose mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big hit becomes the loose mode. Specifically, the gaming state after the big hit is the latent probability change state. It is an image suggesting.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the latent probability change state is performed.

[Big hit game count display production C]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot game count display effect C. The jackpot game count display effect C in FIG. 104 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the jackpot game count display effect C, as shown in FIG. 104 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is then performed, and then a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols 8C are fluctuated at high speed in the vertical direction to form a reach state. Further, in this reach effect, the variation number display XI6 is displayed near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The fluctuation number display XI6 represents the number of fluctuations of the special symbol since the end of the previous jackpot. Further, although the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, they are omitted in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), a special jackpot notification effect is performed. In this special jackpot notification effect, a 2R jackpot symbol indicating a 2R jackpot is formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Specifically, in the special jackpot notification effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, and the decorative symbols 8C are stopped and displayed with a special symbol (a symbol in which a triangle is arranged inside a circle). The special symbol stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol 8C suggests a 2R jackpot. Further, in the special jackpot notification effect, the fluctuation number display XI6 is continuously displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the jackpot game effect A is performed. In this jackpot game effect A, on the display screen 7a, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is displayed on the right side, the count display XI2 is displayed substantially below the center, the count target suggestion display XI3 is displayed from the left side to the center, and on the upper side. Expectation suggestion effect image XI7 is displayed. The number of acquired game balls display XI1 represents the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game (round game) during the jackpot game (from the start of the round game). The count display XI2 represents a countdown type count, and is represented by an integer of 0 or more in a hexagonal frame. In this jackpot game effect A, the acquired game ball number display XI1 shows "0" for the acquired balls, and the count display XI2 shows "20" in the hexagonal frame. The count target suggestion display XI3 is a display that suggests the target count value (count value that can be the final) of the count display XI2, is written as "Aim count 0!", And the target value of the count display of the count display XI2 is It suggests that it is "0". In this jackpot game effect A, the display of the fluctuation number display XI6 is erased.

Further, the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 is an image suggesting the expectation degree that the jackpot in the special jackpot notification effect is a 2R probability variation jackpot, and the expectation degree is suggested by the color of the effect. When the effect color is blue, the expectation of 2R probability variation jackpot is the lowest, when the effect color is yellow, the expectation of 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than blue, and when the effect color is green, 2R probability variation If the expectation of the jackpot is higher than yellow and the effect color is purple, the expectation of the 2R probability variation jackpot is higher than that of green, and if the effect color is red, the expectation of the 2R probability variation jackpot is the highest. It is configured to be.
In the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 in the jackpot game production A, the color of the effect is blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the jackpot game effect B is performed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production A. Further, in the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 is indicated by "100", and the count display XI2 is indicated by "10" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is reduced by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect B, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the first round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30. Further, the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 shows that the effect has changed from blue to green and the expectation degree for the 2R probability variation jackpot has increased.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the jackpot game effect C is performed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1, the count display XI2, the count target suggestion display XI3, and the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 are continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. The count display XI2 is larger than that in the jackpot game production B. Further, in the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 indicates the acquired ball output as "200", and the count display XI2 indicates "0" in the hexagonal frame. Here, as the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases, the count of the count display XI2 decreases. Specifically, when the number of acquired balls of the acquired game ball number display XI1 increases by "10", the count of the count display XI2 decreases by "1", and when the number of acquired balls increases by "100", the count of the count display XI2 Is reduced by "10", in other words, the count display XI2 is reduced by "10" when one round game (10 winnings in the first large winning opening 30) is completed. In the jackpot game effect C, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displays at the end of the second round game. In this case, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30. Further, the expectation degree suggestion effect image XI7 shows that the effect has changed from green to red and the expectation degree for the 2R probability variation jackpot has reached the climax.

Of the two types of 2R jackpots, if this jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot game production D will be performed, and if this jackpot is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the following jackpot will be performed. Game production E is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game effect D is performed as shown in FIG. 104 (F). In this jackpot game effect D, the super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 is described as "super-explosion mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the jackpot will be the super-explosion mode. It is an image suggesting that there is.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the super-explosion mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the state is in a probable change state is performed.

When the jackpot this time is a 2R latent probability variation jackpot, the jackpot game production E is performed as shown in FIG. 104 (G). In this jackpot game effect E, the loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This loose mode suggestion image XI5 is described as "loose mode entry" and is an image suggesting that the display mode after the big hit becomes the loose mode. Specifically, the gaming state after the big hit is the latent probability change state. It is an image suggesting.
After that, on the display screen 7a, an effect based on the loose mode is performed, that is, an effect suggesting that the latent probability change state is performed.

[Modification example]
In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls do not include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 balls in the first large winning opening 30. Not limited to this, in the acquired game ball number display XI1, the acquired balls may include the acquired game balls that have won more than 10 in the first large winning opening 30.
In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, the jackpot game count display effects A to E are performed in the case of a special jackpot, that is, in the case of a 2R jackpot, and in the case of a 16R jackpot, the jackpot game count display effects A to C are performed. It is a configuration that cannot be done. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game count display effects A to C may be performed even when the 16R jackpot is hit.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, during the jackpot game, the acquired game ball number display XI1 indicating the number of game balls acquired by the jackpot game and the count display XI2 indicating the count are performed, and then the acquired game ball number is performed. The count display XI2 is changed according to the change of the display XI1. According to this configuration, the jackpot game (round game) progresses as the count display XI2 progresses (according to digestion), so the mode announced at the end of the jackpot game is the super-explosion mode. You can gradually raise the expectation of the game, and you can raise the relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the jackpot game production, the acquired game ball number display XI1 does not change depending on the game balls acquired by winning a prize in a winning opening other than the first winning opening 30, and the first It changes only by the acquisition of the game ball based on the prize in the grand prize opening 30. According to this configuration, the count display XI2 is linked to the winning of the first big winning opening 30 in an easy-to-understand manner, so that the player can easily recognize the progress of the big hit game (round game), and at the end of the big hit game. It is possible to gradually raise the expectation that the mode to be announced is the super-explosive mode, and it is possible to raise the relatively boring jackpot game (round game). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the jackpot game count display effects A to C, the fluctuation number display XI6 indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is performed before the jackpot game effect (that is, at the time of the reach effect or the special jackpot notification effect). According to this configuration, the variable number display XI6 is performed before the jackpot game production, so that the more addicted you are, the more you can gradually increase the expectation for the jackpot, and the subsequent jackpot game production (round game) will be further excited. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, before the jackpot game effect (that is, during the reach effect or the special jackpot notification effect), the variation number display XI6 indicating the number of changes of the special symbol is performed, and during the jackpot game effect, It will be reset (erased). According to this configuration, the variable number display XI6 is performed before the jackpot game production, so that the more addicted you are, the more you can gradually increase the expectation for the jackpot, and you can give relief by hitting by resetting. It is possible to further excite the subsequent jackpot game production (round game). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned jackpot game count display effects A to C, in the jackpot game production, after changing the count display XI2 according to the change of the acquired game ball number display XI1, the jackpot game is finally followed by a jackpot in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot. The super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 that suggests that the later game state is the probability change state is displayed, and in the case of the 2R latent probability change jackpot, the game state after the jackpot is the time saving state (low probability high base state). The suggestion loose mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed. According to this configuration, during the jackpot game, the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 are displayed, and at the end of the jackpot game, the super-explosion mode suggestion image XI4 or the mode suggestion image XI5 is displayed. The player can recognize the next mode before the player's feelings of excitement with the acquired game ball number display XI1 and the count display XI2 cool down, and can greatly enjoy the production during the relatively boring jackpot game. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect I-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the number of acquired game media, which represents the number of game media acquired by the jackpot game, and the count display, which represents the count, during the jackpot game.
The second display effect is an effect that is performed after the first display effect and changes the count display according to a change in the number of acquired game media display.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I-1.
The acquired game medium display in the second display effect does not change depending on the game medium acquired by winning a prize opening other than the big winning opening during the big hit game, and the gaming medium based on the winning of the big winning opening Changes with the acquisition of
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is performed before the first display effect, and is an effect of displaying the number of fluctuations indicating the number of fluctuations of the special symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I-3.
The variation number display in the third display effect is erased before the first display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect I-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect I-4.
In the case of a jackpot, the gaming machine selects one jackpot from a plurality of jackpots including a first jackpot and a second jackpot that is more advantageous to the player than the first jackpot.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect that is performed after the second display effect and performs the first display when the jackpot is the first jackpot.
The fifth display effect is an effect that is performed after the second display effect when the jackpot is the second jackpot, and performs a second display different from the first display.
The second display suggests that the gaming state is more favorable to the player than the first display.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times in the low probability state (normal state) (the ceiling counter becomes 0). (When), it shifts to the play time (low probability time reduction state). This play time is continued until the special symbol changes 700 times.

The double timer display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. This double timer display effect is executed while the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), such as during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, if the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the double timer display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Double timer display effect A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect A. The double timer display effect A of FIG. 105 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double timer display effect A, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time is white. The hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the jackpot expectation is the lowest, if it is yellow, the jackpot expectation is the third highest, if it is green, the jackpot expectation is the second highest, and if it is red, the jackpot expectation is the highest. Has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is a display showing a count-up (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later, and specifically, is a display showing a count-up every 15 seconds. In the first timer display XJ1, the timer value is displayed in the square frame portion. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the first timer display XJ1 is displayed as "00:00" in which the timer value represents 0 seconds, and the color of the frame portion is blue. The first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed at the time of count-up. The first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display indicating a count-up at intervals longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At the time of this second timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. The second timer display XJ2 is a display showing a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above, and specifically, is a display showing a count-up every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the second timer display XJ2 is displayed as "0" whose timer value represents 0 seconds. The second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. The second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display indicating a count-up at intervals of 1 second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts up every second and the timer value is "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts up at 15 second intervals and the timer value is "15:00". It has become.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (E), the first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the color of the frame portion of the first timer display XJ1 changes from blue to green, red, or the like while rotating and enlarging the surface of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (F), the first timer extinguishing effect is performed. In this first timer extinction effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (G), the time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes like the first timer mode change effect. Further, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "30:00" (30 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change. At this time, the second timer display XJ2 indicates that the timer value is "25" (25 seconds).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (H), the chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed when the time of the first timer display XJ1 is up, and the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed at the position where the first timer display XJ1 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A is displayed. Changes from blue to green (hatched part in the figure). The hold change indicates that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation corresponding to the hold icon 9A that has been changed on hold is improved. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation level has increased, and is described as “chance” in FIG. 105 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (I), the time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. In this case, the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 becomes "30" (30 seconds) and the time is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (J), the chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed by the time-up of the second timer display XJ2, the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A is held and changed from green to red (FIG. Cross-hatched part). Due to this hold change, the jackpot expectation in the change corresponding to the hold icon 9A that has changed hold is further increased as compared with the case of the chance up effect A. The chance-up image XJ3 is described as "super hot" in FIG. 105 (J), suggesting that the expectation of a big hit has risen even more than in the case of the chance-up effect A.

[Double timer display effect B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect B. The double timer display effect B of FIG. 106 is an effect of the same variation of the special symbol. In the double timer display effect B, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time is white. The hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the jackpot expectation is the lowest, if it is yellow, the jackpot expectation is the third highest, if it is green, the jackpot expectation is the second highest, and if it is red, the jackpot expectation is the highest. Has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is a display showing a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later, and specifically, a display showing a countdown in which the timer value is every 20 seconds. .. In the first timer display XJ1, the timer value is displayed in the square frame portion. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the first timer display XJ1 is displayed as "40:00" in which the timer value represents 40 seconds, and the color of the frame portion is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed at the time of countdown. The first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At the time of this second timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. The second timer display XJ2 is a display showing a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above, and specifically, is a display showing a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the second timer display XJ2 is displayed as "20" whose timer value represents 20 seconds. The second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. The second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display indicating a countdown at intervals of 1 second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second and the timer value is "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down at 20 second intervals and the timer value is "20:00". ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (E), the first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the color of the frame portion of the first timer display XJ1 changes from blue to green, red, or the like while rotating and enlarging the surface of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (F), the first timer extinguishing effect is performed. In this first timer extinction effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (G), the time-up effect A is performed. In this time-up effect A, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, the timer value becomes "0" (0 seconds), and the timer is up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (H), the chance-up effect A is performed. This chance-up effect A is performed by the time-up of the second timer display XJ2, the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A is held and changed from blue to green (FIG. Hatching part). The hold change indicates that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation corresponding to the hold icon 9A that has been changed on hold is improved. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation level has increased, and is described as “chance” in FIG. 106 (H).

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (I), the time-up effect B is performed. In this time-up effect B, the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes like the first timer mode change effect. Further, in this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds) and the time is up. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (J), the chance-up effect B is performed. This chance-up effect B is performed by the time-up of the first timer display XJ1, the chance-up image XJ3 is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A is held and changed from green to red (FIG. Cross-hatched part). Due to this hold change, the jackpot expectation in the change corresponding to the hold icon 9A that has changed hold is further increased as compared with the case of the chance up effect A. The chance-up image XJ3 is described as "super hot" in FIG. 106 (J), suggesting that the expectation of a big hit has risen even more than in the case of the chance-up effect A.

[Double timer display effect C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the double timer display effect C. The double timer display effect C in FIG. 107 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double timer display effect C, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R on the display screen 7a fluctuate in the vertical direction at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a hold icon 9A and a variable icon 9C are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The color of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C at this time is white. The hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C indicates the jackpot expectation by the color of the icon. In this case, if the color of the icon is white, the jackpot expectation is the lowest, if it is yellow, the jackpot expectation is the third highest, if it is green, the jackpot expectation is the second highest, and if it is red, the jackpot expectation is the highest. Has a high composition.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the first timer display effect is performed. In this first timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is a display showing a countdown (timer operation) at a longer time interval than the second timer display XJ2 described later, and specifically, is a display showing a countdown every 10 seconds. In the first timer display XJ1, the timer value is displayed in the square frame portion. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the first timer display XJ1 is displayed as "20:00" representing 20 seconds, and the color of the frame portion is blue. This first timer display XJ1 disappears after this display and is redisplayed at the time of countdown. The first timer display XJ1 may be, for example, a display representing a countdown at intervals longer than 1 second.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the second timer display effect is performed. In this second timer display effect, the second timer display XJ2 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a. At the time of this second timer display effect, the first timer display XJ1 disappears. The second timer display XJ2 is a display showing a count-up (timer operation) at a shorter time interval than the first timer display XJ1 described above, and specifically, is a display showing a countdown every second. At this time, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the second timer display XJ2 is displayed as "20" representing 20 seconds. The second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a even after this display. The second timer display XJ2 may be, for example, a display indicating a countdown at intervals of 1 second or less.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the first timer appearance effect is performed. In this first timer appearance effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is redisplayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. The second timer display XJ2 counts down every second to be "10", and the first timer display XJ1 counts down every 10 seconds to be "10:00". That is, the timer values of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2 are the same.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (E), the first timer mode change effect is performed. In this first timer mode change effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the color of the frame portion of the first timer display XJ1 changes from blue to green, red, or the like while rotating and enlarging the surface of the display screen 7a. The first timer display XJ1 is not limited to this, and the display screen 7a may be rotated from the front side to the back side, the font of the timer value may be changed, or may be moved.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (F), the first timer extinction effect is performed. In this first timer extinction effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, while the first timer display XJ1 gradually disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (G), a time-up effect is performed. In this time-up effect, the second timer display XJ2 is continuously displayed on the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the first timer display XJ1 is displayed substantially in the center. In this case, the timer value of the first timer display XJ1 becomes "00:00" (0 seconds) and the time is up, and the timer value of the second timer display XJ2 becomes "0" (0 seconds). And the timer is up. At this time, the mode of the first timer display XJ1 changes like the first timer mode change effect. The first timer display XJ1 is erased after the mode change.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (H), a chance-up effect is performed. This chance-up effect is performed by the time-up of the first timer display XJ1 and the second timer display XJ2. The chance-up image XJ3 is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A is changed from blue to red. Hold change (cross-hatched part in the figure). It shows that the jackpot expectation in the fluctuation corresponding to the hold icon 9A that has changed to hold is greatly increased due to the hold change. The chance-up image XJ3 is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation has increased, and in FIG. 107 (H), it is described as "super hot", suggesting that the jackpot expectation has increased significantly.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the mode of the second timer display XJ2 does not change. However, a configuration in which the mode of the second timer display XJ2 changes may be used. For example, the second timer display XJ2 may be enlarged or reduced, the color may be changed, rotated, or an effect may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 that displays the timer operation (count-up display or count-down display) at a relatively long time interval (20 seconds in the double timer display effect B) in the same fluctuation, The second timer display XJ2, which is performed at a relatively short time interval (0.01 seconds), is performed. According to this configuration, the two timer displays can be experienced on different time axes, a thrilling feeling and a surprise feeling can be given to the timer display, and the interest of the timer effect can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 is displayed at the timing when the timer operation display (count-up display or countdown display) is performed in the first timer mode change effect, and the second timer display XJ2 Is displayed larger than. According to this configuration, the first timer display XJ1 can be impressed on the player, that is, the timer display on the two different time axes can be easily recognized by the player, and the two different timer displays can be displayed. It can attract the interest of the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 changes a predetermined mode at the timing of performing the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, the first timer display XJ1 can be impressed by the player by changing the mode of the first timer display XJ1, that is, the timer display having two different time axes can be easily recognized by the player. The player can be interested in the two different timer displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the first timer display XJ1 rotates at the timing of performing the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, by rotating the first timer display XJ1, the first timer display XJ1 can be impressed by the player, that is, the timer display having two different time axes can be easily recognized by the player. The player can be interested in the two different timer displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double timer display effects A to C, the color of the first timer display XJ1 changes at the timing of performing the timer operation display (count-up display or count-down display). According to this configuration, the color of the first timer display XJ1 changes, so that the player can be impressed with the first timer display XJ1, that is, the player recognizes the timer displays having two different time axes. It can be facilitated and the player's interest can be attracted to the two different timer displays. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XJ-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of performing the first timer display that displays the timer operation at a relatively long time interval.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second timer display that displays a timer operation at a relatively short time interval.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the first display effect and the second display effect are performed in the same variation.
[Aspect XJ-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XJ-1.
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect is displayed larger than the second timer display at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XJ-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XJ-2.
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect changes a predetermined mode at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XJ-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XJ-3.
In the combination effect, the first timer display of the first display effect rotates as the predetermined mode change at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XJ-5]
A game machine according to the aspect XJ-3 or the aspect XJ-4.
In the combination effect, the color of the first timer display of the first display effect changes as the predetermined mode change at the timing of performing the timer operation display.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when a big hit is made, the game state after the big hit is a probability variation game state (high accuracy high base state) and a time saving game state (low accuracy high base state). However, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in both the probabilistic game state and the time-saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state.
Here, in the game machine 1 of this embodiment, the following three jackpots may be provided.
1. 1. After the jackpot, when the gaming state becomes the probabilistic gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, the jackpot K1 shifts to the normal gaming state.
2. 2. After the jackpot, when the gaming state becomes the probabilistic gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, the jackpot K2 shifts to the normal gaming state.
3. 3. After the big hit, the game state becomes the probabilistic game state, and when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the first specified number, the game shifts to the time-saving game state, and when the number of changes of the special symbol reaches the second specified number, the normal game state. Big hit K3 to shift to.
The jackpots K1 to K3 are selected with a predetermined probability at the time of the jackpot.

The final screen display effect A described below represents a display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K1, the final screen display effect B represents a display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K2, and the final screen display effect C is. , Shows the display effect after the jackpot game based on the jackpot K3.
Further, in the present embodiment, the first specified number of times is 100 times, and the second specified number of times is 200 times. However, the number is not limited to this, and the first specified number of times may be any number as long as it is smaller than the second specified number of times. The second specified number of times may be any number as long as it is larger than the first specified number of times.
Since the normal gaming state is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player, it is also called a disadvantageous gaming state, and the time-saving gaming state and the probabilistic gaming state are the gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player. Collectively, it is also called an advantageous gaming state.

The final screen display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. This final screen display effect is executed while the game state is a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), such as during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the final screen display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

[Final screen display effect A]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect A. The final screen display effect A includes a probabilistic game effect, a result information display effect, and a normal game effect. The probabilistic game effect is a display effect of the variation when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 5 times remaining up to the first specified number in the probabilistic game state (high accuracy and high base state) that rushes after the jackpot K1. The effect is a display effect in the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the normal game effect is a display effect in the variation when the normal game state is entered. In the result information display effect A, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the final screen display effect A, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), the probabilistic game effect is performed in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot K1. In this probabilistic game effect, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probabilistic suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the probabilistic remaining number display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and the decorative symbol 8L is approximately in the center. , 8C, 8R fluctuation effect is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. Right-handed suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The probability change suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state. The probability change remaining number display XK3 is a display suggesting how many times the probability change game state will be continued. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 108 (A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 5 times up to the first specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "after 5 times".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached after the jackpot K1, the result information display effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108 (B). In this result information display effect, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the gaming state during the current continuous chan. "During continuous chan" is the period from a big hit (also called the first big hit) in the normal game state, to a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state, and then to return to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game). To say. For example, "6 consecutive chans" means that after the first big hit, before returning to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game), 6 big hits including the first big hit were made. In addition, the information indicating the result of the game state during the consecutive chan is the acquired ball output information (expressed as "acquired" in the result information display XK4) indicating the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive chan, and the consecutive chan number indicating the number of consecutive chans. Chan count information (expressed as "number of consecutive chans" in the result information display XK4) and average time information indicating the average time to win a jackpot during consecutive chans (expressed as "average time" in the result information display XK4) , Rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in the result information display XK4) is included. As for the average time information, for example, if the number of consecutive chans is 6 and the time spent to obtain the 6 jackpots is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. In addition, the rank information will be ranked up in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive chans. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 108 (B), the acquired ball output information is "acquisition: 5312 balls", the consecutive chan count information is "continuous chan count: 6 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". , The rank information is "Rank: A". In the result information display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, in the normal game state, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the normal game effect is performed. In this normal game effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed.

[Final screen display effect B]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect B. The final screen display effect B includes a probability variation game effect A, a result information display effect A, an advantageous game state continuation effect, a probability variation game effect B, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The probabilistic game effect A is a display effect when the number of changes of the special symbol is 5 times remaining up to the first specified number of times in the probabilistic game state (high accuracy and high base state) that rushes after the jackpot K2, and the result information display effect. A is a display effect in the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous gaming state continuation effect is a display effect in the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached. Therefore, it is a display effect performed after the result information display effect A, and the probability variation game effect B is a display effect in the variation when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 3 times remaining up to the second specified number of times in the probability variation game state. The result information display effect B is a display effect in the fluctuation when the second predetermined number of times is reached in the probabilistic game state, and the normal game effect is a display effect in the change when the normal game state is entered. In the final screen display effect B, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the final screen display effect B, in the probability variation game state after the jackpot K2, the probability variation game effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (A). In this probabilistic game effect A, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probabilistic suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the probabilistic remaining number display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and the decorative pattern is substantially in the center. The fluctuation effect of 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. Right-handed suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The probability change suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state. The probability change remaining number display XK3 is a display suggesting how many times the probability change game state will be continued. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 109 (A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 5 times up to the first specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "after 5 times".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached after the jackpot K2, the result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (B). In the result information display effect A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the game during the current consecutive chan. "During continuous chan" is the period from a big hit (also called the first big hit) in the normal game state, to a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state, and then to return to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game). To say. For example, "6 consecutive chans" means that after the first big hit, before returning to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game), 6 big hits including the first big hit were made. In addition, the information indicating the result of the game during the consecutive chan is the acquired ball output information (expressed as "acquired" in the result information display XK4) indicating the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive chan, and the consecutive chan indicating the number of consecutive chans. The number of times information (expressed as "number of consecutive chans" in the result information display XK4), average time information indicating the average time until a jackpot is obtained during consecutive chans (expressed as "average time" in the result information display XK4), Includes rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in the result information display XK4). As for the average time information, for example, if the number of consecutive chans is 6 and the time spent to obtain the 6 jackpots is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. In addition, the rank information will be ranked up in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive chans. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 109 (B), the acquired ball output information is "acquisition: 5312 balls", the consecutive chan count information is "continuous chan count: 6 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". , The rank information is "Rank: A". In the result information display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, it is a variation of the first predetermined number of times (100 times) in the probabilistic game state, and after the result information display effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the advantageous game state continuation effect is performed. In this advantageous game state continuation effect, a state suggestion display XK5 suggesting that the advantageous game state (here, the probabilistic game state) is set is displayed at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 109 (C), the state suggestion display XK5 is described as "continuation of advantageous gaming state!". In the advantageous game state continuous display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, the probabilistic game state is continued, and as shown in FIG. 109 (D), the probabilistic game state effect B is performed. In this probability change game effect B, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed in the upper left, the probability change suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the probability change remaining number display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and the decoration is approximately in the center. The fluctuation effect of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. In FIG. 109 (D), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 3 times up to the second specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "after 3 times".

Next, when the variation reaches the second predetermined number of times in the probabilistic game state, the result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (E). In the result information display effect B, the result information display XK6 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The result information display XK6 includes information representing the result of the game during the current consecutive chan. In addition, the information representing the result of the game during the continuous chan of the result information display XK6 is the acquired ball output information representing the acquired balls acquired during the continuous chan as in the result information display XK4 (in the result information display XK4, "acquired". ”), The number of consecutive chans information indicating the number of consecutive chans (expressed as“ the number of consecutive chans ”in the result information display XK4), and the average time information (result) indicating the average time until a jackpot is obtained during the consecutive chans. Information display XK4 includes "average time") and rank information representing a predetermined rank (expressed as "rank" in result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 of FIG. 109 (E), the acquired ball output information is "acquisition: 10000 balls", the consecutive chan count information is "continuous chan count: 12 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". , The rank information is "Rank: S". In the result information display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), the normal game effect is performed. In this normal game effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed.

[Final screen display effect C]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the final screen display effect C. The final screen display effect C includes a probability variation game effect, a result information display effect A, an advantageous game state continuation effect, a time-saving game effect, a result information display effect B, and a normal game effect. The probabilistic game effect is a display effect when the number of changes of the special symbol remains 5 times up to the first specified number of times in the probabilistic game state (high accuracy high base state) that rushes after the jackpot K3, and the result information display effect A Is a display effect in the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached, and the advantageous gaming state continuation effect is a display effect in the fluctuation when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached. This is a display effect performed after the result information display effect A, and the time-saving game effect is when the number of times the special symbol is changed is 10 times remaining up to the second specified number of times in the time-saving game state that shifts after the first specified number of times. The display effect in the fluctuation, the result information display effect B is the display effect in the change when the second specified number of times is reached in the time-saving game state, and the normal game effect is the display effect in the change when the normal game state is entered. It is a display effect. In the final screen display effect C, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the final screen display effect C, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), the probabilistic game effect is performed in the probabilistic game state after the jackpot K3. In this probabilistic game effect, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is displayed in the upper left, the probabilistic suggestion display XK2 is displayed in the upper right, the probabilistic remaining number display XK3 is displayed in the lower right, and the decorative symbol 8L is approximately in the center. , 8C, 8R fluctuation effect is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. Right-handed suggestion display XK1 is a display that encourages the player to hit right. The probability change suggestion display XK2 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the probability change gaming state. The probability change remaining number display XK3 is a display suggesting how many times the probability change game state will be continued. This number represents the number of changes in the special symbol. In FIG. 110 (A), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the remaining 5 times up to the first specified number of times, the probability variation remaining number display XK3 is represented as "after 5 times".

Next, when the first specified number of times (100 times) is reached after the jackpot K3, the result information display effect A is performed as shown in FIG. 110 (B). In the result information display effect A, the result information display XK4 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The result information display XK4 includes information representing the result of the gaming state during the current continuous chan. "During continuous chan" is the period from a big hit (also called the first big hit) in the normal game state, to a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state, and then to return to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game). To say. For example, "6 consecutive chans" means that after the first big hit, before returning to the normal game state (excluding during the big hit game), 6 big hits including the first big hit were made. In addition, the information indicating the result of the game state during the consecutive chan is the acquired ball output information (expressed as "acquired" in the result information display XK4) indicating the acquired balls acquired during the consecutive chan, and the consecutive chan number indicating the number of consecutive chans. Chan count information (expressed as "number of consecutive chans" in the result information display XK4) and average time information indicating the average time to win a jackpot during consecutive chans (expressed as "average time" in the result information display XK4) , Rank information representing a predetermined rank (denoted as "rank" in the result information display XK4) is included. As for the average time information, for example, if the number of consecutive chans is 6 and the time spent to obtain the 6 jackpots is 15 minutes, the average time is 2 minutes and 30 seconds. In addition, the rank information will be ranked up in proportion to the number of balls won and the number of consecutive chans. In the result information display XK4 of FIG. 110 (B), the acquired ball output information is "acquisition: 5312 balls", the consecutive chan count information is "continuous chan count: 6 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 30 seconds". , The rank information is "Rank: A". In the result information display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, with the variation of the first specified number of times (100 times), after the result information display effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the advantageous gaming state continuous effect is performed. In this advantageous game state continuation effect, a state suggestion display XK7 suggesting that the advantageous game state (here, the time-saving game state) is set is displayed at the substantially center of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 110 (C), the state suggestion display XK7 is described as "continuation of advantageous gaming state! Entering time-saving gaming state". In the advantageous game state continuous display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the player enters the time-saving game state and the remaining 10 times fluctuate up to the second specified number of times, the time-saving game effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110 (D). In this time saving game effect, on the display screen 7a, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed in the upper left, the time saving suggestion display XK8 is displayed in the upper right, the time saving remaining number display XK9 is displayed in the lower right, and the decorative pattern is substantially in the center. The fluctuation effect of 8L, 8C, 8R is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the lower side. In FIG. 110 (D), since the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is 10 times remaining up to the second specified number of times, the time saving remaining number display XK9 is represented as "10 times after".

Next, when the variation reaches the second predetermined number of times in the probabilistic game state, the result information display effect B is performed as shown in FIG. 110 (E). In the result information display effect B, the result information display XK10 is displayed on the display screen 7a. The result information display XK10 includes information representing the result of the game during the current consecutive chan. In addition, the information representing the result of the game during the continuous chan of the result information display XK10 is the acquired ball output information representing the acquired balls acquired during the continuous chan as in the result information display XK4 (in the result information display XK4, "acquired". ”), The number of consecutive chans information indicating the number of consecutive chans (expressed as“ the number of consecutive chans ”in the result information display XK4), and the average time information (result) indicating the average time until a jackpot is obtained during the consecutive chans. Information display XK4 includes "average time") and rank information representing a predetermined rank (expressed as "rank" in result information display XK4). In the result information display XK6 of FIG. 110 (E), the acquired ball output information is "acquisition: 10000 balls", the consecutive chan count information is "continuous chan count: 12 times", and the average time information is "average time: 2 minutes 22 seconds". , The rank information is "Rank: S". In the result information display effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is continuously displayed.

Next, when the normal game state changes, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), the normal game effect is performed. In this normal game effect, the right-handed suggestion display XK1 is erased, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed.

In the final screen display effects B to C, the result information display effect A is performed, and although the result information display XK4 is displayed, the normal game state is not returned and the advantageous game state is continued. Then, the game information such as the jackpot and the winning ball in the advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is included in the information representing the result of the game in the continuous chan of the result information display XK6 and the result information display XK10. For example, in the final screen display effect B, the acquired ball output represented by the result information display XK4 is 6000 balls, and in the advantageous game state after the result information display XK4 is displayed, a jackpot is made and an additional 1000 balls are obtained. When the result information display XK4 and the result information display XK6 are to be displayed by changing the special symbol after the jackpot game, the acquisition indicated by the acquisition ball output information in the result information display XK4 or the result information display XK6. The number of balls to be released will be 7,000.

[Modification example]
In the final screen display effects A to C, when the normal game effect (normal game state) is entered and the third predetermined number of times is reached, the device may shift to the time-saving game state. In this case, the game information such as the jackpot and the winning ball in the time-saving game state may be included in the information indicating the result of the game during the continuous chan in the result information display displayed thereafter.

[Effect example]
In the final screen display effects B to C, when the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state (probability changing gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is relatively advantageous to the player, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the first specified value (for example, Based on reaching 100 times), it is a display that suggests that the advantageous gaming state ends and the gaming state shifts to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal gaming state) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. The result information display XK4 showing the result of the jackpot game is performed, and then the display suggesting that the game is in an advantageous game state (state suggestion display XK5 and probability change suggestion display XK2, or state suggestion display XK7 and time saving game state suggestion display XK8). ). According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting the transition to the disadvantageous gaming state is displayed, the advantageous gaming state can be continued even after that, so that the player can display the result information display XK4. However, it is possible to keep the hope of continuing the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to give high interest to the progress of the display effect until the actual transition to the normal gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, when the gaming state is the probabilistic gaming state, the probabilistic gaming state ends and the normal gaming state is entered based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the first specified value. The result information display XK4, which is a display suggesting that, and represents the result of the jackpot game during the continuous chan, is performed, and then the state suggestion display XK7, which suggests that the game is in a time-saving game state, is performed. According to this configuration, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting the transition to the normal gaming state is displayed, the game state can be further shortened after that, so that the player can display the result information display XK4 even if the result information display XK4 is displayed. , It is possible to keep the hope of continuing the short-time gaming state, and it is possible to give high interest to the progress of the display effect until the actual transition to the normal gaming state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed even though the result information display XK4 is performed, and then the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and the number of changes of the special symbol is the second. Based on reaching the specified value (for example, 200) of, the result information display XK10 showing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chan is performed. That is, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting the transition to the normal game state is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the game state is further shortened thereafter, and the number of changes of the special symbol is the second. The result information display XK10 is performed with the specified value of 2. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can keep hope for the time-saving game state until the second result information display XK10 is displayed, during which time. It is possible to give the player a high interest in the display effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effect C, the state suggestion display XK7 is performed even though the result information display XK4 is performed, and then the game state shifts to the time-saving game state, and the number of changes of the special symbol is the second. Based on reaching the specified value (for example, 200) of, the result information display XK10 showing the result of the jackpot game during the continuous chan is performed, and the game state is changed from the time-saving game state to the normal game state. That is, even if the result information display XK4 suggesting the transition to the normal game state is displayed, the state suggestion display XK7 is displayed and the game state is further shortened after that, and the number of changes of the special symbol is the second. The result information display XK10 is performed when the specified value is reached, and the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. According to this configuration, even if the first result information display XK4 is displayed, the player can continue to keep the hope for the time-saving gaming state until the normal gaming state is actually displayed, and during that time, the player is displayed. It is possible to give a high interest in the production. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the final screen display effects B to C, the result information display XK4 and the state suggestion display XK7 each include information indicating the number of consecutive chans and information indicating the number of acquired balls. According to this configuration, the number of consecutive chans and the number of acquired balls can be notified to the player at once, and the player can be given a sense of accomplishment of the consecutive chans. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XK-1]
A gaming machine equipped with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
The gaming machine is played in one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player and two gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
In the first display effect, when the gaming state is the second gaming state, the second gaming state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the first specified value. It is a display suggesting that the player shifts to the first game state, and is an effect of displaying the first result information indicating the result of the jackpot game during the continuous chan.
The second display effect is an effect of performing a state suggestion display suggesting that the game is in the second gaming state.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XK-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XK-1.
The second gaming state is either a probabilistic gaming state or a time-saving gaming state.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, when the game state is the probability change game state, the probability change game state ends based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaching the first specified value. Then, the first result information is displayed, which is a display suggesting that the player shifts to the first game state and represents the result of the jackpot game during the continuous chan, and then, in the second display effect, the time reduction is performed. Display a state suggestion that suggests that you are in a game state,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XK-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XK-2.
In the combination effect, after the state suggestion display is performed in the second display effect, the gaming state shifts to the time-saving gaming state, and then the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified value. Based on, a second result information display showing the result of the jackpot game during the consecutive chan is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XK-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XK-3.
In the combination effect, after the second result information display is performed, the gaming state is changed from the time-saving gaming state to the first gaming state.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XK-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XK-4.
The first result information display and the second result information display include information indicating the number of consecutive chans and information indicating the number of acquired game media, respectively.
A game machine characterized by that.

The promotion pending continuous productions A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. The characteristic effect of this promotion hold rendition is the promotion rendition (with hold rendition) that is executed after the hit is notified. In the present embodiment, the production during the jackpot is also included in the promotion pending continuous production. The promotion effect (with a hold ream) is characterized in that it notifies that there is a hit hold in the first special figure hold (hereinafter, also referred to as "hold ream").

[Promotion pending continuous production A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the promotion pending continuous production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 111A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the hit notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is an effect of notifying the hit by the mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot". Note that the stage of the hit notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, it is assumed that there is a hold corresponding to the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that promotes the operation of the sword member 65. Here, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next effect is executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (D), the promotion effect (with hold sequence) is executed. In the promotion effect (with hold ream), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stands still at the central advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into a left screen and a right screen by the first movable accessory 14. Here, on the left screen, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed as "7". This means that what was notified as "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" was promoted to "16RV scheduled passing jackpot". Further, a message image MG of "V" is displayed on the right screen. This is to notify the pending ream. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (E), the jackpot digestion effect A is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A is an effect of digesting the jackpot (hereinafter, also referred to as “the jackpot”) in the immediately preceding fluctuation. Here, too, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the central advance position in front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left of the left screen. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is digested, the next effect is executed. Again, the message image MG "V" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (F), the movable body movement effect is executed. The movable body movement effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 that has been stationary at the central advance position in front of the display screen 7a slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. is there. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. On the right screen, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed instead of the message display MG "V". Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "7". This means that the pending ream is a "16RV passing jackpot". At the start of movement of the first movable accessory 14, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed, and when the first movable accessory 14 moves to a position near the left end of the display screen 7a, for example, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. 8C and 8R may be displayed so that the player can have expectations regarding the jackpot type. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and stands still.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (G), the jackpot digestion effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect of digesting the pending ream. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left part. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is exhausted, the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), the state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect notifies the game state. Here, the message image MG "I'm still going on!" Is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation changes to a probabilistic gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Promotion pending continuous production B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the promotion pending continuous production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (B), the hit notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is an effect of notifying the hit by the mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot". Note that the stage of the hit notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, it is assumed that there is a hold corresponding to the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (C), the sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that promotes the operation of the sword member 65. Here, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next effect is executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), the promotion effect (with pending reams) is executed. In the promotion effect (with hold ream), the first movable accessory 14 moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and stands still at the central advanced position in front of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a is divided into a left screen and a right screen by the first movable accessory 14. Here, the message image MG1 "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the left screen. This means that what was notified as "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" was promoted to "16RV scheduled passing jackpot". In addition, the message image MG2 "MAX jackpot" is also displayed on the right screen. This is to notify the pending ream, and also to notify that it is a "16RV passing jackpot". Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (not shown) are fixedly stopped, and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (E), the jackpot digestion effect A is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A is an effect of digesting the jackpot. Here, too, the first movable accessory 14 remains stationary at the central advance position in front of the display screen 7a. Then, the ally character CRA is displayed on the left screen, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on the upper left of the left screen. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is digested, the next effect is executed. Here, too, the message image MG2 "MAX jackpot" is displayed on the right screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the movable body movement effect is executed. The movable body movement effect is an effect in which the first movable accessory 14 that has been stationary at the central advance position in front of the display screen 7a slowly moves toward the left side of the display screen 7a as shown by the arrow Y. is there. As the first movable accessory 14 moves, the area of the right screen expands. As the right screen is enlarged, the message image MG2 "MAX jackpot" is enlarged and displayed. The first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position and stands still.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (G), the jackpot digestion effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect of digesting the pending ream. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed in the upper left part. Here, a round display RH called "1R" is performed. This round display is performed from 1R to 16R. When the round display becomes 16R and the jackpot is exhausted, the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), the state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect notifies the game state. Here, the message image MG "I'm still going on!" Is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation changes to a probabilistic gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Promotion pending continuous production C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the promotion pending continuous production C.
First, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), the hit notification effect is executed. The hit notification effect is an effect of notifying the hit by the mode of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "4". This suggests that it is a "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot". Note that the stage of the hit notification effect is a state in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped, unlike the fixed stop effect. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, it is assumed that there is a hold corresponding to the first special figure hold corresponding to the hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), the sword operation promotion effect is executed. The sword operation promotion effect is an effect that promotes the operation of the sword member 65. Here, the sword image KG imitating the sword member 65 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the message image MG "push" is displayed. Here, when the player operates the sword member 65, the next effect is executed. Even if the player does not operate the sword member 65, the next effect is executed when the effective time for operating the sword member 65 elapses.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), the promotion effect (with pending reams) is executed. In the promotion effect (with pending ream), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "7". This means that what was notified as "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" was promoted to "16RV scheduled passing jackpot". Further, the message image MG "Next time also 777" is displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. This is to notify the pending ream, and also to notify that it is a "16RV passing jackpot". Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (E), the jackpot digestion effect A (first half) is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A (first half) is the first half of the effect of digesting the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the round ball RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Specifically, 16 round ball RBs are displayed on the left side of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the jackpot is 16 rounds. In addition, 16 round balls RB are also displayed on the right side of the ally character CRA. This indicates that the hit in the first special figure hold is 16 rounds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), the jackpot digestion effect A (second half) is executed. The jackpot digestion effect A (second half) is the latter half of the effect of digesting the jackpot. Here, too, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the round ball RB indicating the number of rounds of the jackpot game is displayed on both the left and right sides of the ally character CRA. Then, in the jackpot digestion effect A, the round ball RB on the left side of the ally character CRA is marked with a cross each time the round is digested. By marking all 16 round ball RBs on the left side of the ally character CRA with a cross, the jackpot is digested and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the jackpot digestion effect B is executed. The jackpot digestion effect B is an effect of digesting the pending ream. The jackpot digestion effect B is continuously executed with the screen of the jackpot digestion effect A. Then, in the jackpot digestion effect B, the round ball RB on the right side of the ally character CRA is marked with a cross each time the round is digested. By marking all 16 round ball RBs on the right side of the ally character CRA with a cross, the hit in the first special figure hold is digested, and the next effect is executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113 (H), the state notification effect is executed. The state notification effect notifies the game state. Here, the message image MG "I'm still going on!" Is displayed. This means that the next fluctuation changes to a probabilistic gaming state (high probability high base state).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character string decomposition effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "16RV planned jackpot" is won, the winning of the "16RV scheduled jackpot" is notified after pretending to be the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot". It is possible to carry out promotion effects. Further, in the promotion effect, when the holding station is set, it is notified that the holding station is held (FIGS. 111 (D), 112 (D), 113 (D)). According to this configuration, the player can be surprised and delighted, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" corresponds to "first advantageous game", "16RV scheduled passing jackpot" corresponds to "second advantageous game", and promotion production (with pending ream) Corresponding to "promotion effect", the first special figure hold corresponds to "hold memory", and the information notified by the promotion effect (with hold ream) corresponds to "winning information".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the promotion effect (with a hold station), only the hold station is notified (FIG. 111 (D)). According to this configuration, since the jackpot type is unknown at the stage of promotion production (with pending reams), it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the promotion effect (with hold ream), the player is notified that the ream is on hold, and either "16RV planned jackpot" or "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot". Notify the presence (FIG. 112 (D), FIG. 113 (D)). According to this configuration, since the jackpot type can be known at the stage of promotion production (with pending reams), it is possible to give the player a sense of happiness and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword operation promotion effect is executed, and when the sword member 65 is pushed by the player, the promotion effect (with hold ream) is executed (FIGS. 111 (C) (D), 112). (C) (D), FIGS. 113 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the player is likely to expect the operation of pushing the sword member 65, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, promotion to "16RV planned passing jackpot" is performed on the left screen of the display screen 7a, and holding is performed on the right screen of the display screen 7a (FIG. 111 (D), FIG. 112 (D)). Further, promotion to "16RV scheduled passage jackpot" is performed at the central portion of the display screen 7a, and holding is performed at the lower center of the display screen 7a (FIG. 113 (D)). According to this configuration, the promotion and the notification of the hold ream are performed in parallel on the display screen 7a, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the promotion hold continuous effects A and B, the left side area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the right side area of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area". Further, in the promotion hold continuous effect C, the central portion of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "first area", and the lower center of the display screen 7a corresponds to the "second area".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left screen and the right screen of the display screen 7a are separated by the first movable accessory 14 (FIGS. 111 (D) (E) (F), 112 (D) (E)). (F)). According to this configuration, the information on the display screen 7a is organized, and the movement of the first movable accessory 14 can surprise the player and improve the interest of the game. The first movable accessory 14 corresponds to the "movable accessory".

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the promotion pending continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the promotion effect (with hold ream) is executed before the jackpot game, but the promotion effect (with hold ream) may be executed during the jackpot game.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the sword operation promotion effect is executed to operate the sword member 65, but the effect button 63 may be operated.

[Modification 3]
The above is an example on the premise that there is a hold ream in the promotion effect, but if it is not a hold ream, in FIGS. 111 (D) and 112 (D), the right screen of the display screen 7a shows " It is conceivable to display a message image such as "Sorry". The same applies to FIG. 113 (D).
Alternatively, if it is not a hold ream, the presence or absence of the hold ream is not produced, and for example, it is conceivable to perform only the promotion effect at the center of the display screen 7a without moving the first movable accessory 14.

[Modification example 4]
The above is an example of the hold series of the first special figure hold, but the same can be applied to the hold series of the second special figure hold.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C4-1]
It is possible to hold the lottery to hold the lottery that is held when the ball enters a predetermined entrance, and if the lottery is won, the player will execute an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It ’s a game machine
The advantageous game includes a first advantageous game and a second advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous game.
When the second advantageous game is won, it is possible to execute a promotion effect for notifying the winning of the second advantageous game after pretending to have won the first advantageous game.
In the promotion effect, if there is a hold memory that has been won in the lottery in the hold memory when the promotion effect is executed, it is possible to execute a notification effect that notifies the winning information based on the winning.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1.
The winning information is information that there is a winning hold memory in the hold memory.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-1.
The winning information is information on which of the first advantageous game and the second advantageous game has been won because there is a winning reserved memory in the reserved memory.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3.
It also has an operation unit that can be operated by the player.
In the promotion effect, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified at the timing of the operation of the operation unit, and the winning information is notified.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4.
Equipped with a display device that can display images
In the promotion effect, the promotion to the second advantageous game is notified in the first area of the display screen of the display device, and the winning information is notified in the second area of the display screen of the display device.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C4-5.
Further equipped with movable accessories provided so that it can be moved
In the promotion effect, the first region and the second region are separated by the movable accessory.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation instruction display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116. This operation instruction display effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation instruction display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Operation instruction display effect A]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect A. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying an operation promotion image that urges the player to operate the operation means, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image is turned off and the operation of the operation means is stopped (stopped). It is an effect of displaying the operation promotion image again. In the operation instruction display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 114 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a, and then the reach mode is adopted. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", respectively, and become "3 ↓ 3". After that, the special production start image BKH notifying that the battle production as the special reach production is started is displayed. The display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the special reach effect is started, the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining the display. Temporarily stop at the position. “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining the display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, a ally character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the effect button 63. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "continuous hitting", and urges the player to operate (continuously press) the effect button 63. .. Here, a video in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight is displayed in response to the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the effect button 63 is operated (continuously hit) by the player, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears as shown in FIG. 114 (C). That is, since the player is operating the image, an image prompting the operation is not required. This makes it possible to show more battle images.

When the operation (continuous hitting) of the effect button 63 by the player is stopped while the battle image is displayed, the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND are displayed again as shown in FIG. 114 (D). Will be done. As a result, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 (continuous pressing) again. At this time, the progress of the image in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight may be interrupted, or may proceed as it is.

When the effect button 63 is operated (continuously hit) again by the player, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears again as shown in FIG. 114 (E). At this time, the progress of the interrupted battle video may be resumed.

FIG. 114 (F) shows the climax portion of the battle effect executed after the lapse of a predetermined time. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 63 is an invalid period. The button image BTN is displayed with overlapping images of "x" to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production proceeds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), the selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" is maintained. The selected images STG1 and STG2 are images including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by the operation of the operating means, and here, the first selected image STG1 represented as "continuous hitting (punch)" and Includes a second selection image STG2 labeled "long press (kick)". At this time, since the operation of the effect button 63 is invalid, even if it is operated by the player, the display screen 7a does not change in terms of the effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (H), when a predetermined time elapses, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears. When these displays disappear, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective, and the operation of selecting one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 becomes possible by the operation of the effect button 63. Here, the first selected image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the first selected image STG1 is changed.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 114 (I), the display of the second selected image STG2 that is not selected among the selected images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the selected first selected image STG1 is displayed. Remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (J), the button image BTN, the valid period image TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image showing the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar showing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "continuous hitting", and prompts the player to operate (continuously hit) the effect button 63. This operation promotion image RND corresponds to the selected content of the selected images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1 represented as "continuous hit (punch)" is selected, it is displayed as "continuous hit". When the second selection image STG2 represented by "long press (kick)" is selected, the operation promotion image RND is displayed as "long press". That is, the operation promotion image RND is a selection result image representing the selected option among the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (K), the effect that the ally character CRA wins against the enemy character CRB is executed. This effect is executed regardless of whether or not the player repeatedly hits the effect button 63. This notifies the jackpot. After that, as shown in FIG. 114 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode of "333".

[Operation instruction display effect B]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect B. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying the operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation promotion image is turned off when the operation means is operated, and the operation is promoted again when the operation of the operation means is stopped. It is an effect of displaying an image. FIGS. 115 (A) to 115 (D) of the operation instruction display effect B are the same as those of FIGS. 114 (B) to (E) of the operation instruction display effect A. That is, FIG. 115 (A) is executed after FIG. 114 (A) of the operation instruction display effect A.

In FIG. 115 (E), the climax portion of the battle effect is displayed. At this time, if the effect button 63 is operated (for example, repeatedly hit) by the player, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 63 is an invalid period. The button image BTN is displayed with overlapping images of "x" to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production proceeds.

When the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, repeated hitting) by the player is stopped, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears as shown in FIG. 115 (F). That is, since the player is not operating, there is no need for an image notifying that the operation is invalid. This makes it possible to show more of the climax part of the battle video.

When the effect button 63 is operated (for example, repeatedly hit) again by the player, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" are displayed again as shown in FIG. 115 (G). .. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production proceeds.

When the operation of the effect button 63 by the player (for example, repeated hitting) is stopped again, the display of the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappears as shown in FIG. 115 (H). .. That is, when the player operates the effect button 63, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are displayed, and when the operation of the effect button 63 is stopped, these displays disappear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (I), the selected images ST1 and ST2 are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are not displayed. The selected images STG1 and STG2 are images including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by the operation of the operating means, and here, the first selected image STG1 represented as "continuous hitting (punch)" and Includes a second selection image STG2 labeled "long press (kick)". By operating the effect button 63, it is possible to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2. Here, one of the selected display colors changes.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 115 (J), the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are displayed. As a result, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes invalid, and the selection of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 cannot be changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (K), the display of the second selected image STG2 that is not selected among the selected images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the display of the selected first selected image STG1 remains. After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (L), the button image BTN, the valid period image TBI, and the operation promotion image RND are displayed. The valid period image TBI is a meter image showing the valid period of the operation of the effect button 63, and is a so-called timer bar showing the passage of time by increasing the area of a specific color. The operation promotion image RND includes an arrow image indicating the operation direction (downward) with respect to the button image BTN and a character image of "continuous hitting", and prompts the player to operate (continuously hit) the effect button 63. This operation promotion image RND corresponds to the selected content of the selected images STG1 and STG2. Here, since the first selection image STG1 represented as "continuous hit (punch)" is selected, it is displayed as "continuous hit". When the second selection image STG2 represented by "long press (kick)" is selected, "long press" is displayed. That is, the operation promotion image RND is a selection result image representing the selected option among the options of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2.

FIG. 115 (L) is the same as FIG. 114 (J) of the operation instruction display effect A. After FIG. 115 (L), the same effect as in FIGS. 114 (K) and 114 (L) of the operation instruction display effect A is executed.

[Operation instruction display effect C]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the operation instruction display effect C. In the operation instruction display effect, after displaying the operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means, the display of the operation promotion image is turned off when the operation means is operated, and the operation is promoted again when the operation of the operation means is stopped. It is an effect of displaying an image. FIG. 116 (A) of the operation instruction display effect C is the same as FIG. 114 (A) of the operation instruction display effect A. That is, after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a, the reach mode is adopted. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "3", respectively, and become "3 ↓ 3". After that, the special production start image BKH notifying that the battle production as the special reach production is started is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 116 (B), when the special reach effect is started, the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is reduced and moves toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while maintaining the display. Temporarily stop at the position. “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R is reduced and moves toward the upper right of the display screen 7a while maintaining the display, and temporarily stops at that position. In the center of the display screen 7a, a friendly character CRA, an enemy character CRB, a meter image MG, a button image BTN, and an operation promotion image RND are displayed. The meter image MG shows the amount of energy required for the ally character CRA to perform a special move. Any object can be set as the target represented by the meter image MG. The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68. The operation promotion image RND includes a character image of "press and hold to charge", and urges the player to operate (long press) the select button 68. Here, of the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN, the color of the upper button has changed, informing the player that the upper button is pressed. In response to the player pressing and holding the upper button of the select button 68, the effect of charging the meter of the meter image MG is executed.

When the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed and held by the player, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears as shown in FIG. 116 (C). That is, since the player is operating the image, an image prompting the operation is not required. This makes it possible to show more battle images. Further, by pressing and holding the upper button of the recto button 68, the effect of charging the energy of the meter image MG is executed.

When the player stops pressing and holding the upper button of the select button 68 while the battle image is displayed, the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND are displayed again as shown in FIG. 116 (D). To. As a result, the player is urged to press and hold the upper button of the select button 68 again. At this time, an effect of reducing the energy of the meter image MG may be executed.

When the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed and held again by the player, the display of the button image BTN and the operation promotion image RND disappears again as shown in FIG. 116 (E). At this time, the effect that the energy of the meter image MG is increased (charged) again is executed.

FIG. 116 (F) shows a climax portion of the battle effect executed after a predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, when the upper button of the select button 68 is pressed and held, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN are displayed on the display screen 7a. The operation invalid image SMK is an image that notifies the player that the operation of the select button 68 is in the invalid period. The button image BTN is displayed with overlapping images of "x" to notify that the operation is invalid. In this state, the production of the climax part of the battle production proceeds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (G), after a lapse of a predetermined time, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN marked with "x" disappear, and the selected images ST1 and ST2 and the button image BTN are displayed. The selection promotion image NTK and is displayed. The selected images STG1 and STG2 are images including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player. Here, the first selected image STG1 represented as "punch" and "long press (kick)" are used. ) ”Is included in the second selection image STG2.

The button image BTN is an image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the select button 68 as described above. Here, the left and right buttons among the four buttons of the select button 68 represented by the button image BTN. The color of is changing, notifying the player to press the left or right button. The selection promotion image NTK includes a character image of "select", and the player selects one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2 by operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68. I'm urging you to do that. By operating the left and right buttons of the select button 68, it is possible to select one of the first selection image STG1 and the second selection image STG2. Here, the first selected image STG1 is selected, and the display color of the second selected image STG2 is changed.

After that, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 116 (H), the display of the second selected image STG2 that is not selected among the selected images STG1 and STG2 disappears, and the selected first selected image STG1 is displayed. Remains. The display of the button image BTN and the selection promotion image NTK is maintained. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (I), the display of the button image BTN and the selection promotion image NTK disappears. When the player operates the select button 68 in this state, the operation invalid image SMK and the button image BTN with "x" are displayed as shown in FIG. 116 (J). As a result, the player is notified that the operation of the select button 68 is in the invalid period.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (K), the effect that the ally character CRA is defeated against the enemy character CRB is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of "323" being lost.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation instruction display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (E), after displaying the operation promotion image RND that prompts the player to operate the operation means, the operation is promoted when the operation means is operated. When the display of the image is turned off and the operation of the operation means is stopped, the first effect of displaying the operation promotion image RND can be executed again. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 (F) and 114 (G), at least one of the operations of the operating means is invalid when the operating means are operated after the first effect. It is possible to execute the second effect of displaying the operation invalid image SMK indicating that. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 (G), in the second effect, a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operation means in the state where the operation invalid image SMK is displayed. A third effect of displaying the selected images STG1 and STG2 including the above can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114 (J), in the second effect, when the selected images STG1 and STG2 are displayed, they are included in the selected images STG1 and STG2 by the player. When one of the plurality of options is selected, a selection result image (operation promotion image RND) representing the selected option is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 115.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 114 (B) and 114 (D), in the first effect, an operation means image BTN that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the operation means is displayed together with the operation promotion image RND. Will be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 115 and 116.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the operation instruction display effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the operation instruction display effect A, in the climax portion of the battle effect shown in FIGS. 114 (F) and 114 (G), the operation invalid image SMK is displayed regardless of whether or not the effect button 63 is operated. However, the operation invalid image SMK may be configured so as to be displayed when the effect button 63 is being operated and not to be displayed when the effect button 63 is not being operated.

[Modification 2]
In the operation instruction display effects A and B, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, all the operations of the effect button 63 may be disabled, or only a specific operation (for example, repeated hits) is invalid. (For example, long press) may be valid. Similarly, in the operation instruction display effect C, when the operation invalid image SMK is displayed, the operation of all four buttons of the select button 68 may be disabled, or a specific button (for example, an up / down button) may be disabled. Only may be disabled and other operations (eg left and right buttons) may be enabled.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A22-1]
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
After displaying the operation promotion image, when the operation means is operated, the display of the operation promotion image is turned off, and when the operation of the operation means is stopped, the first effect of displaying the operation promotion image again is executed. Possible,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A22-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A22-1.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation invalid image indicating that at least one of the operations of the operation means is invalid.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect of displaying the operation invalid image when the operation means is being operated.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A22-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A22-2.
One of the plurality of types of images is a selection image including a plurality of options that can be selected by the player by operating the operating means.
In the second effect, it is possible to execute the third effect of displaying the selected image while displaying the operation invalid image.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A22-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A22-3.
In the second effect, when one of the plurality of options included in the selected image is selected by the player while the selected image is displayed, a selection result image representing the selected option is displayed. Is displayed,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A22-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A22-1 to A22-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates at least a part of the appearance of the operation means.
In the first effect, the operation means image is displayed together with the operation promotion image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The button special display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 117 to 119. This button special display effect is executed during the standby state (when the demo screen is displayed when the player is not playing), or during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the button special display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

The game machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a select button 68. The select button 68 is a cross-button type button provided with buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right, and the buttons on the top, bottom, left, and right of the select button 68 can independently accept the player's operation. That is, the sub-control board 90 can detect the player's operation (pressing) independently of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the select button 68 via the select button detection switch 68a.

[Button special display effect A]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect A. In the button special display effect A of FIG. 117, a standby effect, a decorative symbol variation effect, a mode change effect, and a non-changeable effect are performed. The decorative symbol variation effect, the mode change effect, and the non-changeable effect other than the standby effect are the effects in the same variation. In these effects with the same variation other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the button special display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 117 (A), a standby effect is performed. In this standby effect, when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time to play the game, that is, when the display screen 7a is the predetermined demonstration screen, the player has the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the select button image XL4, the select button compatible image XL4A, the effect button image XL5, and the effect button compatible image XL5A are displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button compatible image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is represented as "selection". The select button compatible image XL4A suggests that the display mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button compatible image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5 and is represented as “decision”. The effect button compatible image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode is determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 117 (A), "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1.

When the player fires the game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol variation is started, and as shown in FIG. 117 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect is produced. It is carried out. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Further, in the decorative pattern variation effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1 is continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a production to do. In the example of FIG. 117 (C), the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 117 (D), the immutable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, the mode non-changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4. The mode-unchangeable image XL6 is represented by a light and dark square with a cross, suggesting that the mode-suggesting image XL1 cannot be changed for a predetermined period (until the variation is completed in the present embodiment). In other words, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is invalid for a predetermined period (until the variation ends in the present embodiment).
After that, a reach effect is performed, an out-of-order symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed, and a jackpot game effect is performed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in each of the above-mentioned standby effect, decorative pattern variation effect, mode change effect, and non-changeable effect, but even if the modes are different in each effect. Good. For example, the size, color, shape, and the like of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation effect may be different.

[Button special display effect B]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect B. In the button special display effect B of FIG. 118, a standby effect, a decorative symbol variation effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, and a non-changeable effect are performed. The decorative symbol variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, and non-changeable effect other than the standby effect are effects in the same variation. In these effects with the same variation other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the button special display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), a standby effect is performed. In this standby effect, when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time to play the game, that is, when the display screen 7a is the predetermined demonstration screen, the player has the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, the select button compatible image XL4A, the effect button image XL5, and the effect button compatible image XL5A Is displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode is ON or OFF, which means that when the button image prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, the button auto mode is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63. It is an image to represent. The language suggestion image XL3 is an image suggesting the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, in the language suggestion image XL3, when the language is described as "English", the language mode is English, and English is partially or wholly used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button compatible image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is represented as "selection". The select button compatible image XL4A suggests that the display mode, the presence / absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button compatible image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5 and is represented as “decision”. The effect button compatible image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence / absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 118 (A), "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1, "auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggestion image XL3. It has been selected.

When the player launches the game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol variation is started, and as shown in FIG. 118 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect is produced. It is carried out. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Further, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed on the left side of the select button image XL4, that is, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to be associated with the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. The language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, that is, the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the lower button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a production to do. In the example of FIG. 118 (C), the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the language change effect, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68 to change the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a production to do. In the example of FIG. 118 (D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 is changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language represented by the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (E), the auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the auto button change effect, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, so that the button in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect of changing the ON or OFF of the auto mode. In the example of FIG. 118 (E), the button auto mode is changed from ON to OFF in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, which is “auto OFF”. When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, it is considered that the effect button 63 has been operated without operating the effect button 63, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 118 (F), the immutable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode-unchangeable image XL6 is represented by a light and dark square with a cross, and the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, or the language suggestion image XL3 is changed for a predetermined period (until the change ends in the present embodiment). ) Suggests that it cannot be done. In other words, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is invalid for a predetermined period (until the variation ends in the present embodiment).
After that, a reach effect is performed, an out-of-order symbol or a jackpot symbol is displayed, and a jackpot game effect is performed.

In each of the above-mentioned standby effect, decorative pattern variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, and non-changeable effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 , Select button image XL4 is displayed, but the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, and the like of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation effect may be different.

[Button special display effect C]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the button special display effect C. In the button special display effect C of FIG. 119, a standby effect, a decorative symbol variation effect, a mode change effect, a language change effect, an auto button change effect, a non-changeable effect, and super reach effects A to D are performed. The decorative symbol variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, non-changeable effect, and super reach effect A to D other than the standby effect are effects in the same variation. In these effects with the same variation other than the standby effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

In the button special display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), a standby effect is performed. In this standby effect, when the player has not operated the handle 60 for a predetermined period of time to play the game, that is, when the display screen 7a is the predetermined demonstration screen, the player has the select button 68 or the effect. This is an effect performed in response to pressing the button 63. In the standby effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, the select button compatible image XL4A, the effect button image XL5, and the effect button compatible image XL5A Is displayed.

The mode suggestion image XL1 is an image suggesting one display mode. The button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 indicates whether the button auto mode is ON or OFF, which means that when the button image prompting the pressing of the effect button 63 appears on the display screen 7a, the button auto mode is automatically pressed without pressing the effect button 63. It is an image to represent. The language suggestion image XL3 is an image suggesting the language used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. For example, in the language suggestion image XL3, when the language is described as "English", the language mode is English, and English is partially or wholly used in the display effect on the display screen 7a. The select button image XL4 is an image that imitates the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the operation of the select button 68. The select button compatible image XL4A is displayed on the right side of the select button image XL4 and is represented as "selection". The select button compatible image XL4A suggests that the display mode, the presence / absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode can be selected by operating the select button 68. The effect button image XL5 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that encourages the operation of the effect button 63. The effect button compatible image XL5A is displayed on the right side of the effect button image XL5 and is represented as “decision”. The effect button compatible image XL5A suggests that the selected display mode, the presence / absence of the button auto mode, and the language mode are determined by operating the effect button 63. In the example of FIG. 119 (A), "mode B" is selected for the mode suggestion image XL1, "auto ON" is selected for the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and "Japanese" is selected for the language suggestion image XL3. It has been selected.

When the player fires the game ball during standby and the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the special symbol variation is started, and as shown in FIG. 119 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect is produced. It is carried out. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a from the center to the right side of the display screen 7a and fluctuate in the vertical direction. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed at the lower left of the display screen 7a. In this case, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are displayed so as to be associated with the select button image XL4. Specifically, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed above the select button image XL4, that is, the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed so as to be associated with the upper button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. Further, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed on the left side of the select button image XL4, that is, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed so as to be associated with the left button of the cross button of the select button image XL4. The language suggestion image XL3 is displayed below the select button image XL4, that is, the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed so as to correspond to the lower button of the cross button of the select button image XL4.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (C), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the mode change effect, the player operates (presses) the upper button of the select button 68 to change the display mode in the mode suggestion image XL1 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a production to do. In the example of FIG. 119 (C), the mode suggestion image XL1 is changed to "mode C". When the display mode is changed to mode B in the mode suggestion image XL1, the display mode on the display screen 7a becomes mode B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (D), a language change effect is performed. In this language change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the language change effect, the player operates (presses) the lower button of the select button 68 to change the language mode in the language suggestion image XL3 even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. It is a production to do. In the example of FIG. 119 (D), the language mode of the language suggestion image XL3 is changed to "Chinese". When the language is changed to Chinese in the language suggestion image XL3, the language represented by the display screen 7a becomes Chinese.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (E), the auto button change effect is performed. In this auto button change effect, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, and the language suggestion image XL3 are continuously associated with the select button image XL4. Further, in the auto button change effect, the player operates (presses) the left button of the select button 68, so that the button in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed even though the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing. This is an effect of changing the ON or OFF of the auto mode. In the example of FIG. 119 (E), the button auto mode is changed from ON to OFF in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, which is “auto OFF”. When the button auto mode is changed to auto OFF in the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, it is considered that the effect button 63 has been operated without operating the effect button 63, and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (F), the immutable effect is executed. In this non-changeable effect, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 is displayed so as to hide the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4. The mode-unchangeable image XL6 is represented by a light and dark square with a cross, and the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, or the language suggestion image XL3 is changed for a predetermined period (until the change ends in the present embodiment). ) Suggests that it cannot be done. In other words, the mode changeable image XL6 suggests that the input of the select button 68 is invalid for a predetermined period (until the variation ends in the present embodiment).

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (G), the super reach effect A is performed. In this super reach effect A, while the mode changeable image XL6 is continuously displayed, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped at 7 symbols, and the decorative symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed to form a reach state. The effect button image XL7 is displayed. The effect button image XL7 is an image that imitates the effect button 63, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (H), the super reach effect B is performed. In this super reach effect B, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 is displayed, and the reach state by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continued, and the chance-up image XL8 is displayed when the player presses the effect button 63. To. This chance-up image XL8 is an image suggesting that the jackpot expectation has increased, and is described as "super hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (I), the super reach effect C is performed. In this super reach effect C, the mode-unchangeable image XL6 is displayed, and the reach state by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is continued, and the select button image XL9 is displayed. The select button image XL9 is an image that imitates the select button 68, and is an image that prompts the player to operate (press) the select button 68.

Next, as shown in FIG. 119 (J), the super reach effect D is performed. In this super reach effect D, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, are formed by the player operating one of the up, down, left, and right buttons of the select button 68 while the mode-changeable image XL6 is continuously displayed. The jackpot symbol of 7 symbols is displayed by 8R.
After that, a big hit game production is performed.

In the above-mentioned standby effect, decorative pattern variation effect, mode change effect, language change effect, auto button change effect, non-changeable effect, and super reach effects A to D, mode suggestion image XL1 and button auto presence / absence suggestion. The image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are displayed, but the mode may be different for each effect. For example, the size, color, shape, and the like of the mode suggestion image XL1 in the standby effect and the mode suggestion image XL1 in the decorative symbol variation effect may be different.

[Modification example]
In the button special display effects B to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may overlap with the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode changeable image XL6. There may be. In this case, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be arranged behind the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, the select button image XL4, and the mode changeable image XL6.
In the button special display effects B to C, the mode suggestion image XL1, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2, the language suggestion image XL3, and the select button image XL4 are associated with the hold display indicating the number of holds, and the display result of the special symbol. The lottery result indicating the above may be displayed. This hold display may consist only of numbers representing the number of holds. Further, the lottery result display may be displayed so as to have the same arrangement as the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. For example, if the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are "777", the lottery result display is also displayed as "777".

[Effect example]
In the button special display effects A to C, when the display mode is changed while the mode suggestion image XL1 and the select button image XL4 are displayed in association with each other in the mode change effect, the corresponding display mode is used. Change to the mode suggestion image XL1 of. According to this configuration, even when the display mode is changed, the mode suggestion image XL1 is associated with the select button image XL4, so that the player can change the mode suggestion image XL1 in order to change the mode suggestion image XL1. It can be easily recognized that XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects A to C, as shown in the non-changeable effect, there is a display mode non-changeable period in which the display mode cannot be changed after the display mode is changed. According to this configuration, after changing the display mode, a period during which the display mode cannot be changed is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by changing the display mode, and the display effect on the display screen 7a can be suppressed. Players can concentrate on. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects A to C, the non-changeable effect is performed after the mode change effect, and in the non-changeable effect, the mode changeable image XL6 is displayed so as to overlap the mode suggestion image XL1. According to this configuration, the player can quickly recognize that the display mode cannot be changed, and the player concentrates on the display effect on the display screen 7a without trying to change the display mode. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the language suggestion image XL3 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. According to this configuration, even when the language suggestion image XL3 is changed, the language suggestion image XL3 is associated with the select button image XL4, so that the player can select in order to change the language suggestion image XL3. It can be easily recognized that the button image XL4 should be used, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the button special display effects B to C, when the mode suggestion image XL1 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is displayed in association with the select button image XL4. .. According to this configuration, even when the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is changed, the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2 is associated with the select button image XL4, so that the player can display the button auto presence / absence suggestion image XL2. It can be easily recognized that the select button image XL4 may be used for the change, and the display mode can be quickly changed to a suitable one. As a result, the display mode can be changed smoothly, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XL-1]
A gaming machine having a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects and an operation means capable of operating the display means.
The display means can execute one of a plurality of display modes.
The display mode can be changed by operating the operation unit.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a display mode suggestion image suggesting one display mode and an operation means image representing the operation unit in association with each other.
In the second display effect, when the display mode is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode, the second display from the display mode suggestion image suggesting the first display mode. It is an effect of changing to the display mode suggestion image that suggests the mode.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed while the special symbol is changing.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XL-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XL-1.
After the second display effect in the combination effect is performed, there is a display mode changeable period during which the display mode cannot be changed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XL-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XL-2.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is an effect of displaying a display mode unchangeable image indicating that the display mode cannot be changed during the display mode unchangeable period.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the second display effect, and the display mode unchangeable image of the third display effect is displayed so as to overlap the display mode suggestion image. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XL-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XL-3.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The fourth display effect is an effect of displaying a language suggestion image suggesting a language used in the display in association with the operation means image.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect, and may include the fourth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XL-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XL-3 or the aspect XL-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying the operation means auto image suggesting that the operation of the operation means is automatic and the operation means image in association with each other.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect, and may include the fifth display effect.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.

The effect button enable / disable display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 120 to 122. In FIGS. 120 to 122, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.

This effect button enable / disable display effect is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the effect button enable / disable display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2.

Here, first, the effect button valid / invalid display effect A will be described, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect B and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C will be described in order.

[Effect button enable / disable display effect A]
The effect button enable / disable display effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the effect button enable / disable display effect A. The effect button enable / disable display effect A is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 120A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular shape as a variable display area of three decorative symbols (also referred to as a “variable region of the decorative symbol”) which is not shown. Three areas (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are provided. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started by the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of each fluctuation display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. To.

Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area to the lower side of the left variation display area 8 for the left decorative symbol 8L. The decorative symbol 8C is rotated from the upper side of the medium variable display area to the lower side of the medium variable display area, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed right variable. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the area to the lower side of the right variation display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display area. The lateral distance dimension of and the lateral distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have a bright red color and are even. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the size of the numbers "1" to "9" has a vertical distance dimension of about one-third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (medium fluctuation display area and right fluctuation display area). However, the lateral distance dimension is a normal size having a distance dimension of about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area (medium variation display area and right variation display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub fluctuation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is sub. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images that are arranged behind the variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be done.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged. As a result, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth. The hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium change display area which is the change area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the second hold display position Since 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the first consisting of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the medium fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position The hold icon 9A is not displayed on 9Ad. That is, there are three stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are Have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is on the front side. By arranging so as to be, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

For the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started all at once at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 120 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as left variable. The variable effect (variable display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is started to change the left variable display area from the upper side to the lower side (variable display), and the right decorative symbol 8R is started. The left fluctuation display area is changed from the upper side to the lower side, and the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (B), the left decorative symbol 8L that fluctuates the left fluctuating display area from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left fluctuating display area with the number "1" in the vertical direction. The display mode gradually moves slowly, and then the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the right fluctuation display area from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The display mode moves slowly in small steps in the direction, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "1") to form a reach. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C continues to be variablely displayed in the medium variable display area from the upper side to the lower side.

When the reach is formed and the effect button enable / disable display effect A is started as shown in FIG. 120 (C), the display screen is displayed from the outside of the lower side of the display screen 7a so that the flash FL draws a counterclockwise elliptical orbit. When it jumps into 7a, passes toward the right side of the display screen 7a, and jumps out to the outside of the right side of the display screen 7a, it jumps into the display screen 7a from the outside of the upper side of the display screen 7a again and stops near the center of the display screen 7a. It becomes an explosive display mode. Although the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, since the sub-variable region KSZ is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the flash FL covers the sub-variable region KSZ. Even after passing through, a part of the flash FL is covered by the sub-variable region KSZ.

When the flash FL stops near the center of the display screen 7a and explodes, as shown in FIG. 120 (D), the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is an unclear image (out-of-focus image (focus). Is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as an image)). Even if the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed as this unclear image (out-of-focus image (out of focus image)), it is displayed on the display screen 7a. Nothing is reflected in the production. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an unclear image (out-of-focus image (out of focus image)) is a period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is invalidated. The button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode in which the image is unclear (out-of-focus image (out of focus image)). In addition, in the effect button valid / invalid display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode (an out-of-focus image (out of focus image)) is referred to as an “operation invalid display mode”. ".

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (E), the effect button image BTN, which has been in the operation invalid display mode, is switched to a clear image (an in-focus image (focused image)). When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed as this clear image (in focus image (focused image)), the jackpot expectation is set high in advance. A friendly character CRA that suggests the development of a battle effect may be displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a, and the player presses the effect button 63 to affect the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. It may be reflected. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as a clear image (image in focus (image in focus)) is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is enabled. The effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which a clear image (a focused image (focused image)) is obtained. In the effect button enable / disable display effect A, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode (an in-focus image (focused image)) is referred to as an “operation valid display mode”. ".

After that, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation is valid display mode, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable region KSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are small left. The variable effect (variable display) by the decorative design, the small medium-sized decorative design, and the small right decorative design is continued without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (F), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 from the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Therefore, it advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a, and stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). In the state where the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation valid display mode (that is, the second movable accessory 15). Even if 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the active display mode of the effect button image BTN is continued). Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation effective display mode, so that the player can produce the effect. The pressing operation of the button 63 may reflect the influence on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 120 (G), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state in which the operation effective display mode remains. to continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 has returned from the advance position to the evacuation position (home position), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation effective display mode. The effect may be reflected on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation is valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 is in the retracted position from the advance position ( When returning to the home position) again, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again with the temporary stop display, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The interior decorative symbol 8C is displayed again, and the effect button enable / disable display effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (H), when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area), then, as shown in FIG. To be started. In the battle production, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production in which the degree of expectation is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are displayed from the display screen 7a. Disappear. In the battle effect, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable effect (variation) is performed by a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (Display) is continued without being temporarily stopped. Further, in the hold number display area HS, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are each displayed as the hold number (number).

When the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins in the battle production, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative symbol. 8R becomes the number "1" and is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "1"). , Will be out of order. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

If the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated in the battle production, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and after that, the jackpot game (Big hit production) is started. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Further, in FIG. 120 (H), the ally character CRA was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area), but the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area). If it is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 120 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is the number "1". The stop display (confirmed display) is made at the timing of, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and as a result of winning, a loss is displayed. It will be. In other words, if the ally character CRA is not displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area) in FIG. 120 (H), the loss is displayed as a result of winning without developing into a battle effect. It has become like.

Further, in FIGS. 120 (E) to 120 (G), the effect button image BTN is a clear image (an in-focus image (focused image)), but at this time, the effect button image BTN is clear. It may be in a state of color emission (for example, white emission). As bright color emission, the degree of expectation of hit may be suggested in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button enable / disable display effect B]
Next, the effect button enable / disable display effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the effect button enable / disable display effect B. The effect button enable / disable display effect B is performed during the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol.

First, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular shape as a variable display area (also referred to as a "variable area of the decorative symbol") of three decorative symbols (not shown). Three areas (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are provided. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started by the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of each fluctuation display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. To.

Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area to the lower side of the left variation display area 8 for the left decorative symbol 8L. The decorative symbol 8C is rotated from the upper side of the medium variable display area to the lower side of the medium variable display area, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed right variable. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the area to the lower side of the right variation display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display area. The lateral distance dimension of and the lateral distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have a bright red color and are even. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the size of the numbers "1" to "9" has a vertical distance dimension of about one-third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (medium fluctuation display area and right fluctuation display area). However, the lateral distance dimension is a normal size having a distance dimension of about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area (medium variation display area and right variation display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub fluctuation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is sub. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images that are arranged behind the variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be done.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged. As a result, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth. The hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium change display area which is the change area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the second hold display position Since 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the first consisting of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the medium fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position The hold icon 9A is not displayed on 9Ad. That is, there are three stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are Have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is on the front side. By arranging so as to be, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

For the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started all at once at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 121 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as left variable. The variation effect (variation display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is started to change the left variation display area from the upper side to the lower side (variation display), and the right decorative symbol 8R The left fluctuation display area is changed from the upper side to the lower side, and the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (B), the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C, and the left fluctuation display area is variablely displayed from the upper side to the lower side. The left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left variable display area with the number "5", and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction, and then the right variable display area is changed from the upper side to the lower side. The right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" in the center of the right variable display area, and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in small steps in the vertical direction. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol ( Here, the number "5") is used to form the reach. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C continues to be variablely displayed in the medium variable display area from the upper side to the lower side.

When the reach is formed and the effect button enable / disable display effect B is started, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 emits bright color (for example, white light). It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in the display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTN is arranged and displayed on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and further, the continuous hit image MG that tells the player that the effect button 63 is repeatedly hit is arranged on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The effect button image is displayed on the upper right of the BTN. When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode that emits bright colors, it suggests the development to a battle effect in which the jackpot expectation is set high in advance. The ally character CRA may be displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a, and the effect may be reflected on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the player pressing the effect button 63. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode that emits bright colors is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is enabled. In the effect button valid / invalid display effect B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits bright colors is referred to as an “operation valid display mode”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (D), the effect button image BTN, which has been the operation effective display mode, is switched to the inactive display mode in which dark color emission (for example, dark gray) is emitted. Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode that emits dark color, it is not reflected in the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode that emits dark color is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is invalidated. In the effect button valid / invalid display effect B, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode that emits dark light is referred to as an “operation invalid display mode”.

After that, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation invalid display mode is maintained, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable region KSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are small left. The variable effect (variable display) by the decorative design, the small medium-sized decorative design, and the small right decorative design is continued without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (E), an image in which the background image has seven colors (so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 retracts above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the position (home position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, advance position). Stop for about 5 seconds). In the state where the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation invalid display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation invalid display mode, so that the player can produce the effect. The pressing operation of the button 63 does not reflect any influence on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the jackpot has been confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 121 (F), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state in which the operation invalid display mode remains. to continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 has returned from the advance position to the evacuation position (home position), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation invalid display mode. No influence is reflected on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation is valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 is in the retracted position from the advance position ( When returning to the home position) again, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again with the temporary stop display, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The interior decorative symbol 8C is displayed again, and the effect button enable / disable display effect B ends.

After that, when the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (the center of the medium fluctuation display area) as shown in FIG. To be started. In the battle production, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production in which the degree of expectation is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are displayed from the display screen 7a. Disappear. In the battle effect, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable effect (variation) is performed by a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (Display) is continued without being temporarily stopped. Further, in the hold number display area HS, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are each displayed as the hold number (number).

In the battle production, as shown in FIG. 121 (I), when the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is displayed large on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, and FIG. 121 (J) ), The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "5"), and after that, the jackpot game (big hit production) is performed. To be started. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Although the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a part of the wing of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variable region KSZ in FIG. 121 (I). Even so, since the sub-variable region KSZ is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the wing of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA is covered by the sub-variable region KSZ. Further, although the above-mentioned hold number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the wing man-shaped ally character CRA moves and a part of the wing overlaps with the hold number display area HS. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the wings of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA is covered by the reserved number display area HS.

In the battle production, if the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "5"), and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

Further, the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 121 (E), and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium variation display area) in FIG. 121 (G). If not, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol. (Here, the number "5") is not aligned, and as a result of winning, a loss is displayed. In other words, the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 121 (E), and the ally character CRA is further located at the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area) in FIG. 121 (G). If it is not displayed, the loss is displayed as a result of winning without developing into a battle effect.

In addition, in FIG. 121 (C), the effect button image BTN was white as bright color emission, but the degree of expectation of hit may be suggested in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect button enable / disable display effect C]
Next, the effect button enable / disable display effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 122. FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the effect button enable / disable display effect C. The effect button enable / disable display effect C is performed based on the change of the hold icon due to the look-ahead effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 122A, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has a vertically long rectangular shape as a variable display area of three decorative symbols (also referred to as a “variable region of the decorative symbol”) which is not shown. Three areas (that is, an area in which the display screen 7a is divided into three equal parts in a row) are provided, and the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are provided. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started by the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of each fluctuation display area toward the lower side of the display screen 7a. To.

Specifically, the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the left variation display area to the lower side of the left variation display area 8 for the left decorative symbol 8L. The decorative symbol 8C is rotated from the upper side of the medium variable display area to the lower side of the medium variable display area, and the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed right variable. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side of the area to the lower side of the right variation display area. The vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area, the vertical distance dimension of the medium fluctuation display area, and the vertical distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same vertical distance dimension, and further, the horizontal distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display area. The lateral distance dimension of and the lateral distance dimension of the right fluctuation display area are the same lateral distance dimension.

In the variable production (variable display) of each decorative pattern, the number "1" → the number "2" → the number "3" → the number "4" → the number "5" → the number "6" → the number "7" → The variation effect (variation display) is performed in the display mode in which the reel rotates in the order of the number "8"-> the number "9"-> the number "1"-> the number "2"->.

Of the numbers "1" to "9", the numbers "1", the numbers "3", the numbers "5", and the numbers "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7", have a bright red color and are even. The numbers "2", the numbers "4", the numbers "6", and the numbers "8" have a bright blue color, and the numbers "7" have a yellow color (gold color). In addition, the size of the numbers "1" to "9" has a vertical distance dimension of about one-third of the vertical distance dimension of the left fluctuation display area (medium fluctuation display area and right fluctuation display area). However, the lateral distance dimension is a normal size having a distance dimension of about half of the lateral distance dimension of the left variation display area (medium variation display area and right variation display area). The numbers "1" to "9" are newly created special typefaces (created independently) that are different from existing typefaces (generally distributed typefaces) such as regular script, Gothic typeface, and Mincho typeface. It is formed by a special typeface).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed, and the display mode changes at high speed. .. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. A plurality of types of background images are prepared, and the background images are switched as appropriate.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. A sub-variable region KSZ having a horizontally long rectangular shape (variable display) is provided. The background image of the sub-variable region KSZ is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. Is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, so that it overlaps with the right fluctuation display area which is the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but the sub fluctuation area KSZ is arranged so as to be the frontmost side. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is arranged behind the sub-variable area KSZ, and the sub-variable area KSZ is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is sub. The sub-variable area KSZ is not obstructed by other effect images that are arranged behind the variable area KSZ. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area KSZ is obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R and other effect images. It is designed not to be done.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ. It is unified to another single color (for example, light color (yellow or white)) having a higher contrast than the single color, and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is arranged on the front side of the background image of the sub-variable region KSZ and is always in an opaque state. Even if the fluctuation is started, the small decorative pattern does not become semi-transparent and disappears from the display screen 7a. There is no.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not have a variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. A variable effect (variable display) is performed according to a display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region KSZ, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are started. The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, All small right decorative designs are also displayed as stopped.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Even in the state where is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration are displayed. All the symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative design and the small right-decorative design are aligned with the left decorative design 8L, the medium-decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special symbol hold, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The hold display position 9Ad is arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Since the variation display position 9Cd is arranged in the lower center of the display screen 7a and the first hold display position 9Ad is arranged on the left side of the variation display position 9Cd, the variation display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad Although it overlaps with the medium-variable display area which is the variable area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first reserved display position 9Ad, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is arranged. As a result, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad are not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold are caused by the other effect image. Although the display position 9Ad is not obstructed, when another effect image is arranged in front of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad, the variable display position 9Cd and the first effect image are arranged by the other effect image. The hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

Since the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad are the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L. Although it overlaps with the left variable display area, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad, and the left decorative symbol 8L causes the second reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth. The hold display position 9Ad is not blocked. However, when another effect image appears, if the other effect image is placed behind the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad to the second effect image is used by the other effect image. 4 If the hold display position 9Ad is not obstructed, but another effect image is placed in front of the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position is set by the other effect image. 9Ad to the 4th hold display position 9Ad will be blocked.

In this way, of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the first hold display position 9Ad overlaps with the medium change display area which is the change area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the second hold display position Since 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, the first consisting of the 1st reserved display position 9Ad to the 4th reserved display position 9Ad. The hold display area as a special figure hold is arranged so as to straddle the medium fluctuation display area and the left fluctuation display area.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position The hold icon 9A is not displayed on 9Ad. That is, there are three stocked icons that have not been digested. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 during the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

Further, on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, the first special figure is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 facing the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ (arranged on the same horizontal line). And the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, and the hold number display area HS having a horizontally long rectangular shape in which each is displayed as the hold number (number) are provided. The vertical distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the vertical distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ have the same distance dimension, and the horizontal distance dimension of the hold number display area HS and the horizontal distance dimension of the sub-variable area KSZ are Have the same distance dimension. That is, the shape of the hold number display area HS and the shape of the sub-variation area KSZ are the same.

Unlike the background image of the sub-variable area KSZ, the background image of the hold number display area HS is fixed to be colorless and transparent, and does not become opaque or change to another color. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the left variable display area which is the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L, but the reserved number display area HS is on the front side. By arranging so as to be, the left decorative symbol 8L is arranged behind the reserved number display area HS, the reserved number display area HS is not obstructed by the left decorative symbol 8L, and other effect images appear. However, other effect images are arranged behind the hold number display area HS, and the hold number display area HS is not blocked by the other effect images.

The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are different from the typeface of the small decorative pattern (for example, Gothic typeface). It is set to another single color having a higher contrast than the single color of the background image of the hold number display area HS, and does not change to another color. The number of 1st special figure hold (number of hold (number)) and the number of 2nd special figure hold (number of hold (number)) are arranged in front of the background image of the hold number display area HS and are always in an opaque state. It does not disappear from the display screen 7a. Specifically, the number of hold of the first special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is indicated by a blue number on the left side of the hold number display area HS, and the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21. The number of the second special figure hold based on the above is arranged in red numbers on the right side of the hold number display area HS so as to be separated from each other and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. That is, the visibility of the content displayed in the hold number display area HS is not hindered by other effect images. The blue color indicating the number of the first special figure pending is a color different from the bright blue color of the numbers "2", the number "4", the number "6", and the number "8" which are even symbols (same). (Not a color), but similar colors. The number of the second special figure hold is red, which is a color different from the bright red color of the numbers "1", "3", number "5", and number "9", which are odd numbers excluding the number "7". Although they are not the same color, they are similar in color.

Here, to briefly explain the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icon"), the difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of winning. , The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. The smile sphere icon is further set with a high degree of expectation that it will be hit in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich hit)).

For the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable effect (variable display) is started all at once at the same timing, and as shown in FIG. 122 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed as left variable. Fluctuation effect (variation display) is started from the upper side to the lower side of the area, and the middle decorative symbol 8C is started to change the left variation display area from the upper side to the lower side (variation display), and the right decorative symbol 8R The left fluctuation display area is changed from the upper side to the lower side, and the fluctuation effect (variation display) is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A, and the effect button enable / disable display effect. When C is started, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in an inactive display mode in which dark color emission (for example, dark gray) is emitted. In other words, the effect button enable / disable display effect C is based on the fact that the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A due to the look-ahead effect. Is started. Although the effect button image BTN displayed in this inactive display mode is arranged behind the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the effect button image BTN is visually recognized through the semi-transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variable effect (variable display). It is in a state where it can be done. The effect button 63 can display (appear) the ally character CRA, which suggests the development to a battle effect in which the jackpot expectation is set high in advance, on the display screen 7a. Even if the player presses the effect button 63 during the period when the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode that emits dark color, it is not reflected in the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the inactive display mode that emits dark color is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is invalidated. In the effect button valid / invalid display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an inactive display mode that emits dark light is referred to as an “operation invalid display mode”.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L that fluctuates the left fluctuating display area from the upper side to the lower side is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left fluctuating display area with the number "1" in the vertical direction. The display mode gradually moves slowly, and then the right decorative symbol 8R, which displays the right fluctuation display area in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3" in the center of the right fluctuation display area. The display mode gradually moves in small steps, and then the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which displays the medium fluctuation display area in a variable manner from the upper side to the lower side, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the medium fluctuation display area with the number "2". Then, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) all at once at the same timing and are not aligned with the same symbol, resulting in a loss. At this time, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the fluctuation ends. Also here, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the state in which the operation invalid display mode is maintained.

After that, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C (at this time, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad changes. The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad.), As shown in FIG. 122 (D), the left decorative symbol 8L When the variable effect (variable display) by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, the effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 emits bright color (for example, white light) on the display screen in an active display mode. It is displayed in the center of 7a. When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode that emits bright colors, it suggests the development to a battle effect in which the jackpot expectation is set high in advance. The ally character CRA may be displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a, and the effect may be reflected on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the player pressing the effect button 63. In other words, the period during which the effect button image BTN is displayed as the active display mode that emits bright colors is the period during which the pressing operation of the effect button 63 is enabled. In the effect button valid / invalid display effect C, the display mode in which the effect button image BTN is displayed as an active display mode in which the effect button image BTN emits bright colors is referred to as an “operation valid display mode”.

Even if the effect button image BTN is switched from the operation invalid display mode to the operation valid display mode, the effect button image BTN is still arranged behind the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, but the variable effect (variable display) is maintained. ) The effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern 8C inside.

After that, the left decorative symbol 8L, which fluctuates from the upper side to the lower side of the left fluctuating display area, is temporarily stopped and displayed at the center of the left fluctuating display area with the number "7", and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. After that, the right decorative symbol 8R that fluctuates from the upper side to the lower side of the right fluctuating display area is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7" in the center of the right fluctuating display area, and the display mode is such that it moves slowly in the vertical direction. , The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "7") to form a reach. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C continues to be variablely displayed in the medium variable display area from the upper side to the lower side. Also here, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the state in which the operation valid display mode is maintained.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 122 (E), the effect button image BTN is arranged and displayed on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and further informs the player that the effect button 63 is repeatedly hit. The continuous hit image MG is arranged on the front side of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and is displayed on the upper right of the effect button image BTN.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (F), the effect button image BTN that was in the operation valid display mode is switched to the operation invalid display mode again. After that, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation invalid display mode is maintained, and the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. At this time, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in the variable effect (variable display) also disappears from the display screen 7a, but in the sub-variable region KSZ, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are small left. The variable effect (variable display) by the decorative design, the small medium-sized decorative design, and the small right decorative design is continued without being temporarily stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (G), an image in which the background image has seven colors (so-called “rainbow image”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 retracts above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the position (home position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, advance position). Stop for about 5 seconds). In the state where the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. Become. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN. Even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation invalid display mode. Of course, even if the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation invalid display mode, so that the player can produce the effect. The pressing operation of the button 63 does not reflect any influence on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. The rainbow image is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the jackpot has been confirmed.

After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the evacuation position (home position) again, and as shown in FIG. 122 (H), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state in which the operation invalid display mode remains. to continue. Of course, even when the second movable accessory 15 has returned from the advance position to the evacuation position (home position), the effect button image BTN is displayed in the operation invalid display mode. No influence is reflected on the effect displayed on the display screen 7a by the pressing operation of the effect button 63 by the player.

When the player presses the effect button 63 while the effect button image BTN is displayed in the state where the operation is valid display mode, the second movable accessory 15 is in the retracted position from the advance position ( When returning to the home position) again, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed again with the temporary stop display, and the effect button image BTN disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) is in progress. The interior decorative symbol 8C is displayed again, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (I), unlike the normal ally character CRA, the wing man-shaped ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area) and becomes large. When it is displayed, as shown in FIG. 122 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and it becomes a big hit. After that, the jackpot game (big hit production) is started. That is, unlike the normal ally character CRA, when the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man is suddenly displayed, the big hit is displayed as a result of winning without starting the battle effect.

When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Although the above-mentioned sub-variable region KSZ is provided on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, in FIG. 122 (I), a part of the wing of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA overlaps with the sub-variable region KSZ. Even so, since the sub-variable region KSZ is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the wing of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA is covered by the sub-variable region KSZ. Further, although the above-mentioned hold number display area HS is provided on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, even if the wing man-shaped ally character CRA moves and a part of the wing overlaps with the hold number display area HS. Since the reserved number display area HS is arranged on the foremost side, a part of the wings of the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA is covered by the reserved number display area HS.

In FIG. 122 (I), the ally character CRA in the form of a wing man suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed in a large size, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (center of the medium fluctuation display area). Then, after that, the battle production is started. In the battle production, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. It is a production in which the degree of expectation is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R disappear from the display screen 7a again, and the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are displayed from the display screen 7a. Disappear. In the battle effect, in the sub-variable area KSZ, a variable effect (variation) is performed by a small left decorative symbol, a small medium decorative symbol, and a small right decorative symbol corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. (Display) is continued without being temporarily stopped. Further, in the hold number display area HS, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are each displayed as the hold number (number).

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and the jackpot is hit. After that, the jackpot game (big hit production) is started. When the jackpot is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the variation. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. (Variable display) will be started.

Further, in FIG. 122 (G), the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 122 (I), the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA suddenly appears on the display screen 7a and is not displayed large. In this case, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbol ( Here, the numbers "7") are not aligned, and as a result of winning, a loss is displayed. In other words, when the rainbow background image is not displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a in FIG. 122 (G) and the wing-human-shaped ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 122 (I). As a result of winning, the loss is displayed without developing into a battle production.

In addition, in FIGS. 122 (D) and 122 (E), the effect button image BTN was white as bright color emission, but even if the expected degree of hit is suggested in the order of white → blue → red → yellow. Good. In this way, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the bright color emission of the effect button image BTN.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the effect button enable / disable display effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the player can operate the effect button valid / invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C in FIG. 122. Effect button 63 (operation means), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a second movable accessory that can be moved to a predetermined position in front of the image display device 7 (display means). The second movable accessory 15 (movable body) advances from the retracted position with 15 (movable body) and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) displayed. When moved to the position, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) overlap in the front-rear direction (FIG. 120 (F) in the effect button valid / invalid display effect A). It is possible to execute FIG. 121 (E) in the effect button valid / invalid display effect B and FIG. 122 (G) in the effect button enable / invalid display effect C. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed. , The second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), and the effect button image BTN (operation means image) that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63 (operation means). Since it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort that the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is purposely covered, it is possible to provide the player with such a discomforting effect as a novel effect that has never existed before. .. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect) in the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122. FIG. 120 (F) for the button valid / invalid display effect A, FIG. 121 (E) for the effect button valid / invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122 (G) for the effect button valid / invalid display effect C) is the second movable accessory 15 ( When the movable body) moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). According to this configuration, although the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) covers the effect button image BTN (operation means image), the entire effect button image BTN (operation means image) is covered by the second movable accessory 15 (movable). Since a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be visually recognized without covering it with the body), the presence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) causes other parts. It can contribute to making the player expect the development of the production.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect (effect) in the effect button valid / invalid display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C in FIG. 122. The second movable accessory 15 (FIG. 120 (G) in the button valid / invalid display effect A, FIG. 121 (F) in the effect button enable / invalid display effect B, and FIG. 122 (H) in the effect button enable / invalid display effect C) is shown. The display of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be continued even when the movable body) has moved from the advance position to the retracted position. According to this configuration, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is continuously displayed even when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is moved from the advance position to the retracted position, so that the effect button image is displayed. The existence of BTN (operation means image) can be made more uncomfortable.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the image display device 7 ( The display means) can variablely display the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) among a plurality of types of images, and the first effect (effect button valid / invalid display effect) can be displayed. In A, the effect button is valid and invalid during the effect progressing from FIG. 120 (F) to FIG. 120 (G). In the effect B, the effect button is valid and invalid during the effect progressing from FIG. 121 (D) to FIG. 121 (E). In the display effect C, the effect of progressing from FIG. 122 (F) to FIG. 122 (G)) is a variable effect (in the middle of the effect) before the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a plurality of decorative symbols) in the variable display) can be hidden. According to this configuration, by the time the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right during the variation effect (variation display) have already been started. While the decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) is hidden, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is continuously displayed, so that the player's line of sight is naturally produced. The effect button image BTN (operation). The effect button image BTN (operation means image) can be noticed by pointing to the means image). As a result, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) in the variable effect (variable display) are absent, whereas the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed. The effect button image BTN (operation means image) that exists can be produced with a conspicuous sense of incongruity.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122 (FIGS. 122 (B) to (H) in the effect button valid / invalid display effect C) is a left decorative symbol. Variable display of the variable icon 9C by 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) and the yellow (gold) star-shaped reserved icon 9A displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad (multiple times) It is possible to execute across the variable display). According to this configuration, since the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the existence of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). it can.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the effect button valid / invalid display effect B in FIG. 121 and the effect button enable / invalid display effect C in FIG. 122 (in the effect button enable / invalid display effect B, FIG. 121 (D). ), Effect button valid / invalid display In the effect C, FIG. 122 (F)) shows the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) before the time when the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts to move. From the operation valid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is valid to the operation invalid display mode suggesting that the operation of the effect button 63 (operation means) is invalid. It can be switched. According to this configuration, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is changed from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display by the time the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position. Since the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is displayed after switching to the mode, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a feeling of expectation that the effect will develop into another effect.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the effect button enable / disable display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. It was to be done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is advanced from the retracted position. When moving to, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) can cover a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image). That is, a part of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is covered with the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the advance position. Was there. However, the select button 68 may be used instead of the effect button 63. In this case, a select button image (operation means image) imitating the select button 68 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and corresponds to at least one of the up button, right button, down button, and left button of the select button 68. The select button image (operation means image) to be used may be covered with the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that has advanced to the advance position.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button enable / disable display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button enable / disable display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button enable / disable display effect C of FIG. The means) was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. However, if a part of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body), the position is different from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means). It may be displayed.

[Modification example 4]
In the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is moved to the retracted position and the advanced position. It may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) so that a part of the effect button image BTN is covered by the arm member that reciprocates the and.

[Modification 5]
In the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is advanced from the retracted position. By the time the movement starts to, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) has already been switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode. However, when the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is switched from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display mode. May be good. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued. Further, when the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing, the display mode of the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is changed from the operation valid display mode to the operation invalid display when the temporary stop is performed. You may switch to the mode. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is continued.

[Modification 6]
In the effect button valid / invalid display effect A of FIG. 120, the effect button valid / invalid display effect B of FIG. 121, and the effect button valid / invalid display effect C of FIG. 122, the effect button image BTN (operation means image) is the operation valid display mode. It is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) in the as-is state, and by pressing the effect button 63 by the player, the development to a battle effect in which the jackpot expectation is set high in advance is developed. The suggesting ally character CRA may be displayed (appeared) on the display screen 7a. However, by pressing the effect button 63 by the player, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is placed in the retracted position (home) above the image display device 7 instead of the ally character CRA, which suggests the development to the battle effect. From the stationary state at the position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). ) May be stopped. In this case, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advance position and stops, the second movable accessory 15 covers the effect button image BTN, and the lower portion of the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized. It will be ready. In other words, the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN. Even when the second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the effect button image BTN, the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode. After that, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, and the effect button image BTN continues to be displayed in the operation effective display mode.

[Modification 7]
In the effect button enable / disable display effect C of FIG. 122, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. In addition, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the decorative symbol is varied. In (variation display), it was assumed that the game ball did not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. However, instead of this, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad during the change effect (variation display) by the change icon 9C. , The effect button enable / disable display effect C may be performed based on the display of the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect. In this case, when the effect button enable / disable display effect C is started during the current variation effect (variation display) by the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A at the fourth hold display position 9Ad becomes the change icon 9C. Therefore, even during the variable effect (variable display), the effect button valid / invalid display effect C is continuously performed. In this way, the effect button enable / disable display effect C can be performed over a plurality of variable displays by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol (plural decorative symbols). When the effect button enable / disable display effect C is started, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B) to (E), the effect button image BTN is displayed with the intermediate decoration until the intermediate decoration symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the state of being arranged behind the symbol 8C is maintained, the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variation effect (variation display).

[Modification 8]
In the effect button enable / disable display effect C of FIG. 122, the white spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad is changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A by the look-ahead effect. It was done. However, regardless of the look-ahead effect, during the variation effect (variation display) by any of the variation icons 9C, the start of the effect button valid / invalid display effect C is determined by, for example, a lottery process on the sub control board 90 itself, and the predetermined state The effect button valid / invalid display effect C may be performed across the variable display of times (for example, 2 to 10 times). At this time, when the effect button enable / disable display effect C is started, as shown in FIGS. 122 (B) to (E), the effect button image BTN remains medium until the intermediate decorative symbol 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the state of being arranged behind the decorative symbol 8C is maintained, the effect button image BTN can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent intermediate decorative symbol 8C during the variable effect (variable display).

[Modification 9]
The effect button enable / disable display effect A in FIG. 120, the effect button enable / disable display effect B in FIG. 121, and the effect button enable / disable display effect C in FIG. 122 may not include a part of the described effects, or the like. The production of is may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D3-1]
A gaming machine including an operation means that can be operated by a player, a display means that can display a plurality of types of images, and a movable body that can move to a predetermined position in front of the display means.
When the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position while the operating means image imitating the operating means is displayed, it is possible to execute the first effect in which the movable body and the operating means image overlap in the front-rear direction. is there,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1.
In the first effect, when the movable body moves from the retracted position to the advanced position, the movable body covers a part of the operating means image.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-1 or aspect D3-2.
In the first effect, the display of the operation means image is continued even when the movable body is moved from the advance position to the retracted position.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-3.
The display means can variablely display a plurality of decorative patterns among the plurality of types of images.
In the first effect, the plurality of decorative symbols in the variable display are hidden before the movable body starts moving from the retracted position to the advanced position.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect D3-4.
The first effect can be executed over a plurality of variable displays by the plurality of decorative symbols.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D3-1 to D3-5.
The first effect is the display mode of the operation means image before the time when the movable body starts to move is described from the operation effective display mode suggesting that the operation of the operation means is effective. Switch to the operation invalid display mode that suggests that the operation of the operation means is invalid.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation automation effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. This operation automation effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation automation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation automation effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the operation automation effect A.
In the operation automation effect A, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, a predetermined effect is performed assuming that the effect button 63 has been pressed.

First, as shown in FIG. 123 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123C, the operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MG "press" is displayed. Further, here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white (normal color). Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is large). When the player operates the effect button 63 in this state, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (D), the animation image display effect (initial) is executed. In the animation image display effect (initial), the game ball image KG is framed in from the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressing surface (upper surface) shown by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. To do. At this time as well, the message image MG of "press" is displayed. The game ball image KG is white (normal color).

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (E), the animation image display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the animation image display effect (mid-term), the game ball image KG collides with the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG, and then, as shown by the arrow Y, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG. It bounces off and moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is an image in which the effect button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is small) due to the collision of the game ball image KG. At this time as well, the message image MG of "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (F), the animation image display effect (late stage) is executed. In the animation image display production (late stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left portion of the display screen 7a and is framed out. At this time, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is large). At this time as well, the message image MG of "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (G), the winning confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the confirmation of the hit. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around the ally character CRA. As a result, the player knows that the effect pattern is a hit before being doublet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 123 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet and are fixedly stopped. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5".

Whether or not to execute the animation image display effect (FIGS. 123 (D) to (F)) after the operation promotion effect (FIG. 123 (C)) is stored as setting information in the sub RAM 94 of the game machine 1. Has been done. This setting information is configured to be set using, for example, the select button 68. Of course, it may be configured to be set by using the effect button 63, the sword member 65, or the like. Specifically, by pressing a predetermined key of the select button 68, the animation image display effect is switched on and off. That is, when the animation image display effect is on, the animation image display effect shown in FIGS. 123 (D) to 123 (F) is executed. The operation automation effect A is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on. On the other hand, when the animation image display effect is off, the hit confirmation effect of FIG. 123 (G) is executed after the operation promotion effect of FIG. 123 (C). In this case, pressing the effect button 63 of the player in the operation promotion effect of FIG. 123 (C) is effective.

[Operation automation effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the operation automation effect B.
In the operation automation effect B, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, a predetermined effect is performed assuming that the effect button 63 has been pressed. Similar to the operation automation effect A described above, this is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on.

First, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. Here, in particular, the image T1 "automatic" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation image display effect is executed (the same applies to (B) to (H) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (C), the operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MG "press" is displayed. Here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is red. Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is large). When the player operates the effect button 63 in this state, the operation of the effect button 63 becomes invalid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (D), the animation image display effect (initial) is executed. In the animation image display effect (initial), the game ball image KG is framed in from the upper right part of the display screen 7a, and then moves toward the pressing surface (upper surface) shown by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. To do. At this time as well, the message image MG of "press" is displayed. The game ball image KG is red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (E), the animation image display effect (mid-term) is executed. In the animation image display effect (mid-term), the game ball image KG collides with the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG, and then, as shown by the arrow Y, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG. It bounces off and moves toward the upper left part of the display screen 7a. Here, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is small) due to the collision of the game ball image KG. At this time as well, the message image MG of "press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (F), the animation image display effect (late stage) is executed. In the animation image display production (late stage), the game ball image KG moves toward the upper left portion of the display screen 7a and is framed out. At this time, the button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is large).

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (G), the hit confirmation effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the confirmation of the hit. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and a rainbow-colored effect is displayed around the ally character CRA. As a result, the player knows that the effect pattern is a hit before being doublet.

Next, as shown in FIG. 124 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are doublet and are fixedly stopped. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5".

In the operation automation effect B, the image T1 "automatic" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, so that it is easy to understand that the animation image display effect is executed. Further, the button pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG and the game ball image KG were "red". The button pressing surface and the display color of the game ball image are set based on the hit expectation. For example, the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold. Therefore, the operation automation effect B has a higher degree of expectation of hitting than the operation automation effect A.

[Operation automation effect C]
FIGS. 125 (A) to 125 (D) are diagrams for explaining the operation automation effect C.
The operation automation effect C is an example in which the animation image display effect is turned on by the setting information, but there is a right-handed instruction. When there is a right-handed instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state), the animation image display effect is not executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. In particular, the image T2 "manual" is displayed in the upper right portion of the display screen 7a. This indicates that the animation image display effect is not executed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below). At the lower left of the display screen 7a, a "right-handed" display is displayed (the same applies to (B) to (D) below).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same numerical value. Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". The medium effect symbol 8C fluctuates at high speed. Here, too, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (C), the operation promotion effect is executed. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the effect button 63. Here, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MG "press" is displayed. Here, the pressing surface (upper surface) shown in the button image BG is white. Note that this button image BG is an image in a state in which the effect button 63 is not pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is large).

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost and the final stop is performed. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "6".

In the operation automation effect C, the image T2 "manual" is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen 7a, so that it is easy to understand that the animation image display effect is not executed.

In the above animation image display effect, the game ball image KG collides with the button image BG to operate the button shown in the button image BG only once. On the other hand, an animation image display effect corresponding to various operations of the effect button 63 may be executed.

FIGS. 125 (E) and 125 (F) are animation image display effects corresponding to the “long press” of the effect button 63.
As shown in FIG. 125 (E), the animation image display effect (long press 1) is executed. In the animation image display effect (long press 1), the large game ball image KG is framed in from the upper center of the display screen 7a and faces the button pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. It is a production that moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (F), the animation image display effect (long press 2) is executed. The animation image display effect (long press 2) is an effect in which the large game ball image KG comes into contact with the button pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG and stops. At this time, when the game ball image KG is pressed, the button image BG is in a state of being pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is small).

FIGS. 125 (G) and 125 (H) are animation image display effects corresponding to the “continuous hitting” of the effect buttons 63.
As shown in FIG. 125 (G), the animation image display effect (continuous hitting 1) is executed. In the animation image display effect (continuous hit 1), the game ball image KG frames in from the upper center of the display screen and moves toward the button pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG as indicated by the arrow Y. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125 (H), the animation image display effect (continuous hitting 2) is executed. The animation image display effect (continuous hitting 2) is an effect in which the game ball image KG collides with the button pressing surface (upper surface) indicated by the button image BG and bounces off. At this time, due to the collision of the game ball image KG, the button image BG is in a state in which the effect button 63 is pressed (a state in which the protruding portion is small).

After that, by alternately executing the animation image display effect (continuous hitting 1) of FIG. 125 (G) and the animation image display effect (continuous hitting 2) of FIG. 125 (H), the pressing surface (pressed surface) shown in the button image BG. The collision of the game ball image KG with respect to the upper surface) is repeated.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation automation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and an operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 63 is executed (FIG. 123 (C), FIG. 124 (C), FIG. 125 (C)). After that, an animation image showing how the button image BG is operated is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and then the hit confirmation effect is executed assuming that the effect button 63 is operated (FIGS. 123 (D) (FIG. 123 (D)). E) (F) (G), FIGS. 124 (D) (E) (F) (G)). According to this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be automated, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation unit", the button image BG corresponds to the "operation unit image", the operation promotion effect corresponds to the "first effect", and the animation image display effect corresponds to the "second effect". Corresponding to, the winning confirmation effect corresponds to the "predetermined effect".
The operation unit may be a sword member 65 or a select button 68 as long as it can be operated by the player.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the animation image display effect is executed based on the setting information set from the outside. According to this configuration, the player can automate the operation of the effect button 63 by setting the setting information using, for example, the select button 68, and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, even if the animation image display effect is turned on by the setting information, the animation image display effect is executed when there is a right-handed instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state). Not done. According to this configuration, in a specific case, the player can operate the effect button 63, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is executed, the "automatic" image T1 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen (FIGS. 124 (A) to 124 (H)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect is executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. The "automatic" image T1 corresponds to the "display of the first aspect indicating that the permission period is reached".

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is not executed, the "manual" image T2 is displayed in the upper right part of the display screen (FIGS. 125 (A) to 125 (D)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the animation image display effect is not executed, and the interest of the game can be improved. The "manual" image T2 corresponds to the "display of the second aspect indicating that the prohibited period is in effect".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the animation image display effect is executed, the operation of the player on the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect is invalid. According to this configuration, the animation image display effect is executed regardless of whether or not the effect button 63 is operated by the player, and the predetermined effect is executed assuming that the effect button 63 is operated, so that the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation automation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the display colors of both the button image BG and the game ball image KG are changed based on the degree of expectation for hitting.
On the other hand, the display color of at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed based on the degree of expectation for hitting. Further, not only the display color but also at least one of the button image BG and the game ball image KG may be changed in its display mode based on the degree of expectation for hitting. For example, it is conceivable to display a luxurious button image BG as compared with the normal button image BG.

[Modification 2]
In the above, even if the animation image display effect is turned on by the setting information, the animation image display effect is not executed when there is a right-handed instruction (high accuracy high base state, low accuracy high base state). ..
The conditions for not executing the animation image display effect are not limited to this. For example, in one fluctuation, the animation image display effect is executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the chance-up effect in the middle, and the animation image display effect is not executed for the operation of the effect button 63 in the final decision effect. Is.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the images T1 and T2 of "automatic" and "manual" are displayed for the execution / non-execution of the animation image display effect. Any image may be used to represent the execution / non-execution of such an animation image display effect. It may be auto or manual, or a symbol corresponding to automatic or manual may be used. In addition, since it is only necessary to know whether or not the animation image display effect is executed, some image is displayed only when the animation image display effect is executed, and the image is not displayed when the animation image display effect is not executed. You may do so.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect D4-1]
A display device that displays images and
Equipped with an operation unit that can be operated by the player
A gaming machine capable of executing a predetermined effect based on the operation of the operation unit.
A first effect of displaying an image of the operation unit imitating the operation unit on the display device and urging the player to operate the operation unit.
After the first effect, after displaying the image of the operation unit showing the operated mode on the display device, the second effect of executing the predetermined effect is executed, assuming that the operation unit has been operated. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-1.
Whether or not to execute the second effect is determined based on the setting information set from the outside.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D4-2.
Regardless of the setting information, the execution of the second effect is prohibited in a specific period.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3.
During the permission period in which the execution of the second effect is permitted, the display device is displayed with the first aspect indicating that the permission period is reached.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-4.
During the prohibited period in which the execution of the second effect is prohibited, the display device is displayed in the second aspect indicating that the prohibited period is in effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-5.
During the permission period during which the execution of the second effect is permitted, the operation of the operation unit by the player during the first effect becomes invalid.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6.
After waiting for the operation of the operation unit by the player in the first effect for a predetermined time, the second effect is executed when there is no operation of the operation unit by the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 will be described below with reference to FIG. 126, and the double accessory effects A to B will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 128. In FIGS. 127 to 128, the display effect on the display screen 7a is shown on the left side, and the relationship between the frame movable accessory 69 and the handle 60 is shown on the right side. This double character effect is executed while the gaming state is in a normal state, a time saving state (low accuracy low base state), or a probability variation state (high accuracy high base state), such as during a variation effect of a decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the double accessory effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69. FIG. 126 (A) describes the first movable accessory 14, and FIG. 126 (B) describes the frame movable accessory 69.
As shown in FIG. 126 (A), when the first movable accessory 14 is movable, the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right (in the direction of the arrow in the figure) from the retracted position located on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advanced position. Moving.
The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in a space inside the frame (see FIG. 1) formed by the game machine frame 50 and the game board 2.

The handle 60 of the game machine 1 includes a button XMM. This button XMM has a button detection switch (not shown) and is connected to the main control board 80 via a launch control circuit 111 and a payout control board 110. When the button XMM is operated, the main control board 80 transmits the button operation information to the sub control board 90 side. As a result, it is possible to display a button image imitating the button XMM on the display screen 7a and perform a button effect in which a predetermined display effect is performed by operating the button XMM. On the handle 60, the button operation of the button XMM is performed, for example, by the player pressing the button XMM to the right with the thumb of the right hand. Therefore, the operation direction of the button XMM is to the right as shown in the figure.
As shown in FIG. 126 (B), the frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a left side member and a right side member, and when the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position, the frame movable accessory 69 is combined with the left side member of the frame movable accessory 69. The right member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged so as to sandwich the handle 60. That is, the left member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged on an extension line in the direction opposite to the operation direction (right direction) of the button XMM (left direction) with respect to the button XMM, and the right member of the frame movable accessory 69 is arranged. , Is arranged on the extension line of the operation direction (right direction) of the button XMM with respect to the button XMM.
When the frame movable accessory 69 moves to the advanced position, it moves in the direction toward the handle 60 as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Specifically, the frame movable accessory 69 arranged on the left side of the handle 60 moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 arranged on the right side of the handle 60 moves to the left. FIG. 49 shows a state when the frame movable accessory 69 is movable and moved to the advance position.
When the player holds his hand on the handle 60 and touches the button XMM, when the frame movable accessory 69 moves to the advance position, the frame movable accessory 69 touches the player's hand. ..
When the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 perform the movable effect, the operation direction of the button XMM, the moving direction of the first movable accessory 14, and the frame movable accessory 69 on the left side of the handle 60 The direction of movement is the same.

[Double character production A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the double accessory effect A. The double character effect A in FIG. 127 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double accessory effect A, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 127 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction at the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 127 (A), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In the decorative symbol special variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 127 (B), the reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is located near the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed large. Further, in the reach effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 127 (B), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. The player can frequently operate the button XMM in the operation direction (right direction) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up effect when the player is in the reach state. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 127 (C), the accessory movable effect is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the first movable accessory 14 is an effect of moving on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advance position. In the accessory movable effect, as shown in the right side figure of FIG. 127 (C), the player is holding the handle 60, or the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM. , The frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advance position, that is, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member comes into contact with the thumb or the like of the player's hand, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member comes into contact with the little finger or the like of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 127 (D), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are interlocked while the first movable accessory 14 is moving from the advanced position to the retracted position (while the first movable accessory 14 is moving to the left). Appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol of the 7 symbols is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking effect is the same as the accessory interlocking effects A to C as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68. Further, in the jackpot symbol display effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 127 (D), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advance position to the evacuation position, and the contact with the player is released.
After that, a big hit game production is performed.

[Double character production B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the double accessory effect B. The double character effect B in FIG. 128 is an effect with the same variation of the special symbol. In the double character effect B, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (A), first, a decorative pattern variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuate in the vertical direction at the substantially center of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative symbol variation effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (A), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player. In the decorative symbol special variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, but they are omitted in the drawing.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (B), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with 7 symbols, the reach state in which the decorative symbols 8C fluctuates at high speed is formed at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is located near the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed large. Further, in the reach effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (B), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. The player can frequently operate the button XMM in the operation direction (right direction) in anticipation of the appearance of a chance-up effect when the player is in the reach state. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (C), the button operation explanation effect A is performed. In this button operation explanation effect A, the button operation explanation image XM1 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanatory image XM1 is an image showing the entire game machine 1 and suggesting the positional relationship of the button XMM with respect to the game machine 1. Specifically, in the button operation explanatory image XM1, it is suggested that the button XMM is located at the position at the tip of the arrow (the position indicated by "here"). Further, the button operation explanatory image XM1 suggests the positional relationship between the first movable accessory 14 and the button XMM. The button operation explanation image XM1 may be a diagram showing the whole of the actual game machine 1. Further, in the button operation explanation effect A, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (C), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (D), the button operation explanation effect B is performed. In this button operation explanation effect B, the button operation explanation image XM2 is displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a. This button operation explanatory image XM2 is an image showing the periphery of the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69 and suggesting the positional relationship between the handle 60 and the frame movable accessory 69. Further, in the button operation explanatory image XM2, the characters "arrow is PUSH" and the arrow are written, indicating the position of the button XMM on the handle 60, and prompting the player to press (operate) the button XMM. It is an image for. In other words, the button operation explanatory image XM2 is a diagram showing the actual zoom-up of the button XMM. Further, in the button operation explanation effect B, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (D), the player holds the handle 60, and the frame movable accessory 69 is located at the retracted position. The player presses the button XMM while grasping the handle 60 by visually recognizing the button operation explanation image XM2. In this state, the frame movable accessory 69 is not in contact with the player.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (E), the accessory movable effect is performed. In this accessory movable effect, the first movable accessory 14 is an effect of moving on the display screen 7a from the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a toward the advance position. In the character movable effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (E), the player is holding the handle 60, or the player is holding the handle 60 and operating the button XMM. , The frame movable accessory 69 moves from the retracted position to the advance position, that is, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member moves to the right, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member moves to the left. As a result, the frame movable accessory 69 of the left member comes into contact with the thumb or the like of the player's hand, and the frame movable accessory 69 of the right member comes into contact with the little finger or the like of the player's hand.

Next, as shown in the figure on the left side of FIG. 128 (F), a jackpot symbol display effect is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are interlocked while the first movable accessory 14 is moving from the advanced position to the retracted position (while the first movable accessory 14 is moving to the left). Appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, and the jackpot symbol of the 7 symbols is displayed in the substantially center of the display screen 7a. This interlocking effect is the same as the accessory interlocking effects A to C as shown in FIGS. 66 to 68. Further, in the jackpot symbol display effect, as shown in the figure on the right side of FIG. 128 (F), the frame movable accessory 69 moves from the advance position to the evacuation position, and the contact with the player is released.
After that, a big hit game production is performed.

[Modification example]
In the double accessory effects A to B, the frame movable accessory 69 is used as the movable accessory outside the frame in the accessory movable effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the left side member and the right side member of the frame movable accessory 69 may be arranged so as to sandwich the effect button 63.
In the above double character effects A to B, in the character movable effect, the first movable character 14 and the frame movable character 69 are moved regardless of the player operating the button XMM. Not limited to this, for example, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 may be performed based on the player operating the button XMM.

[Effect example]
In the double accessory effects A to B, when the first movable accessory 14 arranged in the frame is movable, the frame movable accessory 69 arranged outside the frame is movable. According to this configuration, the first movable accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 can be used to instantly produce an accessory with a sense of depth, and the player can be efficiently surprised in a short time. Can be granted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double accessory effects A to B, the movement of the first movable accessory 14 arranged inside the frame and the movement of the frame movable accessory 69 arranged outside the frame each suggest a big hit, and the first movable After the accessory movable effect in which the accessory 14 and the frame movable accessory 69 are movable is performed, the jackpot symbol display effect is performed. According to this configuration, the player's long-awaited jackpot symbol display production is performed after the character production with a momentary sense of depth by using the first movable character 14 and the frame movable character 69. It is possible to give a person a great sense of bliss. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double accessory effects A to B, the first movable accessory 14 arranged inside the frame and the frame movable accessory 69 arranged outside the frame are both in a predetermined direction in the accessory movable effect (the present embodiment). Then, it can move to the right). According to this configuration, the two movable accessories can produce a sense of unity in addition to a sense of depth. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the button XMM provided on the handle 60 is used for a display effect and an effect using a movable accessory, and can be operated by the player by applying a force in the operation direction (right direction). is there. Further, the frame movable accessory 69 (left member) is arranged on an extension line in the direction opposite to the operation direction (right direction) (left direction) with respect to the button XMM. In the above double character effects A to B, when the character movable effect is performed while the player is touching the button XMM to apply force in the operation direction, the frame movable character 69 is movable in the moving direction. By doing so, the frame movable accessory 69 touches the player. According to this configuration, the player can physically enjoy the effect in addition to the visual sense, and can maximize the excitement of the movable character effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the double accessory effects A to B, the frame movable accessory 69 is formed of a material softer than the first movable accessory 14. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being injured and to encourage the player to enjoy the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XM-1]
It is a game machine provided with a game machine frame, a game board, a first movable member, and a second movable member, and capable of executing a plurality of effects.
The first movable member is arranged in a space inside the frame formed by the game machine frame and the game board.
The second movable member is arranged in the outer frame space outside the inner frame space.
As one of the plurality of effects, the first effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of effects, a second effect may be performed.
The first effect is an effect of moving the first movable member.
The second effect is an effect of moving the second movable member.
A combination effect including the first effect and the second effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, when the first effect is performed, the second effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XM-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XM-1.
Further equipped with display means that can execute display effects,
As one of the plurality of effects, a third effect may be performed.
The third effect is an effect of displaying a jackpot symbol on the display means.
The combination effect may include the third effect.
In the combination effect, the movement of the first movable member in the first effect and the movement of the second movable member in the second effect each suggest a big hit, and the third effect is , The first effect and the second effect are performed after the first effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XM-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XM-2.
In the combination effect, the first movable member in the first effect and the second movable member in the second effect are both movable in a predetermined direction.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XM-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XM-3.
Further equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player by applying a force in a predetermined operation direction.
The second movable member is arranged on an extension line in a direction opposite to the operating direction with respect to the operating means.
In the combination effect, when the second effect is performed when the player is touching the operation means to apply a force in the operation direction, the second movable member is movable in the predetermined direction. By doing so, the second movable member touches the player.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XM-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XM-4.
The second movable member in the second effect is formed of a material softer than the first movable member in the first effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The movable member contact effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. In FIGS. 129 to 131, various movable accessories arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.

This movable member contact effect can be executed during the fluctuation. That is, when various commands received from the sub control board 90 are analyzed and an instruction to execute the movable member contact effect is included, various commands received from the sub control board 90 by the lamp control board 107 (for example, the movable member). A command that includes an instruction to execute a contact effect) is analyzed, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 are operated, or at the lower right end of the front frame 53. The projecting portion 603 provided on the arranged handle 60 to be described later is operated, and the frame movable described later provided on the front frame 53 on the upper, lower, left and right sides of the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 is movable. The bodies 69a to 69d are operated. The lamp control board 107 controls an electric drive source (for example, a motor) for operating the first movable accessory 14 and an electric drive source (for example, a motor) for operating the second movable accessory 15, and the protrusion 603 (For example, a motor or a solenoid) or an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for operating the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is controlled.

Here, first, the movable member contact effect A will be described, and then the movable member contact effect B and the movable member contact effect C will be described in order.

[Movable member contact effect A]
The movable member contact effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 129. FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect A. The movable member contact effect A can be executed during the fluctuation. In FIG. 129, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in FIGS. 129 (A) and 129 (B), the handle 60 includes a resin tubular handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 on which the resin annular operating lever 601 is not shown. It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operation lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three positions on the outer peripheral surface thereof. By attaching the player's finger to the space between these three finger hooking protrusions 601a, the finger is caught on the finger hooking protrusion 601a when the operation lever 601 is rotated, which makes it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of a colored opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of a colored opaque (for example, black, may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)). The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin, and is a decorative substrate in which an inner lens is provided on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602 and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Is provided. In the inner lens and the decorative substrate, a through hole larger than the size of the outer circumference of the rib 602aa is formed in a portion corresponding to the rib 602aa described later. That is, the inner lens and the decorative substrate do not interfere with the protrusion 603 described later.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, and makes it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. .. Therefore, even when the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are all turned off, it is difficult to see these plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grasps the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60, and attaches the player's fingers to the distance between the three finger hooking protrusions 601a. Then, when the amount of rotation is increased by the player rotating the operation lever 601 clockwise, the firing intensity of the game ball is increased, and the launching device 112 is used to play the game with the firing intensity of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward the game area 3 formed in the game board 2. When the player loosens the rotation operation of the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction, the operating lever 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball is weakened. When the player keeps loosening the operation of rotating the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction or the player releases the palm from the handle 60, the operation lever 601 is moved to the original position by the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. It will return to and stop the launch of the game ball.

On the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602, a plurality of elongated holes 602a are provided radially on the same circumference so that the longitudinal direction faces the outer periphery (here, 12 elongated holes 602a are provided). Ribs 602aa protruding from the peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a by a predetermined distance dimension (about 10 mm in the present embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602 are formed, and the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a is smooth. Is formed in.

In the internal space of the front cover 602 and the operation lever 601, a protruding portion 603 that moves in the front-rear direction from the internal space of the front cover 602 along the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a is provided corresponding to each elongated hole 602a. Further, a front-rear movement mechanism 604 including an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) for moving the protrusion 603 in the front-rear direction along the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the front-rear movement mechanism 604 performs, for example, a speed reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor or a rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion that decelerates the rotation of the motor) when the electric drive source is a motor. A motion conversion mechanism that converts the linear motion of the protrusion 603 into a linear motion, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the protrusion 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms. It is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 can reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and is formed of a colored opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative substrate is provided, the protruding portion 603 is colored and opaque (for example, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate. , Red), so that the light emitting mode of the protruding portion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are set before the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) (for example, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the protrusion 603). 5 seconds before the operation mode)), the light emission is started in a predetermined light emission mode, and the light emission is continued for a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 is completed. That is, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are an effect of notifying the operation of the protrusion 603. Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). Expectations for hitting are increasing in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the degree of expectation of hitting by the operation of the protrusion 603 can be suggested by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, which are housed inside the front cover 602.

When the projecting portion 603 is arranged in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the projecting portion 603 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the elongated hole 602a. Specifically, the front cover 602 is arranged in the depth direction from the spherical surface surface. It is in a state of being retracted to the depth by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, it is half the length (5 mm) of the rib 602aa) (FIG. 129 (A)). That is, even when the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is in the retracted position (home position). Since it is arranged in, the palm of the player does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. Since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603, the urging force of the return spring occurs when the game machine 1 is not turned on or when a power failure occurs during the game and the power is cut off. The protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position, the protruding portion 603 protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 through the elongated hole 602a by a predetermined distance dimension (up to about 10 mm in the present embodiment). (Fig. 129 (B)). That is, when the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is arranged at the advanced position. The palm of the player comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Even if the palm of the player comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the palm of the player does not move any further so that the front-back movement mechanism 604 does not become overloaded ( An overload prevention mechanism (which does not try to pull the player's palm away from the handle 60) is provided in the front-back movement mechanism 604. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

As the operation mode of the projecting portion 603, all the projecting portions 603 move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position all at once and return to the retracted position (home position) all at once. Operation mode 2 in which the aircraft moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in a clockwise order and returns to the retracted position (home position) in order 2. One protruding portion 603 rotates counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position). Operation mode 3, which moves to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) 3. The ejected portion 603 is retracted so that the waves propagate in a clockwise order by forming a wavy shape from the three to four projecting portions 603. Operation mode 4, moving from the (home position) to the advanced position and returning to the retracted position (home position), forming a wavy shape from the three to four projecting portions 603 so that the waves propagate in a counterclockwise order. An operation mode 5 in which the protruding portion 603 is moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returned to the retracted position (home position) can be mentioned.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a for the left decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (in other words, at a low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm). And, since the stop display of the decorative symbol was canceled, the decorative symbol was changed to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then the speed was gradually increased from low speed toward the lower side, and the state was opaque to translucent. The display mode changes to and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. In addition, there are a plurality of background images for variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, the medium decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is the variable display displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The decorative design variation effect (variable display) is started, and then the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the display mode moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol is provisionally displayed with the number "2". The display mode is stopped, and the display mode moves slowly in small steps in the vertical direction. The left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol is continued.

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Be done. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of the jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and after that, the winning game (winning effect) is displayed. ) Is started. When the hit is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the fluctuation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol and the middle decorative symbol are displayed. The decorative design and the right decorative design are not aligned with the same design, and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation ends.

When the ally character and the enemy character are fighting due to the battle effect, if the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect button moves to the lower center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating the 63 is displayed, and a message image of "continuous hitting!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image. This message image MG has higher expectations in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image and the message image is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the effect button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or when the player does not press the effect button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 129 (C), the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called "first" 1 Rainbow background image ”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is in the retracted position above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the (home position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, about about). Stop for 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image that conveys the hit as a background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "2").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position) of 7a. 1 will be started.

That is, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. In conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advanced position), the protruding portion 603 starts the operation of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position. In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time elapses, the second movable accessory 15 is movable. As the accessory 15 starts the operation of returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, the protruding portion 603 starts the operation of returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again.

Here, the operation mode 1 is the operation mode of the protrusion 603, but of course, any operation mode may be used from the operation modes 2 to 5. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In the operation modes 2 to 5, the second movable accessory 15 is at the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. The operation period of the second movable object is continuously performed until it advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position). ..

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the projecting portion 603, one projecting portion 603 moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the operation period of the second movable object accessory. The operation of returning to the position (home position) is continuously performed, and when the operation period of the second movable object accessory elapses, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 3 of the protruding portion 603, During the operation period of the second movable body accessory, one protruding portion 603 continuously moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position). When the second movable object accessory operating period elapses, all the projecting portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operating mode 4 of the projecting portion 603, three to three in the second movable object accessory operating period. The operation of moving the protruding portion 603 from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returning to the retracted position (home position) so that the waves propagate in a clockwise order by forming a wavy shape from the four protruding portions 603. When the second movable accessory operating period elapses, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 5 of the protruding portion 603, in the second movable accessory operating period. The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the waves propagate in a counterclockwise order by forming a wavy shape from the three to four protruding portions 603, and then again in the retracted position (home position). ) Is continuously performed, and when the operation period of the second movable object accessory has elapsed, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 129 (C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called). , "First rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the handle is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2. The operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 provided on the 60 has been started. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode 1 of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 129 (D), the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image. A second premier background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 From the state in which the object 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, the object 14 is in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) and moves back and forth repeatedly in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image that conveys the hit as a background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "2").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from a stationary state at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. The operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the screen 7a. Aspect 1 will be initiated.

That is, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. The protrusion 603 starts the operation of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advancing position in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position) of. As the first movable accessory 14 repeatedly moves back and forth in the center position (advanced position) in small steps in the center position (advanced position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 moves back and forth in the advanced position for a predetermined time. When the vehicle is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the protruding portion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the start of the operation of returning the first movable accessory 14 from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again. ) To start the operation to return again.

Here, the operation mode 1 is the operation mode of the protrusion 603, but of course, any operation mode may be used from the operation modes 2 to 5. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In the operation modes 2 to 5, the first movable accessory 14 is at the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. The first movable body accessory operating period is continuously performed until it advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position). There is.

Specifically, in the operation mode 2 of the projecting portion 603, one projecting portion 603 moves clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and retracts again during the first movable body accessory operating period. The operation of returning to the position (home position) is continuously performed, and when the operation period of the first movable object accessory elapses, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 3 of the protruding portion 603, During the operation period of the first movable body accessory, one projecting portion 603 continuously moves counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position). When the first movable body accessory operating period elapses, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 4 of the protruding portion 603, three to three in the first movable body accessory operating period. The operation of moving the protruding portion 603 from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returning to the retracted position (home position) so that the waves propagate in a clockwise order by forming a wavy shape from the four protruding portions 603. When the first movable object accessory operating period elapses, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position), and in the operation mode 5 of the protruding portion 603, in the first movable object accessory operating period. The protrusions 603 are moved from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position so that the waves propagate in a counterclockwise order by forming a wavy shape from the three to four protruding portions 603, and then again in the retracted position (home position). ) Is continuously performed, and when the operation period of the first movable object accessory has elapsed, all the protruding portions 603 return to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not turned on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is supplied. When is shut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the urging force of the return spring, and the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started). If it is not the timing), the protruding portion 603 will not be in a state of protruding to the advanced position. Therefore, even if a clerk such as a player who is about to start a game or a clerk at a game hall disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the demonstration effect for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of projecting to the advance position, and when the demonstration effect for waiting for customers is completed, the protrusion 603 is moved to the retracted position (home). The operation of returning to the position) is performed. When a staff member such as a player or a game hall clerk touches the handle 60 in a state where a demonstration effect for waiting for customers is performed and the protrusion 603 protrudes to the advance position, the handle 60 is used by the player or the game hall clerk. After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds as a period during which the protrusion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has passed since the staff touched it, the operation of returning the protrusion 603 to the retracted position (home position) is performed. There is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not turned on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is supplied. When the power was cut off, the protrusion 603 was returned to the retracted position (home position) by the urging force of the return spring, but when the game machine 1 was not turned on, a power failure occurred during the game. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the urging force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a clerk of a game hall or the like is in a state where the game machine 1 is not turned on before the business starts or after the business is closed (a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is cut off). As a result, the protruding portion 603 can be moved to the advanced position to be in a protruding state, so that the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect B]
Next, the movable member contact effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 130. FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect B. The movable member contact effect B can be executed during the fluctuation. In FIG. 130, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in FIGS. 130A and 130B, the handle 60 has a resin tubular handle base and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602, which is not shown by the resin annular operating lever 601. It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operation lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three positions on the outer peripheral surface thereof. By attaching the player's finger to the space between these three finger hooking protrusions 601a, the finger is caught on the finger hooking protrusion 601a when the operation lever 601 is rotated, which makes it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of a colored opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of a colored opaque (for example, black, may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)). The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin, and is a decorative substrate in which an inner lens is provided on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602 and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Is provided. In the inner lens and the decorative substrate, a through hole larger than the size of the outer circumference of the rib 602aa is formed in a portion corresponding to the rib 602aa described later. That is, the inner lens and the decorative substrate do not interfere with the protrusion 603 described later.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, and makes it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. .. Therefore, even when the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are all turned off, it is difficult to see these plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grasps the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60, and attaches the player's fingers to the distance between the three finger hooking protrusions 601a. Then, when the amount of rotation is increased by the player rotating the operation lever 601 clockwise, the firing intensity of the game ball is increased, and the launching device 112 is used to play the game with the firing intensity of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward the game area 3 formed in the game board 2. When the player loosens the rotation operation of the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction, the operating lever 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball is weakened. When the player keeps loosening the operation of rotating the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction or the player releases the palm from the handle 60, the operation lever 601 is moved to the original position by the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. It will return to and stop the launch of the game ball.

One large hole 602a is provided in the center of the spherical surface of the spherical shell-shaped front cover 602. Ribs 602aa protruding by a predetermined distance dimension (about 10 mm in this embodiment) toward the inner space (depth direction) of the front cover 602 are formed on the peripheral surface of the hole 602a, and the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a is smoothly formed. Has been done.

The internal space of the front cover 602 and the operating lever 601 is provided with a protruding portion 603 that moves in the front-rear direction along the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a from the internal space of the front cover 602, and further, the protruding portion 603 is formed in the hole 602a. A front-back movement mechanism 604 including an electric drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) that moves in the front-rear direction along the inner peripheral surface of the vehicle is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the front-rear movement mechanism 604 performs, for example, a speed reducer that decelerates the rotation of the motor or a rotational motion of the motor (rotational motion that decelerates the rotation of the motor) when the electric drive source is a motor. A motion conversion mechanism that converts the linear motion of the protrusion 603 into a linear motion, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the linear motion of the protrusion 603 when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and in addition to these mechanisms. It is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The protrusion 603 can reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and is formed of a colored opaque (for example, red) flexible member. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative substrate is provided, the protruding portion 603 is colored and opaque (for example, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate. , Red), so that the light emitting mode of the protruding portion 603 cannot be changed.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are set before the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) (for example, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the protrusion 603). 5 seconds before the operation mode)), the light emission is started in a predetermined light emission mode, and the light emission is continued for a period until the operation of the protrusion 603 is completed. That is, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are an effect of notifying the operation of the protrusion 603. Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). Expectations for hitting are increasing in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the degree of expectation of hitting by the operation of the protrusion 603 can be suggested by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, which are housed inside the front cover 602.

When the protrusion 603 is arranged in the retracted position (home position), the front surface of the protrusion 603 is arranged on the inner peripheral surface of the hole 602a, and specifically, the front cover 602 is directed from the spherical surface to the depth direction. Therefore, it is in a state of being retracted to the depth by a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, it is half the length (5 mm) of the rib 602aa) (FIG. 130 (A)). That is, even when the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is in the retracted position (home position). Since it is arranged in, the palm of the player does not come into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603 at all. Since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603, the urging force of the return spring occurs when the game machine 1 is not turned on or when a power failure occurs during the game and the power is cut off. The protruding portion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position).

On the other hand, when the protruding portion 603 is arranged at the advanced position, the protruding portion 603 protrudes from the spherical surface of the front cover 602 through the hole 602a by a predetermined distance dimension (up to about 10 mm in the present embodiment). It becomes a state (FIG. 130 (B)). That is, when the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the protrusion 603 is arranged at the advanced position. The palm of the player comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603. Even if the palm of the player comes into contact with the tip of the protrusion 603, the tip of the protrusion 603 in contact with the palm of the player does not move any further so that the front-back movement mechanism 604 does not become overloaded ( An overload prevention mechanism (which does not try to pull the player's palm away from the handle 60) is provided in the front-back movement mechanism 604. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

As an operation mode of the protrusion 603, there is an operation mode in which the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and returns to the retracted position (home position) again. By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the protruding portion 603 is maintained in a state of being projected to the advanced position for a predetermined time, and an operation in which the protruding portion 603 is intermittently projected to the advanced position is realized. It is also possible to realize an operation in which the protruding portion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position or retracts to the retracted position (home position) like the piston movement.

Next, the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the timing at which the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a for the left decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (in other words, at a low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm). And, since the stop display of the decorative symbol was canceled, the decorative symbol was changed to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then the speed was gradually increased from low speed toward the lower side, and the state was opaque to translucent. The display mode changes to and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. In addition, there are a plurality of background images for variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, the medium decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is the variable display displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The decorative design variation effect (variable display) is started, and then the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the display mode moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol is provisionally displayed with the number "3". The display mode is stopped and slowly moves in the vertical direction, and the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are the same symbol (here, the number "3") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol is continued.

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Be done. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of the jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and after that, the winning game (winning effect) is displayed. ) Is started. When the hit is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the fluctuation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol and the middle decorative symbol are displayed. The decorative design and the right decorative design are not aligned with the same design, and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation ends.

When the ally character and the enemy character are fighting due to the battle effect, when the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect button moves to the lower center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating the 63 is displayed, and a message image of "long press!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image. This message image MG has higher expectations in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image and the message image is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the effect button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or when the player does not press the effect button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 130 (C), a first premier background image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "first" 1 Rainbow background image ”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is in the retracted position above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the (home position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, about about). Stop for 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image that conveys the hit as a background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "3").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Operation mode of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position) of 7a. Will be started.

That is, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. In conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advanced position), the protruding portion 603 starts the operation of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advanced position. In conjunction with the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 stops at the advance position for a predetermined time, and when the predetermined time elapses, the second movable accessory 15 is movable. As the accessory 15 starts the operation of returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, the protruding portion 603 starts the operation of returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again.

Here, as an operation mode of the protrusion 603, the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other operation modes may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 is in front of (front) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. The second movable body accessory operating period is continuously performed until the vehicle advances (moves) toward the central position (advanced position) of the above and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the second movable body accessory, the protrusion 603 intermittently protrudes to the advance position (the protrusion 603 repeatedly reciprocates between the retracted position (home position) and the advance position). When the second movable body accessory operating period elapses, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the second movable body accessory operating period, the projecting portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position). An operation in which the protruding portion 603 continuously protrudes to the advanced position or retracts to the retracted position (home position) like a piston movement (the protruding portion 603 repeatedly reciprocates between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position). (Continuous operation) is performed, and when the second movable body accessory operating period elapses, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

As shown in FIG. 130C, when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called). , "First rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the handle is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2. The operation mode of the protruding portion 603 provided in the 60 (the operation in which the protruding portion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position)) is started. Was there. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation mode of the protrusion 603 may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 130 (D), the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image. A second premier background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 From the state in which the object 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, the object 14 is in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) and moves back and forth repeatedly in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image that conveys the hit as a background image is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "3").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from a stationary state at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. The operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the screen 7a. Aspects will be initiated.

That is, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the protrusion 603 provided on the handle 60 arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 move in conjunction with each other. It will start.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. The protrusion 603 starts the operation of advancing (moving) from the retracted position (home position) toward the advancing position in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position) of. As the first movable accessory 14 repeatedly moves back and forth in the center position (advanced position) in small steps in the center position (advanced position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the protruding portion 603 moves back and forth in the advanced position for a predetermined time. When the vehicle is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the protruding portion 603 moves from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) in conjunction with the start of the operation of returning the first movable accessory 14 from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again. ) To start the operation to return again.

Here, as an operation mode of the protrusion 603, the protrusion 603 moves from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stops for a predetermined period of time, and then returns to the retracted position (home position). Of course, other operation modes may be used. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the protrusion 603. In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 is at the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 and is the display screen. The first movable body accessory operating period is continuously performed until the vehicle advances (moves) toward the central position (advanced position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the operation of intermittently projecting the projecting portion 603 (the operation of the projecting portion 603 repeatedly reciprocating between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) is continuously performed. When the first movable body accessory operating period elapses, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position), or during the first movable body accessory operating period, the piston movement is performed. The first movable body performs such an operation in which the projecting portion 603 continuously protrudes or retracts (an operation in which the projecting portion 603 continuously reciprocates between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position). When the accessory operating period elapses, the protruding portion 603 returns to the retracted position (home position).

In the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not turned on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is supplied. When is shut off, the protrusion 603 is returned to the retracted position (home position) by the urging force of the return spring, and the timing at which the protrusion 603 is operated (the operation mode of the protrusion 603 is started). If it is not the timing), the protruding portion 603 will not be in a state of protruding to the advanced position. Therefore, even if a clerk such as a player who is about to start a game or a clerk at a game hall disinfects the handle 60 with alcohol, the protrusion 603 cannot be disinfected with alcohol. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the demonstration effect for waiting for customers is being performed, the protrusion 603 is in a state of projecting to the advance position, and when the demonstration effect for waiting for customers is completed, the protrusion 603 is moved to the retracted position (home). The operation of returning to the position) is performed. When a staff member such as a player or a game hall clerk touches the handle 60 in a state where a demonstration effect for waiting for customers is performed and the protrusion 603 protrudes to the advance position, the handle 60 is used by the player or the game hall clerk. After a predetermined period of time (for example, about 5 seconds as a period during which the protrusion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol) has passed since the staff touched it, the operation of returning the protrusion 603 to the retracted position (home position) is performed. There is.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the protrusion 603 as described above, when the game machine 1 is not turned on, a power failure occurs during the game and the power is supplied. When the power was cut off, the protrusion 603 was returned to the retracted position (home position) by the urging force of the return spring, but when the game machine 1 was not turned on, a power failure occurred during the game. When the power is cut off, the protrusion 603 may be moved to the advanced position by the urging force of the return spring. In this way, for example, a clerk of a game hall or the like is in a state where the game machine 1 is not turned on before the business starts or after the business is closed (a state in which the power of the game machine 1 is cut off). As a result, the protruding portion 603 can be moved to the advanced position to be in a protruding state, so that the protruding portion 603 can be disinfected with alcohol.

[Movable member contact effect C]
Next, the movable member contact effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the movable member contact effect C. The movable member contact effect C can be executed during the fluctuation. In FIG. 131, the touch switch 114 for detecting the contact of the handle 60, the firing volume 115 for detecting the amount of rotation of the handle 60, and the like are omitted.

First, as described above, the handle 60 is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53. As shown in FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B), the handle 60 includes a resin tubular handle base (not shown) and a resin spherical shell-shaped front cover 602 on which the resin annular operating lever 601 is not shown. It is configured to be rotatably provided between them. The operation lever 601 is formed to have an annular shape, and finger hook protrusions 601a are integrally formed at three positions on the outer peripheral surface thereof. By attaching the player's finger to the space between these three finger hooking protrusions 601a, the finger is caught on the finger hooking protrusion 601a when the operation lever 601 is rotated, which makes it easier to rotate the operation lever 601. There is.

The handle base is made of a colored opaque (for example, white) resin, and the operating lever 601 is made of a colored opaque (for example, black, may be the same color as the handle base (for example, white)). The front cover 602 is made of colorless and transparent resin, and is a decorative substrate in which an inner lens is provided on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602 and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Is provided.

The inner lens diffusely refracts the light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, and makes it difficult to recognize the existence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. .. Therefore, even when the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are all turned off, it is difficult to see these plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or translucent.

When the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate emit light, the light refracted by the inner lens is emitted through the front cover 602, and the front cover 602 emits light. As a result, the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed depending on the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate.

To operate the handle 60, first, the player grasps the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60, and attaches the player's fingers to the distance between the three finger hooking protrusions 601a. Then, when the amount of rotation is increased by the player rotating the operation lever 601 clockwise, the firing intensity of the game ball is increased, and the launching device 112 is used to play the game with the firing intensity of the game ball commensurate with the amount of rotation of the rotation operation. The ball is fired toward the game area 3 formed in the game board 2. When the player loosens the rotation operation of the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction, the operating lever 60 is rotated counterclockwise due to the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60, and the firing strength of the game ball is weakened. When the player keeps loosening the operation of rotating the operation lever 601 in the clockwise direction or the player releases the palm from the handle 60, the operation lever 601 is moved to the original position by the urging force of the return spring (not shown) provided in the handle 60. It will return to and stop the launch of the game ball.

Frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 in the vertical and horizontal directions of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). That is, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. On the right side and the left side of the handle 60 shown in FIG. 1, a movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as a frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, was provided, but here, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d Is formed with the petals surrounding the handle 60 as a motif.

In the front frame 53, in addition to the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d formed with the petals as a motif, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are electrically moved to the bud state or to the flowering state. A rotary movement mechanism 534 including a drive source (for example, a motor or a solenoid) is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the rotary movement mechanism 534 performs, for example, a speed reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor or a rotary motion of the motor (rotational motion that slows down the rotation of the motor) when the electric drive source is a motor. A motion conversion mechanism that converts the rotary motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, a mechanism for transmitting the linear motion of the plunger of the solenoid to the rotary motion of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and further. , In addition to these mechanisms, it is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are capable of reciprocating between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and are each formed of colored opaque (for example, red) flexible members. As described above, the front cover 602 is provided with an inner lens formed in a predetermined shape on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602, and a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted behind the inner lens. Although the decorative substrate is provided, even if the light emitting mode of the front cover 602 can be changed by the light emitting mode of the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are handles. Since the front frame 53 is provided separately from the 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are colored and opaque (for example, red), the light emitting mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d cannot be changed. It has become like.

The plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are before the timing when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are operated (the timing when the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is started) (for example, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d). (5 seconds before the timing when the operation modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are started) to start emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode and to finish the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. The light emission is continued for a long time. That is, the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate are an effect of notifying the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. Predetermined light emission modes include blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting → golden color (yellow). Expectations for hitting are increasing in the order of lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In other words, the expected degree of hit by the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 is mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60. It can be suggested by the light emitting mode of a plurality of full-color LEDs.

When the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the retracted position (home position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the flowering state (state in FIG. 131 (A)). Even when the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the flowering state. Therefore, the back of the player's hand and fingers do not come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d at all. Since the urging force of the return spring acts on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the return spring is used when the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on or when a power failure occurs during the game and the power is cut off. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the flowering state by the urging force of.

On the other hand, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the advanced position, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the bud state (state of FIG. 131 (B)). When the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 and the player's fingers are attached to the distance between the three finger hook protrusions 601a, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are arranged in the state of buds. Therefore, the backs and fingers of the player's hands are covered with the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d and come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. Even if the back of the player's hand or finger comes into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the frame is movable in contact with the back of the player's hand or finger so that the rotational movement mechanism 534 does not become overloaded. The rotary movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism in which the inner peripheral surfaces of the bodies 69a to 69d do not further press the back of the player's hand or fingers. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

As an operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, there is an operation mode in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and return to the retracted position (home position) again. By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d project to the advance position for a predetermined time to maintain the bud state, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d advance intermittently. It is possible to realize the operation of protruding to the position and making it into a bud state, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advanced position to make it into a bud state or retract to the retracted position (home position) to bloom. Of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, the right frame movable body 69d, and the lower frame can be realized. After moving clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position in the order of the movable body 69b, it is possible to realize the operation of returning all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d to the retracted position (home position) all at once. Of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the lower frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a are retracted counterclockwise in this order. After moving from the home position) to the advance position, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be simultaneously returned to the retracted position (home position).

Next, the timing at which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are operated (the timing at which the operation modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are started) will be described. First, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a for the left decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, the intermediate decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol of the stereoscopic image. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (in other words, at a low speed) in a display mode in which it floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm). And, since the stop display of the decorative symbol was canceled, the decorative symbol was changed to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then the speed was gradually increased from low speed toward the lower side, and the state was opaque to translucent. The display mode changes to and changes at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. The decorative symbol decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction. In addition, there are a plurality of background images for variable display of decorative patterns, and one of the plurality of background images is selected.

The variable icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol, the medium decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are currently changing as the digestion of the first special figure hold, is the variable display displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) at position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons 9A should be stocked. Can be done. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad can be distinguished.

Here, a yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to The hold icon is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. That is, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and only one is in stock. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, black spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star shape. The icon of is the highest expectation of hitting, the black spherical icon is the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon is the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon is the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and then the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "8", and the display mode moves slowly in the vertical direction, and the right decorative symbol is provisionally displayed with the number "8". The display mode is stopped, and the display mode moves slowly in small steps in the vertical direction, and the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol become the same symbol (here, the number "8") to form a reach. At this time, the variable effect (variable display) of the intermediate decorative symbol is continued.

Subsequently, when the battle effect is started, the ally character appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character and the enemy character fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Be done. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of the jackpot is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol disappear from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character wins and the enemy character is defeated, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and after that, the winning game (winning effect) is displayed. ) Is started. When the hit is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a at the end of the fluctuation. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character is defeated and the enemy character wins, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) at the same timing, and the left decorative symbol and the middle decorative symbol are displayed. The decorative design and the right decorative design are not aligned with the same design, and are out of alignment. At this time, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation ends.

When the ally character and the enemy character are fighting due to the battle effect, if the ally character moves to the right side of the display screen 7a and the enemy character moves to the left side of the display screen 7a, the effect button moves to the lower center of the display screen 7a. A button image imitating the 63 is displayed, and a message image of "continuous hitting!" Prompting the player to press the effect button 63 is displayed above the button image. This message image MG has higher expectations in the order of "press!" → "continuous hit!" → "long press!". An arrow image pointing downward between the button image and the message image is also displayed on the display screen 7a, and the arrow image repeatedly reciprocates in the vertical direction, so that the arrow image also gives the player an effect button 63. It is possible to prompt a pressing operation (an operation of pressing the pressing operation portion of the effect button 63 downward). The button image, message image, and arrow image are designed to disappear from the display screen 7a when the player presses the effect button 63, or when the player does not press the effect button 63. It disappears from the display screen 7a after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

When the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 131 (C), the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called "first" 1 Rainbow background image ”) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is in the retracted position above the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the (home position), the image display device 7 advances (moves) toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and advances (moves) toward a predetermined time (for example, about about). Stop for 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image for transmitting a hit is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "8").

The second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. In conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the central position (advancing position) of 7a, the operation modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 are started. The Rukoto.

That is, the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 start to move in conjunction with each other. It will be.

Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. In conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advance position), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d advance (move) from the evacuation position (home position) toward the advancing position. In conjunction with the start and the second movable accessory 15 stopping at the advance position for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds), the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d stop at the advance position for a predetermined time and are in a bud state. Then, when the predetermined time elapses, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the advanced position to the retracted position (in conjunction with the start of the operation of returning the second movable accessory 15 from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again. The operation of returning to the home position) is started again.

Here, as an operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. It was an operation, but of course, it may be another operation mode. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the second movable accessory 15 is in front of (front) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. The second movable body accessory operating period is continuously performed until the vehicle advances (moves) toward the central position (advanced position) of the above and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the second movable body accessory, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advance position to be in the state of buds (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are in the retracted position (home position)). The operation of intermittently performing the reciprocating movement of and the advance position repeatedly) is performed, and when the operation period of the second movable body accessory has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are retracted (home position). During the operation period of the second movable body accessory, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advance position to be in the state of buds or retract to the retracted position (home position) to be in the flowering state. (The operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) is performed, and when the second movable body accessory operating period elapses, the frame is movable. When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the operation period of the second movable body accessory, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right side are first. The frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b are moved clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and when the second movable body accessory operating period elapses, all of them are moved. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d all return to the retracted position (home position) all at once, or during the second movable body accessory operating period, of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c and the lower side are first. The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a are moved counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and the second movable body accessory operating period is performed. After that, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

As shown in FIG. 131 (C), when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image (so-called). , "First rainbow background image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and in conjunction with the operation of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2, the frame provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60. The operation mode of the movable bodies 69a to 69d (the operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position)) is started. Was there. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, the operation modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be started in conjunction with the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2.

Specifically, when the effect button 63 is pressed or the effect button 63 is not pressed and a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 131 (D), the first premier background image having seven colors as the background image. A second premier background image (so-called "second rainbow background image") different from the above is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character and the enemy character disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first movable combination provided on the game board 2 From the state in which the object 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, the object 14 is in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and heads toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) and moves back and forth repeatedly in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds). When the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, and a dedicated victory background image that conveys the victory of the ally character is displayed on the display screen 7a as a background image, and the display screen is displayed. An enemy character appears (displays) in the center of 7a, becomes smaller so that the enemy character moves away in the depth direction, and a flash of light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a in all directions to explode. Become. After that, a dedicated hit background image for transmitting a hit is displayed as a background image on the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed at the same symbol (here, the number "8").

The first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 is displayed on the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state of being stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7. In conjunction with starting the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the screen 7a, the operation modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 around the handle 60 start. Will be done.

That is, the operation of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 and the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60 start to move in conjunction with each other. It will be.

Specifically, the first movable accessory 14 is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a. The operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d advance (move) from the evacuation position (home position) toward the advance position in conjunction with the start of the operation of advancing (moving) toward the center position (advance position) of Is started, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move repeatedly in small steps in the left-right direction at the center position (advance position) for a predetermined time (for example, about 5 seconds) by the first movable accessory 14. The frame is stopped for a predetermined time at the advance position and becomes a bud state, and when the predetermined time elapses, the first movable accessory 14 starts the operation of returning from the advance position to the evacuation position (home position) again. The movable bodies 69a to 69d start the operation of returning from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again.

Here, as an operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, stop for a predetermined period of time, and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. It was an operation, but of course, it may be another operation mode. In this case, the sub-control board 90 determines the operation mode of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. In another operation mode, the first movable accessory 14 is at the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 and is the display screen. The first movable body accessory operating period is continuously performed until the vehicle advances (moves) toward the central position (advanced position) of 7a and then returns to the retracted position (home position).

Specifically, during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d intermittently protrude to the advance position to be in a bud state (the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are retracted positions (home position)). The operation of intermittently performing the reciprocating movement of and the advance position repeatedly) is performed, and when the operation period of the first movable body accessory has elapsed, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are retracted (home position). During the operation period of the first movable body accessory, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously protrude to the advance position to be in the bud state or retract to the retracted position (home position) to be in the flowering state. (The operation in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d continuously move back and forth between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position) is performed, and when the first movable body accessory operating period elapses, the frame is movable. When the bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position), or during the operation period of the first movable body accessory, among the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c, the upper frame movable body 69a, and the right side are first. The frame movable body 69d and the lower frame movable body 69b are moved clockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and when the first movable body accessory operating period elapses, all of them are moved. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d all return to the retracted position (home position) all at once, or during the first movable body accessory operating period, of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d, the left frame movable body 69c and the lower side are first. The frame movable body 69b, the right frame movable body 69d, and the upper frame movable body 69a are moved counterclockwise from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position, and the first movable body accessory operating period is performed. After that, all the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d return to the retracted position (home position) all at once.

In the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d as described above, a power failure occurs during the game when the game machine 1 is not turned on. When the power is cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are returned to the flowering state by the urging force of the return spring. For this reason, the handle 60 can be sterilized with alcohol by a player who is about to start the game, a clerk at the game hall, or the like, and the movable frames 69a to 69d can also be sterilized with alcohol.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the urging force of the return spring acts on the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d as described above, a power failure occurs during the game when the game machine 1 is not turned on. When the power was cut off, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d were returned to the flowering state by the urging force of the return spring, but when the game machine 1 was not turned on, a power failure occurred during the game. When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of the above, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be moved to the advanced position by the urging force of the return spring to be in the state of buds. Even with this configuration, as described above, the player does not overload the rotational movement mechanism 534 even if the back of the player's hand or fingers come into contact with the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d. Since the rotary movement mechanism 534 is provided with an overload prevention mechanism in which the inner peripheral surfaces of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d that are in contact with the back of the hand and fingers do not further press the back of the player's hand and fingers, the game will be started from now on. Even if a clerk such as a player who is about to start or a clerk at a game hall tries to disinfect the handle 60 with alcohol and inserts a finger into the portion where the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d come into contact with each other, the overload prevention mechanism is configured. The inner peripheral surfaces of the handle 60 and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be disinfected with alcohol against the urging force of the contact spring.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the movable member contact effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, a handle 60 (operating means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and a motor, a solenoid, or the like is provided. A player's hand having a movable protrusion 603 (movable member) operated by an electric drive source, and operating the handle 60 (operating means) when the protrusion 603 (movable member) is operated to start movement. It is now possible to execute the first effect (FIG. 129 (B) in the movable member contact effect A and FIG. 130 (B) in the movable member contact effect B) in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) can be contacted. ing. According to this configuration, even if the movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members touch the player. On the other hand, when the protrusion 603 (movable member) starts to move while the player holds the palm of the hand so as to wrap it from the front of the handle 60 (operating means), the player suddenly Since the hand comes into contact with the projecting portion 603, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of contacting the projecting portion 603 (movable member) with the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.
Further, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable frame movable bodies 69a to 69d) provided with a handle 60 (operating means) that can be operated by the player and operated by an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. When the movable frame members 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated to start the movement, the movable frames 69a to 69d (movable members) are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). It is possible to execute the first contactable effect (FIG. 131 (B) in the movable member contact effect C). According to this configuration, even if the movable members such as the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 provided on the conventional game board start to move, these movable members touch the player. On the other hand, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are started to move while the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 (operating means), suddenly Since the player's hand comes into contact with the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members), an unprecedented novel effect of contacting the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) with the player can be achieved. It can be provided to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, the handle 60 (operating means) and the protrusion 603 (movable member) are The handles 60 (operating means) and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) in the movable member contact effect C are provided on the front frame 53 side of the game machine 1. According to this configuration, the player can directly touch the movable member, which can contribute to the improvement of the motivation for playing.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, the protrusion 603 (movable member) is provided inside the handle 60 (operating means). , It becomes difficult to touch the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means) at the retracted position (home position) (first position), and the handle 60 (operating means) is operated at the advanced position (second position). It is possible to touch the player's hand. According to this configuration, it is possible to control the state in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) is in contact with the player's hand and the state in which the protrusion 603 (movable member) is not in contact with the player's hand. By shifting the control from the non-contact state to the contact state, it is possible to give the player a surprise (give a feeling of tension) and realize an impactful effect.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are provided outside the handle 60 (operating means), and the retracted position (home position). ) (The player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means) at the advance position (second position) without covering the player's hand operating the handle 60 (operating means). It is designed to cover. According to this configuration, since it is possible to control the state in which the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are in contact with the player's hand and the state in which they are not in contact with each other, the frame movable body is in the player's hand. By shifting the control from the non-contact state of the 69a to 69d (movable members) to the contact state, it is possible to give the player a surprise (give a feeling of tension) and realize an impactful effect.

[Effect 5]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a game board 2 that can be visually recognized through an opening formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game board 2 is a first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member). And a second movable accessory 15 (movable member on the game board side) are provided. For example, in the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, the first effect is on the front frame 53 side. In conjunction with the operation of the protruding portion 603 (movable member) provided and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (movable member on the game board side) and the second movable accessory 15 (movable member on the game board side) provided on the game board 2. The movement can be started (FIGS. 129 (C) and (D) in the movable member contact effect A and FIGS. 130 (C) and (D) in the movable member contact effect B). According to this configuration, even when the game board side movable member provided on the game board as in the conventional case is activated, the player can be surprised, but the protruding portion provided on the front frame 53 side is provided. The operation of 603 (movable member) and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are linked. So, compared to the case where only the movable member on the game board side provided in the game board is operated as in the past, it is necessary to give the player more surprise (give more tension) and realize a novel effect. Can be done.
Further, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the first effect is the operation of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) provided on the front frame 53 side and the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The movement can be started in conjunction with the operation of the (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) (FIG. 131 (C) in the movable member contact effect C). , (D)). According to this configuration, even when the movable member on the game board side provided in the conventional game board is activated, the player can be surprised, but the frame movable provided on the front frame 53 side can be moved. The operation of the bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) and the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (game board side movable member) and the second movable accessory 15 (game board side movable member) provided on the game board 2 are By interlocking, compared to the case where only the movable member on the game board side provided in the game board is operated as in the past, the player is given more surprise (more tension) and a novel effect. It can be realized.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the movable member contact effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The movable member contact effect A in FIG. 129, the movable member contact effect B in FIG. 130, and the movable member contact effect C in FIG. 131 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed game state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, when the protrusion 603 (movable member) is operated and the movement is started, the protrusion is placed in the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). It was designed so that 603 (movable member) could come into contact with it. Further, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (Movable members) were able to come into contact. However, instead of such a movable member, it may bear the world view of the production unfolded in the game machine 1. For example, it may be an item or a part of an item possessed by the character, or a part of the character (for example, wings, fangs, claws, fingers, scales, etc.).

[Modification 3]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, when the protrusion 603 (movable member) is operated and the movement is started, the protrusion is placed in the hand of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). It was designed so that 603 (movable member) could come into contact with it. Further, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, when the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d (movable members) are operated to start moving, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are placed in the hands of the player who operates the handle 60 (operating means). (Movable members) were able to come into contact. However, instead of such a movable member, a colorless and transparent resin-made capsule that covers the effect button 63 and is divided into left and right is provided, and the left and right capsules that are divided and movable are applied as movable members. You may.

Specifically, in a state where the left side capsule and the right side capsule are provided on the front frame 53 side, and the left side capsule and the right side capsule are retracted to the retracted position (home position) covering the effect button 63, the left side capsule And the right side capsule are in a state where the right end of the left side capsule and the left end of the right side capsule are in surface contact and united on the vertical line passing through the center of the effect button 63, and the left side capsule and the right side capsule open the effect button 63. In the state of advancing to the advancing position, the left capsule moves to the left from the vertical line passing through the center of the effect button 63 in the horizontal direction, so that the right end of the left capsule is greatly separated from the left end of the effect button 63. Further, the right side capsule is moved to the right from the vertical line passing through the center of the effect button 63 in the horizontal direction, so that the left end of the right side capsule is greatly separated from the right end of the effect button 63.

In the front frame 53, in addition to the left side capsule, the right side capsule, and the effect button 63, an electric drive source (for example,) for retracting the left side capsule and the right side capsule to the retracted position (home position) or advancing to the advanced position (for example). A rotary movement mechanism equipped with a motor or solenoid) is provided. In addition to the electric drive source, the rotary movement mechanism has, for example, a speed reducer that slows down the rotation of the motor when the electric drive source is a motor, and a rotary motion of the motor (rotational motion that slows down the rotation of the motor) on the left side. A motion conversion mechanism that converts the capsule or right capsule into parallel motion, a mechanism that transmits the linear motion of the solenoid plunger to the parallel motion of the left capsule or right capsule when the electric drive source is a solenoid, and In addition to these mechanisms, it is composed of a return spring, a contact spring that constitutes an overload prevention mechanism, and the like.

When the left capsule or the right capsule is placed in the retracted position (home position), it is placed so as to cover the effect button 63. Even if the player tries to press the effect button 63, it is blocked by the left capsule and the right capsule. Since the urging force of the return spring acts on the left capsule and the right capsule, when the power of the game machine 1 is not turned on, or when a power failure occurs during the game and the power is cut off, the return spring Due to the urging force, the left capsule and the right capsule are arranged at the retracted position (home position) so as to cover the effect button 63.

On the other hand, when the left side capsule or the right side capsule is arranged at the advanced position, the left side capsule or the right side capsule is arranged in a state where the effect button 63 is opened. In this state, the player can press the effect button 63 without being blocked by the left side capsule and the right side capsule. When the player presses the effect button 63, even if the player's hand comes into contact with the right end of the left side capsule and the left end of the right side capsule, the player's hand does not overload the rotational movement mechanism. The rotary movement mechanism is provided with an overload prevention mechanism in which the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule that are in contact with the left end of the capsule move in parallel so as not to further press the player's hand. This overload prevention mechanism is mainly composed of a contact spring.

As the operation mode of the left side capsule and the right side capsule, there is an operation mode in which the left side capsule and the right side capsule move from the retracted position (home position) to the advanced position and return to the retracted position (home position) again. By using this operation mode, for example, it is possible to realize an operation in which the left side capsule and the right side capsule move to the advance position for a predetermined time to maintain the state in which the effect button 63 is opened, and the left side capsule and the right side capsule are intermittent. It is possible to realize an operation in which the effect button 63 is opened by moving to the advance position, and the left capsule and the right capsule are continuously moved to the advance position to open the effect button 63. It is possible to realize an operation of retracting to the retracted position (home position) or closing the effect button 63.

When the operation mode of the left capsule and the right capsule is started, the left capsule and the right capsule move to the retracted position (home position) when the player presses the effect button 63 (continuous hitting, long pressing, etc.). By doing so, the player's hand may come into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule. For this reason, even if the movable member on the game board side provided in the conventional game board starts to move (even if it operates), the movable member on the game board side does not touch the player at all. On the other hand, after the left side capsule and the right side capsule move to the advance position and the effect button 63 is released, the left side capsule and the right side capsule are in the retracted position (home position) while the player is pressing the effect button 63. ) Suddenly, the player's hand comes into contact with the right end of the left capsule and the left end of the right capsule, so the left capsule (movable member) and the right capsule (movable) It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of contacting the member) with the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example 4]
In the movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129 and the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, the protruding portion 603 is formed of a colored opaque (for example, red) flexible member. However, the protrusion 603 may be formed of a colored (monochromatic or multicolored) translucent flexible member or a colorless and transparent flexible member. In this case, a decorative substrate for the protrusion that causes the protrusion 603 to emit light is housed inside the handle 60. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate for the protruding portion, and the protruding portion 603 emits light when the full-color LED emits light. That is, the light emitting mode of the protrusion 603 can be changed by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion. An inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. ing. Therefore, the light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion and the light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 should not interfere with each other (mutually). A diaphragm is formed inside the handle 60 so as not to affect each other. Further, a light guide member is provided at the lower end of the protrusion 603, and when light emitted by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion is incident on the lower end of the light guide member, the upper end of the light guide member is provided. The upper end of the protrusion 603 and the vicinity of the peripheral side surface thereof (the front surface of the protrusion 603 and the peripheral side surface thereof) emit light when the light is incident on the lower end of the protrusion 603 and emitted from the upper end of the protrusion 603. It becomes.
Further, in the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are formed of colored opaque (for example, red) flexible members. However, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d may be formed of a colored (monochromatic or multicolored) translucent flexible member or a colorless and transparent flexible member. In this case, the decorative substrate for the protruding portion that emits light of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d is housed inside the front frame 53. A plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion, and the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d emit light when the full-color LEDs emit light. That is, the light emitting modes of the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d can be changed by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion. An inner lens formed in a predetermined shape is provided on the foremost side housed inside the front cover 602 of the handle 60, and a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted is provided behind the inner lens. However, since the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60, light emission by a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate for the protrusion on the front frame 53 side and the handle The light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed inside the front cover 602 on the 60 side does not interfere with each other (does not affect each other).

[Modification 5]
In the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 in the vertical and horizontal directions of the handle 60 (that is, around the handle 60). That is, the frame movable bodies 69a to 69d are provided on the front frame 53 separately from the handle 60. The frame movable bodies 69a to 69d were formed with the petals surrounding the handle 60 as a motif. However, one or both of the movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as the frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, may be operated on the right side and the left side of the handle 60 shown in FIG. .. In this way, the player's hand can suddenly come into contact with the frame movable body 69 (frame movable accessory 69) while the player holds the palm so as to wrap the palm from the front of the handle 60 (operating means). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of contacting the frame movable body 69 (frame movable accessory 69) with the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification 6]
The movable member contact effect A of FIG. 129, the movable member contact effect B of FIG. 130, and the movable member contact effect C of FIG. 131 may not include a part of the described effects, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player.
It has a movable member that can be moved by an electrical drive source and
When the movable member is operated to start moving, the first effect of allowing the movable member to come into contact with the hand of the player who operates the operating means is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1.
The operating means and the movable member are provided on the front frame side of the game machine.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2.
The movable member is provided inside the operating means, and it becomes difficult to contact the hand of the player who operates the operating means in the first position, and the movable member is placed in the hand of the player who operates the operating means in the second position. Being able to contact
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2.
The movable member is provided outside the operating means, and does not cover the hand of the player who operates the operating means in the first position, and the player who operates the operating means in the second position. Cover your hands,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-2 to D6-4.
A game board that is visible through an opening formed in the center of the front frame is provided.
The game board is provided with a movable member on the game board side.
In the first effect, the operation of the movable member and the operation of the movable member on the game board side start to move in conjunction with each other.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning-type gaming machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63, a sword member 65, and a select button 68 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the operation unit is not limited to these, and a lever or an operation unit to be operated by the player is not limited to these. , Triggers and the like may be used. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 65. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image showing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the game machine 1 includes a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64. The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment, and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening opening opening 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 69 ... Frame movable accessory 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (5)

One of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player and a second gaming state relatively advantageous to the player, provided with display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects. A gaming machine in which a game is played in a gaming state, and when the gaming state is the first gaming state and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number, the gaming machine is changed to the second gaming state.
In the second gaming state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes the second specified number of times, which is less than the first specified number of times, the gaming state becomes the second specified number of times. The gaming state of the above may be changed to the first gaming state.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an advantageous mode suggestion image suggesting that the display means is a mode advantageous to the player in the second gaming state.
The second display effect is performed after the first display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is the second. It is an effect of displaying the advantageous mode suggestion image even though the game state has been changed to the first game state after reaching the specified number of times of 2.
The third display effect is performed after the second display effect and when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the first specified number of times, and the advantageous mode suggestion image is displayed. It is a production,
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the second display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 2.
The advantageous mode suggestion image in the first display effect and the advantageous mode suggestion image in the third display effect are the same.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 3.
The advantageous mode suggestion image includes a moving image.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 4.
In the first display effect, the remaining number of times indicating the remaining number of times until the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches the second specified number of times is displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.